. Chemistry Vitros Vitros 350 Manuals Maintenance & Troubleshooting

350/250/250AT Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

Front PDF Cover Portrait 8.50" wide x 11" tall (finished size)

Part No. 994132UC

Maintenance & Diagnostics Guide

Export authorized under general license GTDA (General Technical Data Available) IMPORTANT The information contained herein is based on the experience and knowledge relating to the subject matter gained by Ortho-Clinical Diagnostics, Inc. prior to publication. No patent license is granted by the information. Ortho-Clinical Diagnostics, Inc. reserves the right to change this information without notice, and makes no warranty, express or implied, with respect to the information. The company shall not be liable for any loss or damage, including consequential or special damages resulting from the use of this information, even if loss or damage is caused by its negligence or other fault. VITROS is a trademark of Ortho-Clinical Diagnostics, Inc.

 Ortho-Clinical Diagnostics, Inc., 2004. All rights reserved.

Contents

1 Welcome 2 Periodic Maintenance 2–1 2–3 2–3 2–4 2–7 2–8 2–9 2–10 2–11 2–12 2–18 2–21 2–23 2–27 2–28 2–29 2–34 2–34 2–35 2–35 2–36 2–37 2–38 2–39 2–42 2–43 2–49 2–51 2–54 2–55 2–57 2–62 2–67 2–72 2–74 2–74

Version 2.0

Preparing for Periodic Maintenance Daily Maintenance Disposals and Supplies Emptying Disposal Boxes Cleaning Sample Trays Cleaning Height, Cup, and PCS Microcollection Tube Adapters Loading Mixing Cup Arrays and Tips Verifying Slide Inventory Verifying QC Fluids are Run on Slide Lots Reference Fluid Diluents Configuring the Diluent Tray Immuno-Wash Fluid Weekly Maintenance Cleaning the Tray Platform and Transport Arm Cleaning the Tip-Locator Assembly Cleaning the Cup Retainer Cleaning the Touchscreen Monitor/Flat LCD Touchscreen Monitor Cleaning the Keypad Cover Backup QC, Config, and Calibration Data Cleaning the Sample-Metering Path Inspecting the Air Filter As-Required Maintenance Replacing Humidity Control Packs and Desiccant Packs Changing the Reflectometer Lamp Adjusting the Reflectometer Iris Replacing the Sample Metering Tubing Cleaning the Discard Chutes Cleaning the Cabinets Cleaning the Dispense Blade/Slide Path Cleaning the Incubator Evaporation Caps and Slots Replacing the Incubator Evaporation Caps Cleaning the Proboscis Cleaning the PSID Scanner Window Decontaminating the Analyzer Cleaning the Analyzer

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System - Operator’s Manual

Contents-i

Contents

3 Diagnostics 3–1 3–3 3–4 3–5 3–7 3–8 3–9 3–10 3–12 3–14 3–15 3–16 3–17 3–18 3–18 3–18 3–19 3–29 3–32 3–33 3–34 3–38 3–38 3–39 3–40 3–44 3–49 3–49 3–51 3–53 3–53 3–57 3–59 3–59 3–61 3–66 3–72 3–73 3–74 3–81 3–82 3–84 3–91 3–92

Contents-ii

Using the Diagnostics Function Mechanism Exercise Diagnostics (MEDS) MEDS Sample Handler MEDS Sample Handler Movement Sequences MEDS Slide Supplies 1 and 2 MEDS Slide Supplies 1 and 2 Movement Sequences MEDS Sample Metering MEDS Sample Metering Movement Sequences—Truck/ Proboscis MEDS Sample Metering Movement Sequences—Pump/ Sample Fluid Drop MEDS Reference and Immuno-Rate (IR) Metering MEDS Incubator, Transverse Shuttle, and Electrometer MEDS Incubator, Transverse Shuttle, and Electrometer Movement Sequences MEDS Reflectometer Subsystem Tests Lab Comp Protocol Analyzer Setup/Adjust Rate/CM Correction Factor Test Reflectometer Iris Adjustment Current Setup Values Stand-Alone Diagnostic Tests Loopback Tests Complex Tests Performance Tests Sample Metering Testing Sample Metering Leak/Hysteresis Testing Sample Metering Drop Detection Incubator Testing Incubator Pad Reflectance Testing Incubator Position Timing PSID Scanner Performing the Tool Side Test Performing the User Samples Test Reflectometer Testing the Shutter Performing the Reflectometer Static Test Running the Dynamic Test Reference Metering Testing the Reference Fluid Metering Assembly Timing Running the System Tests Immuno-Rate Metering Testing the Immuno-Rate Metering Assembly Timing Running the System Tests Electrometer Testing Electrometer Normal Cycle

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System - Operator’s Manual

Version 2.0

Contents

3–94 Testing Electrometer Contact Drive Timing 3–96 Testing Electrometer Auto Checks 3–100 Testing Electrometer Extended Auto Checks 3–102 Cartridge Handling 3–102 Plunger Count Test 3–102 Testing the Bar Code Scanner 3–105 Testing Rotor Movement 3–108 Hardware and Chemistry Information 3–110 Recent History Log 3–113 Condition Code 3–114 Datalogger Analysis 3–115 Closing the Current Datalogger File 3–117 Accessing and Searching Datalogger Files 3–125 Software Identification

4 Environmental Monitoring 4–1 4–2 4–2 4–6 4–10 4–15

5

Troubleshooting 5–1 5–1 5–1 5–3 5–7 5–11 5–11 5–11 5–11 5–12 5–12 5–15 5–16 5–20 5–24 5–27 5–36 5–41

Version 2.0

Environmental Monitoring Environmental Error Conditions Incubator Temperature Control Slide Supply Temperature Control Slide Supply Humidity Control Voltage Readings

Self-Diagnostic Features Error Conditions Severity Levels Error Log Screen Troubleshooting Help Screens Error Messages for Downloaded Samples Flags and Codes on Forms Printer Reports Hardware Troubleshooting Initializing the Analyzer Loading/Resetting (Rebooting) the Analyzer Program Clearing Sample Tray Jams Clearing Sample Metering Jams Clearing Slide Cartridge Jams at the Load Door Clearing Slide Cartridge Jams at the Unload Door Clearing Slide Cartridge Jams at the Slide Supply Access Door Clearing Slide Cartridge and Slide Jams at the Slide Dispense Station, the Dispense Blade Path, and the Platen Area Clearing Slide Jams in the Transverse Shuttle and at the CM/ RT Eject Blade Position Clearing Slide Jams at the Electrometer Discard Station and

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System - Operator’s Manual

Contents-iii

Contents

5–45 5–49 5–49 5–49 5–49 5–49 5–49 5–49 5–50 5–50 5–50 5–51 5–55

at the PM Slide-Eject Position Clearing Slide Jams in the Tip-Locator/Metering Area General Troubleshooting Procedures Blank Control Unit Monitor CRT Monitor LCD Monitor Touch Screen is not Functioning Properly CRT Monitor LCD Monitor Touch Screen is Visible But Targets Do Not Respond CRT and LCD Monitors The Analyzer Cannot be Powered Up No Results are Printing Will Not Upload Data to or Download Data from the Lab Computer

6 Replacing Parts 6–1 6–1 6–4 6–7 6–11

Contents-iv

Installing a New Slide Supply Rotor Sensor Removing the Slide Supply Rotor Sensor Replacing the Slide Supply Rotor Sensor Replacing a Slide Supply Dispense Blade Replacing the Printhead on the Okidata Printer

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System - Operator’s Manual

Version 2.0

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Manual Revision History

Revision Date 2005-01-03

Description Incorporated updates for the VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System • Reflects software release version 9.0 • Reflects new LCD Monitor • Illustrations reflecting design updates to the Monitor are revised throughout • Added new procedure to clean the LCD Monitor • Updated General Troubleshooting Procedures

04/04

New release. Reflects software version v8.0 • Removed reference to Battery Backup System

10/01

Reflects revised information: • Table of Contents • Daily Maintenance Log (Chapter 2) • Revised Filter Adjustment Guidelines - Target Voltage (Chapter 2) • This manual should contain the following Technical Bulletins: • J12379 - Type III Monitor for the VITROS 250/250AT, VITROS 550/750 and VITROS 950/950AT Chemistry Systems and VITROS ECi Immunodiagnostic Systems • J12398 - Cleaning Procedure for the TIP Locator Assembly on the VITROS 250/250AT Chemistry System

1/00

Reflects software version 7.0. New or revised information: • Revised Filter Adjustment Guidelines (Chapter 3) • Revised Filter Verification Limits (Chapter 3) • Revised replacement blade orientation and illustration (Chapter 6)

Version 2.0

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

v

Important Safeguards and Precautions

Revision Date 6/98

Description (Continued) Reflects software version 6.0. New or revised information: • Company name change to Ortho-Clinical Diagnostics, Inc., a Johnson & Johnson Company • Revised Safeguards and Precautions • Revised Maintenance Logs (Chapter 2) • Revision to scanner window cleaning procedure (Chapter 2)

9/96

Reflects software version 5.0. New or revised information: • New information for storage of VITROS Reference Fluid reservoirs (Chapter 2) • Addition to proboscis cleaning procedure (Chapter 2) • VITROS Immuno-Wash Fluid on-analyzer storage extended to 72 hours (Chapter 2) • Rate/CM Correction Factor Test screen changes (Chapter 3) • Daily Maintenance Log (Chapter 3)

4/96

Introduction of Johnson & Johnson VITROS Chemistry Systems trademark nomenclature.

5/95

Reflects software versions 4.0 and higher. New or revised information: • New analyzer label for clearing slide cartridge jams • New periodic maintenance logs (Chapter 2) • Revised reflectometer iris adjustment procedure (Chapters 2, 3) • Information about MEDs targets that will not appear if a subsystem is disabled (Chapter 3) • Revised Rate/CM Correction Factors Test procedure (Chapter 3) • Information about initializing the analyzer with interlocks open (Chapter 5) • New analyzer program load procedure (Chapter 5) • New procedure for clearing slide cartridge jams at the slide supply access door (Chapter 5) • Replacing print heads on the standard Okidata printer (Chapter 6) • Ordering Parts and Sundries (Chapter 7) removed • New index

vi

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

Version 2.0

Important Safeguards and Precautions

Revision Date 2/1/94

Description (Continued) New release. Reflects software version 3.0. Table of Contents revised. Revision History and List of Effective Pages added. Change bars used to mark changes since last revision. New or revised information: • Preparing for periodic maintenance (Chapter 2) • Periodic maintenance procedures (Chapter 2) — Immuno-Wash Fluid maintenance — Cleaning the tip locator assembly — Adjusting the reflectometer iris — Cleaning the dispense blade/slide path — Cleaning the incubator evaporation caps and slots — Replacing the incubator evaporation caps • Maintenance logs (Chapter 2) • Diagnostics and MEDS (Chapter 3) — Rate/CM correction factor test — Current setup values — Sample metering performance test — Immuno-rate metering test • Clearing slide cartridge jams (Chapter 5) • Replacing the slide supply dispense blade (Chapter 6) • Ordering Parts and Sundries (Chapter 7)

1/1/93

Version 2.0

First release of manual. Reflects version 1.1 of the software

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

vii

Important Safeguards and Precautions

VITROS 250/350 System Maintenance and Diagnostics Manual List of Effective Pages .

Publication Date

Section

2005-01-03

All pages in this publication have been revised to reflect Version 2.0

04/04

All pages in this publication have been revised to reflect Version 1.0

10/01

1/00

6/98

9/96

Page

Important Safeguards and Precautions

Page xviii

Chapter 1 - Welcome

Page 1-1

Chapter 2 - Periodic Maintenance

Page 2-6 - 2-9, 2-11, 2-20

Chapter 3- Diagnostics

Page 3-126

Chapter 5 - Troubleshooting

Page 5-1

Contents

Pages i-iii

Chapter 2 - Periodic Maintenance

Pages 46, Daily Maintenance Log

All pages listed below should be at publication date 1/00. Chapter 3 - Diagnostics

Pages 31-32

Chapter 6 - Replacing Parts

Page 9

All pages listed below should be at publication date 6/98. Important Safeguards and Precautions

Pages viii, xviii

Chapter 2 - Periodic Maintenance

Maintenance Logs Pages 71-74

Chapter 3 - Diagnostics

All pages

Chapter 4 - Environmental Monitoring

Page 1

All pages listed below should be at publication date 9/96. All other pages should be at publication date 5/95. Reprinted 4/96 or 2/1/94. Reprinted 4/96. Chapter 2 - Periodic Maintenance

All pages Daily Maintenance Log

Chapter 3 - Diagnostics 5/95

viii

Pages 21-22

All pages listed below should be at publication date 5/95. All other pages should be at publication date 2/1/94. Reprinted 5/95. Important Safeguards and Precautions

Pages iii–vi, x, xi

Contents

All pages

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

Version 2.0

Important Safeguards and Precautions

Publication Date

2/1/94

Version 2.0

Section

Page

Chapter 2 - Periodic Maintenance

Pages 45, 45.a, 45.b, 46, Maintenance Logs

Chapter 3 - Diagnostics

Pages 4, 14, 15, 19, 20, 21- 23, 23.a, 23.b, 23.c, 23.d, 24, 25, 25.a, 25.b, 26

Chapter 5 - Troubleshooting

Pages 7, 13, 14, 25, 25.a, 25.b, 25.c, 25.d

Chapter 6 - Replacing Pages

Pages 11-14

Chapter 7

Removed

Index

All pages

All sections

All pages

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

ix

Important Safeguards and Precautions Laser Light Warning

Important Safeguards and Precautions Laser Light Warning

The VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System, with Positive Sample Identification (PSID) installed, uses a Class II Visible Laser Diode that emits a low-power laser beam. Brief eye exposure to the beam will not cause any known biological harm, but you should not stare directly into the laser beam, just as you would not stare at the sun. Use caution to avoid exposing your eyes to a reflection of the laser beam. Do not place any reflecting surface in the path of the beam when the equipment is in operation. Only qualified service personnel should perform alignments, adjustments, and disassembly procedures. Use of controls, adjustments, or procedures other than those specified in this manual may result in hazardous radiation exposure. The following warning appears in the Reference Set. WARNING Avoid directly and continually exposing your eyes to the laser beam, or a reflection of the laser beam.

Laser Light Safety Label

The laser light safety label is located on the PSID scanner.

LASER RADIATION IS EMITTED FROM THIS APERTURE CAUTION – LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN DO NOT STARE INTO BEAM. CLASS 2 LASER PRODUCT AVOID LONG TERM VIEWING OF DIRECT LASER RADIATION

x

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

Version 2.0

Important Safeguards and Precautions Electrical Hazards

Electrical Hazards

Potential electrical hazards exist behind the side, front, and back panels. Keep doors, covers, and panels closed during normal operation for your own protection and to maintain analyzer temperature. Do not operate the analyzer if any of the modules have been removed. Removing modules from their normal positions may create electrical hazards. This includes slide supply, sample metering, sample handler (tip supply, mixing cup supply, tray transport, sample supply, diluent supply), reference fluid metering, incubator, reflectometer, and electrometer modules.

Scanner Safeguards

Version 2.0

The scanner component used for Positive Sample Identification (PSID) is an integral part of the system. Only qualified service personnel should perform alignments, adjustments, and disassembly procedures of the PSID scanner component.

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

xi

Important Safeguards and Precautions Analyzer Labels

Analyzer Labels

Listed below are the agency-approved, warning, safety, and miscellaneous labels on the analyzer. Illustrations showing their location follow. • Name Plate: Sample Handler • Name Plate: Slide Processor • Slide Supply — Analyzer Options — Hardware Modifications: Slide Processor — Clearing Slide Cartridge Jams • Hardware Modifications: Sample Handler • Reset • Biohazard (Slide Disposal Box) • Biohazard (Mixing Cup Array and Tip Disposal Box) • Cartridge Disposal Box • Ground Symbol • Hot Surface (Lamp) • Hot Surface • Refer to Manual • Volume Control/Iris Adjustment • Laser Compliance • Laser Light Safety • Leakage Current • FCC • CDOC (Canadian) • VFG (Verflugen) • High Voltage • 120-Volt Printer • 120-Volt Monitor • Ports • Mechanical Pinch Point • Rotor Assembly Disk • Electrolyte Reference Fluid (ERF) • Immuno-Wash Fluid (IWF)

xii

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

Version 2.0

Important Safeguards and Precautions Analyzer Labels

Name Plate: Sample Handler

SERVICE CODE

SERIAL NUMBER

3331

LISTED

2505

50/60Hz 50/60Hz

100 - 120V~ 200 - 240V~ 3D90

12A 6A CLASSIFICATION

R R

TÜV Rheinland

geprüfte Sicherheit

Made in Germany for Ortho-Clinical Diagnostics, Inc. Rochester, New York 14626-5101

Name Plate: Slide Processor

SERVICE CODE

3332

SERIAL NUMBER

2501XXXX CnP

Made by Ortho-Clinical Diagnostics, Inc. Rochester, New York 14626-5101

Slide Supply: – Analyzer Options – Hardware Modifications: Slide Supply – Clearing Slide Cartridge Jams

Version 2.0

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

xiii

Important Safeguards and Precautions Analyzer Labels

Hardware Modifications: Sample Handler

HARDWARE KODAK

MODIFICATION

Reset

Program Load / Reset

Biohazard (Slide Disposal Box)

xiv

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

Version 2.0

Important Safeguards and Precautions Analyzer Labels

Biohazard (Mixing Cup Array and Tip Disposal Box)

Cartridge Disposal Box

Ground Symbol

Version 2.0

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

xv

Important Safeguards and Precautions Analyzer Labels

Hot Surface (Lamp)

Hot Surface

Refer to Manual

xvi

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

Version 2.0

Important Safeguards and Precautions Analyzer Labels

Volume Control/Iris Adjustment

Laser Compliance (only with PSID installed)

Ortho-Clinical Diagnostics Rochester, NY 14626-5101

Laser Light Safety (only with PSID installed) LASER RADIATION IS EMITTED FROM THIS APERTURE CAUTION – LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN DO NOT STARE INTO BEAM. CLASS 2 LASER PRODUCT AVOID LONG TERM VIEWING OF DIRECT LASER RADIATION

Version 2.0

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

xvii

Important Safeguards and Precautions Analyzer Labels

Leakage Current

CAUTION HIGH LEAKAGE CURRENT ENSURE PROPER GROUNDING

ATTENTION COURANT DE FUITE ÉLEVÉ FOURNIR UNE MISE A LA TERRE EFFICACE

FCC

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

CDOC (Canadian)

Le pré sent apparell numé rique n’é met pas de brulis radiolectriques dé é passant les limites applicables aux apparells numé riques de la classe B prescrites dans le Ré glement sur le brouillage radioé lectrique d é icté par le ministé re des Communications du Canada.

xviii

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class B limits for radio noise emissions from digital apparatus set out in the Radio Interference Regulations of the Canadian Department of Communications.

PN 356409

Version 2.0

Important Safeguards and Precautions Analyzer Labels

High Voltage

120-Volt Printer

120-Volt Monitor

Ports

Version 2.0

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

xix

Important Safeguards and Precautions Analyzer Labels

Mechanical Pinch Point

Rotor Assembly Disk Inside Top View

ATTENTION After removing the rotor assy, place the label side down to protect the surface of the disk.

Electrolyte Reference Fluid (ERF)

ERF

Immuno-Wash Fluid (IWF)

IWF

xx

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

Version 2.0

Important Safeguards and Precautions General Precautions

General Precautions

We recommend that the key operator perform all periodic maintenance procedures.

Moving Parts

Wherever there are moving parts, such as the dispense blade, slide supply rotors, and the incubator disk, use caution when correcting malfunctions and when operating the analyzer. When either of the covers of the VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System are raised, interlock switches prevent the movement of any high-speed or high-power modules. Other modules are still operational.

Cleaning Solutions

Do not use any solvents or cleaning solutions on the equipment other than distilled or deionized water. Never use ammonia cleaners on or near the analyzer. CAUTION:

Do not use solvents, alcohol, ammonia, glass cleaners, or cleaning agents containing abrasives to clean the control unit monitor. These items will damage the touch screen and impair your ability to interact with the analyzer computer.

CAUTION:

Do not use solvents, alcohol, ammonia, glass cleaners, or cleaning agents containing abrasives to clean the incubator evaporation caps. These items will damage the caps and affect system performance.

CAUTION:

Do not touch or clean the Spectralon reference material.

WARNING:

Dispose of paper towels and cotton swabs used to clean the analyzer following biohazard procedures. These items may be contaminated with serum or other body fluids.

Clean contaminated analyzer components using a 70 percent isopropyl alcohol in water solution when suggested in the following maintenance procedures. Be sure to use no more than a 70 percent concentrated solution. It is critical that enough water is present to hydrolyze and thus break down proteins. NOTE: Do not contaminate any other fluids (for example, VITROS 250/350 System Reference Fluid) with isopropyl alcohol solution. NO fluids used on the analyzer should be contaminated with isopropyl alcohol solution or erroneous results will occur. Rinse all components thoroughly with warm distilled or deionized water to remove all traces of isopropyl alcohol. Do not autoclave any component unless autoclaving is specifically indicated to be an acceptable alternative. NOTE: You may leave the analyzer on, unless specified otherwise; but do not process samples while you perform maintenance procedures.

Moving the Equipment

Version 2.0

Only authorized field personnel are permitted to move equipment from one location to another. If the equipment is moved, it should be checked by authorized personnel. The equipment should also be checked if any unusual vibration has occurred that may affect it (for example, heavy construction nearby or earthquake).

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

xxi

Important Safeguards and Precautions Moving the Equipment

xxii

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

Version 2.0

1 Welcome The VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System will provide optimum performance when you use it according to recommended operating and periodic maintenance instructions. (See the Operator’s Manual and the Quick Guide of the Reference Set for the operating instructions, and Chapter 2, “Periodic Maintenance” in this volume.) Be sure to perform all daily, weekly, and as-required maintenance procedures to keep your equipment running efficiently and to ensure reliable results. Sample maintenance logs are provided at the end of Chapter 2 for your convenience. Complete a maintenance log each time you perform maintenance procedures. Should you encounter any difficulties in daily operation of the equipment, consult Chapter 3, “Diagnostics,” or Chapter 5, “Troubleshooting,” in this volume. Should you encounter further difficulties, contact your Customer Support Representative for assistance.

Version 2.0

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

1–1

Welcome

1–2

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

Version 2.0

2 Periodic Maintenance Preparing for Periodic Maintenance

This chapter provides you with information for maintaining the VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System. It is divided into three parts—daily, weekly, and as-required maintenance. NOTE: You may leave the analyzer on, unless specified otherwise; but do not process samples while you perform maintenance procedures. After performing each maintenance procedure, make a record of it on a maintenance log. There are sample logs at the end of this chapter and in the Operator’s Quick Guide. You may copy them for your use, or you may want to establish a customized maintenance log for your own laboratory. If questions arise on maintenance and diagnostics during daily operation of the analyzer, read the manual carefully. If you still need assistance, contact your Customer Support Representative. WARNING:

Assume that all used equipment is contaminated with potentially infectious biological material. Use the “Universal Precautions” recommended by OSHA (Occupational Safety and Health Administration) Bloodborne Pathogen Standard 29CFR1910.1030 when handling or cleaning equipment. In particular: •Wear gloves, closed shoes, buttoned lab coats, and safety glasses throughout the cleaning and maintenance process. •Treat all waste materials used in the cleaning process as contaminated. Follow the site procedures for your laboratory to dispose of these materials. •Handle all equipment with care. Mechanical parts may have edges, pinch points, and corners that could potentially cause injury.

Refer to the “Important Safeguards and Precautions” at the beginning of this manual for more information. In addition, refer to the NCCLS guidelines for “Protection of Laboratory Workers from Instrument Biohazards” (NCCLS Document M29-A).

Version 2.0

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

2–1

Periodic Maintenance Preparing for Periodic Maintenance

To access the Periodic Maintenance screen and begin using the periodic maintenance features, touch PERIODIC MAINTENANCE on the Main Menu.

SAMPLING

REMOTE ENABLED READY

LAB COMP : TESTING COMPLETE

PERIODIC MAINTENANCE

Apr 24 XX 14:13:12

ON

OFF

VX.XX**250 PM00A

Categories:

DAILY MAINTENANCE

WEEKLY MAINTENANCE

AS REQUIRED MAINTENANCE

> Touch a target to select a category. RETURN

HELP

Instructions on using the daily, weekly, and as-required maintenance features follow.

2–2

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

Version 2.0

Periodic Maintenance Daily Maintenance

Daily Maintenance

Perform daily maintenance each day before processing samples.

Disposals and Supplies

To perform daily maintenance for disposals and supplies: 1. Touch DAILY MAINTENANCE on the Periodic Maintenance screen.

LAB COMP: TESTING COMPLETE

READY Categories

SAMPLING

Apr 24 XX 14:13:12

ON

OFF

PERIODIC MAINTENANCE - Daily

VX.XX**250 PM00B

DISPOSALS AND SUPPLIES

FLUIDS

> Touch a target to select a category. RETURN

HELP

2. Touch DISPOSALS AND SUPPLIES.

LAB COMP: TESTING COMPLETE

READY

SAMPLING

PERIODIC MAINTENANCE - Daily

Apr 24 XX 14:13:12

ON

OFF

VX.XX**250 PM00C

EMPTY: 1. Mixing Cup and Tip Disposal Container. 2. Slide Cartridge Disposal Container. 3. Slide Disposal Container. INSPECT: 1. Sample Trays for cleanliness/damage. LOAD: 1. Mixing Cup Array in the Cup Supply. 2. Tips in the Tip Supply. VERIFY: 1. Slide Inventory on the Analyzer. 2. QC Fluids are run on Slide Lots to be used.

RETURN

HELP

3. Perform the daily maintenance procedures shown on the screen. Instructions follow.

Version 2.0

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

2–3

Periodic Maintenance Emptying Disposal Boxes

Emptying Disposal Boxes

There are three disposal boxes located behind the two front doors of the analyzer. You must empty them daily. NOTES: Be sure testing is complete and sampling is OFF before you empty the disposal boxes. The analyzer does not prevent removal of the boxes while tests are in process. If the mixingcup array and tip disposal box is removed while sampling is on or if the slide-disposal box is removed while tests are in process, the disposal box tracks may become contaminated. The slide disposal box holds approximately 800 slides. Highvolume laboratories may need to empty the box more often than once a day.

2–4

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

Version 2.0

Periodic Maintenance Emptying Disposal Boxes

To empty the disposal boxes: 1. Open the two front doors of the analyzer. 2. Remove the three disposal boxes (the mixing cup array and tip disposal box, the slide disposal box, and the cartridge disposal box) from the analyzer.

Mixing-Cup Array and Tip-Disposal Box

Cartridge-Disposal Box Slide-Disposal Box

3. The mixing cup array and tip disposal box and the slide disposal box contain liners. Discard the two liners and their contents following your established laboratory procedures for the disposal of biohazardous materials.

Version 2.0

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

2–5

Periodic Maintenance Emptying Disposal Boxes

4. Discard the contents of the cartridge disposal box according to your laboratory’s procedures. The cartridge disposal box does not receive biohazardous waste. 5. If any of the disposal boxes are contaminated with body fluids, clean them as follows: — Clean the boxes using 70 percent isopropyl alcohol in water solution. — Rinse the boxes thoroughly with warm water. — Allow the boxes to air dry thoroughly. 6. Place a new liner in the slide disposal box. Use a Slide Disposal Box Liner, Cat. No. 120-4791. 7. Reinsert the slide disposal box into the analyzer. Push the disposal box as far as possible to the rear of the analyzer. 8. Place a new liner in the mixing-cup array and tip disposal box. Use a VITROS Disposal Box Liner CM/Cup Array, Cat. No. 125-0273. 9. Reinsert the mixing cup array and tip disposal box into the analyzer. Push the disposal box as far as possible to the rear of the analyzer. 10. Reinsert the cartridge disposal box. This box does not receive biohazardous waste; therefore, it does not require a liner. 11. Close the two front doors.

2–6

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

Version 2.0

Periodic Maintenance Cleaning Sample Trays

Cleaning Sample Trays

Inspect the sample trays for any damage such as cracks or missing parts. Using damaged trays can result in sample metering problems. Replace them, if necessary.

Universal Sample Tray

To clean the sample trays: 1. Wash soiled trays in warm, soapy water. 2. Rinse with water to remove any soap residue. 3. Clean contaminated trays using 70 percent isopropyl alcohol in water solution. 4. Rinse the trays thoroughly with warm water. 5. Allow the trays to air dry thoroughly. Do not autoclave the trays.

Version 2.0

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

2–7

Periodic Maintenance Cleaning Height, Cup, and PCS Microcollection Tube Adapters

Cleaning Height, Cup, and PCS Microcollection Tube Adapters

To clean height, cup, and tube adapters: 1. Wash soiled adapters in warm, soapy water. 2. Rinse with water to remove any soap residue. 3. Clean contaminated adapters using 70 percent isopropyl alcohol in water solution. 4. Rinse the adapters thoroughly with warm water. 5. Allow the adapters to air dry thoroughly. Do not autoclave the adapters.

Microcollection Tube Adapter Cup Adapter

Height Adapter

Universal Sample Tray

2–8

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

Version 2.0

Periodic Maintenance Loading Mixing Cup Arrays and Tips

Loading Mixing Cup Arrays and Tips

To load mixing-cup arrays and sample tips: 1. From the front of the analyzer, slide the mixing cup arrays onto the transport belt of the mixing cup array supply. The supply holds a maximum of five trays.

2. Place the VITROS VersaTips into the Tip Rack. 3. Load the tip rack onto the transport belts of the tip supply. The supply holds a maximum of four racks.

Version 2.0

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

2–9

Periodic Maintenance Verifying Slide Inventory

Verifying Slide Inventory

You can use the slide inventory feature to display the total number of slides loaded for each test and lot number. This daily step allows you to evaluate slide inventory and manage slide lots, keep an adequate supply of calibrated slides on the analyzer to avoid unnecessary stops during sample processing, and know when a slide lot will run out to plan calibration or quality control. When you transfer data from a new calibration diskette, the new diskette may not support some of the slides currently loaded on the analyzer if their generations have expired. These slides will not appear on the Slide Inventory screen. To verify slide inventory on the analyzer: 1. Press the (F2) function key on the keyboard to display the Cartridge Handling dialogue.

READY

LAB COMP: TESTING COMPLETE

SAMPLING ON

CARTRIDGE HANDLING

OFF

Nov 02 92 14:13:12 VX.XX**250 CH01A

Display:

Load:

Unload:

SLIDE INVENTORY

MANUAL LOT # ENTRY

BY TEST / LOT

SLIDE SUPPLY CONTENTS

BY POSITION

BY POSITION

NEW GEN

ALL EMPTY CARTRIDGES ALL CARTRIDGES BY SUPPLY

> Touch a target to select a function. RETURN

HELP

2. Touch SLIDE INVENTORY in the Display column

2–10

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

Version 2.0

Periodic Maintenance Verifying QC Fluids are Run on Slide Lots

READY

OFF

ON

VX.XX**250 CH01B PAGE 1 of 4

CARTRIDGE HANDLING - Inventory Test :

Total Slide Count :

Lot Number :

Jul 15 92 14:13:12

SAMPLING

LAB COMP: TESTING COMPLETE

Cal'd Fluid:

Current :

ALB 0928-5384 S S 49 6015-2964 S/U AMYL 54 S/U CHOL (HDLC) 0832-4655 51 S S Cl4003-4566 52 S S ECO2 S 5707-2659 S 57 GLU 0 K+ 4102-7161 S/U S/U 46 S/U Na+ 48 S/U 4223-43481 S TP 50 0635-4124 S S TRIG 0722-2934 S 57 S 0512-3589 URIC 57 S/U S/U 1191-1111 S dHDL 46 > Touch NEXT PAGE for more inventory data. Touch PRINT INVENTORY to print the inventory data. RETURN

PREVIOUS PAGE

NEXT PAGE

PRINT INVENTORY

HELP

3. Compare the total number of slides available against what you anticipate needing for your daily run. 4. Touch RETURN twice to return to Periodic Maintenance. Verifying QC Fluids are Run on Slide Lots

Check and verify that quality control fluids have been run on the slide lots you will be using. Run quality control fluids as part of your daily maintenance after performing all other daily maintenance procedures. Minimum frequency for monitoring the performance of the analyzer and slides is once every 24 hours. (State and/or local regulations may require more frequent performance checks.) For a detailed explanation of the quality control feature, refer to Chapter 11, “Quality Control,” in the Operator’s Manual.

Version 2.0

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

2–11

Periodic Maintenance Reference Fluid

Reference Fluid

To perform the daily maintenance procedure for reference fluid: 1. Lift the top right cover of the analyzer.

2. Touch PERIODIC MAINTENANCE on the Main Menu. 3. Touch DAILY MAINTENANCE.

LAB COMP: TESTING COMPLETE

READY Categories

SAMPLING

PERIODIC MAINTENANCE - Daily

Apr 24 XX 14:13:12

ON

OFF

VX.XX**250 PM00B

DISPOSALS AND SUPPLIES

FLUIDS

> Touch a target to select a category. RETURN

HELP

4. Touch FLUIDS.

2–12

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

Version 2.0

Periodic Maintenance Reference Fluid

READY Fluids:

LAB COMP: TESTING COMPLETE

SAMPLING

PERIODIC MAINTENANCE - Daily

ON

OFF

Aug 23 XX 14:13:12 VX.XX**250 PM00D

REFERENCE FLUID

DILUENTS

IMMUNOWASH FLUID

> Touch a target to select a fluid. RETURN

HELP

5. Touch REFERENCE FLUID. The reference metering arm will lift out of the reservoir to the tip-change position. The screen instructs you to change the tip and the reservoir.

Version 2.0

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

2–13

Periodic Maintenance Reference Fluid

LAB COMP: TESTING COMPLETE

READY

SAMPLING

PERIODIC MAINTENANCE - Daily

May 19 XX 14:13:12

ON

OFF

VX.XX**250 PM00E

Immuno-Wash Fluid: 1. Change Tip. 2. Change Reservoir. CURRENT RESERVOIR DROP COUNT VALUE: 258 NEW RESERVOIR DROP COUNT VALUE: 300

> Was the fluid reservoir replaced? RETURN

(Y/N): HELP

NOTE: You must change the VITROS Micro Tip every eight hours. You must change the Reference Fluid Reservoir and clean the reference fluid reservoir cover seal every 24 hours. Bring a fresh, unopened disposable reservoir to analyzer temperature before use. Do this by placing the reservoir on top of the incubator cover for a minimum of 30 minutes. An unrefrigerated reservoir is stable for 24 hours. Reservoirs that will not be used right away should remain refrigerated.

2–14

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

Version 2.0

Periodic Maintenance Reference Fluid

6. Swing up the arm so that it forms a right angle with the referencemetering assembly. Reference Metering Arm Reference Metering Assembly

7. With one hand, pull the lever to eject the tip. Be prepared to catch the tip with your other hand as it ejects.

VITROS Micro Tip

Lever

8. Wipe the reference proboscis (which holds the VITROS Micro Tip in place) with a lint-free cloth moistened with distilled or deionized water. 9. Dry it with another lint-free cloth. 10. Steady the arm with one hand. Insert a new micro tip by pushing it firmly into place. You will hear a click.

Version 2.0

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

2–15

Periodic Maintenance Reference Fluid

11. Replace the reservoir. — Lift the retainer lid that holds the reservoir. — Remove the old reservoir and discard it. — Wipe out the housing using a lint-free cloth. — Mix the reservoir thoroughly by gentle inversion. — Peel the protective seal off the reservoir after it has reached room temperature. — Place the reservoir into the reservoir housing.

Cover

Housing Reference Fluid Reservoir

WARNING:

Do not place the reference fluid reservoir into the Immuno-Wash Fluid reservoir housing. Error codes may occur during immuno-rate Sample Processing.

12. Remove the reference fluid reservoir cover. 13. Remove the seal from the bottom of the reservoir cover, and clean it with distilled or deionized water. BOTTOM OF RESERVOIR COVER

Seal

2–16

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

Version 2.0

Periodic Maintenance Reference Fluid

14. Wipe the cover with a lint-free cloth moistened with distilled or deionized water. 15. Dry the cover and seal thoroughly, being careful not to leave any lint or fibers. 16. Insert a clean seal on the cover, and return the cover to its normal operating position. 17. Type “Y” and press the Enter key on the keyboard to answer the prompt, “Was the fluid reservoir replaced?” 18. Touch RETURN. The reference arm assembly will return to the “home” position, and the screen will display the fluid drop count update.

LAB COMP: TESTING COMPLETE

READY

SAMPLING

PERIODIC MAINTENANCE - Daily

May 19 XX 14:13:12

ON

OFF

VX.XX**250 PM00E

Immuno-Wash Fluid: 1. Change Tip. 2. Change Reservoir. CURRENT RESERVOIR DROP COUNT VALUE: 258 NEW RESERVOIR DROP COUNT VALUE: 300

> Was the fluid reservoir replaced? RETURN

(Y/N): HELP

19. Touch RETURN. The analyzer will initialize.

Version 2.0

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

2–17

Periodic Maintenance Diluents

Diluents

NOTE: Fresh diluent fluids must be at room temperature. See the VITROS Instructions for Use for on-board stability. To perform daily maintenance for diluents: 1. Touch FLUIDS on the Periodic Maintenance – Daily screen.

LAB COMP: TESTING COMPLETE

READY

SAMPLING

PERIODIC MAINTENANCE - Daily

Fluids:

ON

OFF

Aug 23 XX 14:13:12 VX.XX**250 PM00D

REFERENCE FLUID

DILUENTS

IMMUNOWASH FLUID

> Touch a target to select a fluid. RETURN

HELP

2. Touch DILUENTS. The diluent tray carrier is moved toward the front of the analyzer. 3. Remove the tray through the diluent supply opening in the front of the analyzer.

Diluent Supply Opening

2–18

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

Version 2.0

Periodic Maintenance Diluents

LAB COMP: TESTING COMPLETE

READY

SAMPLING

Apr 24 XX 14:13:12

ON

OFF

VX.XX**250 PM00F

PERIODIC MAINTENANCE - DAILY Diluent Configuration - Tray A 2ml PAT 1

2ml PAT 2

2ml

2ml

5ml

5ml

10ml

10ml

SALN

ABSA

SPEC

7BSA

H20

ELEC

3

4

5

6

7

8

1. Place fluids in positionas shown. 2. Load Diluent Tray on the Analyzer.

> Touch RETURN to reload the Diluent Tray. RETURN

HELP

4. Remove the old diluents, if any, and discard them. We supply 7% BSA/Bovine Serum Albumin and VITROS Urine Electrolyte Diluent in glass bottles designed to fit onto the diluent tray. It may be advantageous to transfer aliquots of these diluents to 2 mL sample cups (without caps). Simply put the cup onto the diluent tray, and the tray’s stopper will prevent evaporation. Several empty bottles are provided for distilled water and saline. NOTE: The seven percent BSA and the Urine Electrolyte Diluents can remain on the diluent tray no longer than seven days. 5. Remove and clean the rubber stoppers every time a bottle is removed or inserted. Replace any stoppers that are cracked or damaged.

Stopper

Version 2.0

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

2–19

Periodic Maintenance Diluents

NOTE: Wear clean gloves when you clean and replace the stoppers to prevent finger oil or contaminated gloves from contaminating the stoppers. 6. Locate a new stopper. The stoppers have two grooves on the top surface. Hold the stopper flat side down, and insert the top groove into the gap on the diluent tray stopper holder. 7. After replacing as many stoppers as required, place fresh, roomtemperature diluent fluids in positions shown on the screen.

LAB COMP: TESTING COMPLETE

READY

SAMPLING

Apr 24 XX 14:13:12

ON

OFF

VX.XX**250 PM00F

PERIODIC MAINTENANCE - DAILY Diluent Configuration - Tray A 2ml PAT 1

2ml PAT 2

2ml

2ml

5ml

5ml

10ml

10ml

SALN

ABSA

SPEC

7BSA

H20

ELEC

3

4

5

6

7

8

1. Place fluids in positionas shown. 2. Load Diluent Tray on the Analyzer.

> Touch RETURN to reload the Diluent Tray. RETURN

HELP

8. Load the diluent tray back onto the diluent tray carrier. 9. Touch RETURN, and the diluent tray will return automatically to its “home” position.

2–20

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

Version 2.0

Periodic Maintenance Configuring the Diluent Tray

Configuring the Diluent Tray

To configure the diluent tray if the current configuration does not meet your needs: 1. Touch OPTIONS on the Main Menu. 2. Type the access code using the keyboard, and press the Enter key on the keyboard.

LAB COMP : TESTING COMPLETE

READY

OPTIONS Disk Srvcs

Jul 15 92

SAMPLING

14:13:12 ON

OFF

VX.XX**250 OP00B System Services

Test Data

Cal Data

TEST/ FLUID CONFIG

CAL PARAMS

LOAD CAL DISKETTE

REPORT CONTROL

SUBSYSTEM CONTROL

COEF & LIMITS

CALIBRATOR LOT # SELECTION

BACKUP/ RESTORE DISKETTE

WORKLOAD & USAGE REPORTS

ANALYZER CONFIG

ADDITIONAL TESTS CONFIG

CALIBRATOR SAVs

DISK FILE SERVICES

SPECIAL SERVICES

DILUENT DATA > Touch a target to select an option. PRINT CONFIG REPORT

RETURN

HELP

3. Touch ANALYZER CONFIG in the System Services column.

LAB COMP : TESTING COMPLETE

READY Functions STATUS CONSOLE

OPTIONS – Analyzer Configuration Tests Reports

Jul 15 92

SAMPLING

14:13:12 ON

OFF

VX.XX**250 OP00E

Memory

DILUENT TRAY CONFIG

LAB COMPUTER CONFIG

SAMPLE PROGRAM RETENTION

TEST REPORTING CONFIG

LAB REPORT CONFIG

RESULT RECORD RETENTION

PRINTER REPORT CONFIG

ANALYZER NAME CONFIG

LANGUAGE CONFIG

PATIENT REPORT CONFIG > Touch a target to select a category. RETURN

HELP

4. Touch DILUENT TRAY CONFIG in the Tests column.

Version 2.0

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

2–21

Periodic Maintenance Configuring the Diluent Tray

LAB COMP : TESTING COMPLETE

READY

SAMPLING

Aug 24 XX 14:13:12

ON

OFF

OPTIONS – Analyzer Configuration

VX.XX**250 OP31Q

Diluent Tray Configuration

Diluent Configuration – Tray A 2ml

2ml

2ml

2ml

5ml

5ml

10ml

10ml

PAT

PAT

SALN

ABSA

H20

H20

7BSA

ELEC

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

> To add diluents or to change the current tray setup, touch a tray postion; type diluent name desired in that position, then press ENTER. RETURN

ENTER TRAY CONFIG

HELP

5. To add diluents or to change the current diluent tray setup, touch a diluent tray position target. 6. Type the diluent name abbreviation (up to four characters) desired in that position, and press the Enter key on the keyboard. 7. Touch another tray position target to continue updating the diluent tray configuration. 8. To cancel any changes made, touch RETURN. 9. To save the updated configuration, touch ENTER TRAY CONFIG. 10. Touch RETURN to exit.

2–22

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

Version 2.0

Periodic Maintenance Immuno-Wash Fluid

Immuno-Wash Fluid

To perform daily maintenance for immuno-wash fluid: 1. Touch FLUIDS on the Periodic Maintenance-Daily screen.

SAMPLING

LAB COMP: TESTING COMPLETE

READY

ON

OFF

PERIODIC MAINTENANCE - Daily

Fluids:

Aug 23 XX 14:13:12 VX.XX**250 PM00D

REFERENCE FLUID

DILUENTS

IMMUNOWASH FLUID

> Touch a target to select a fluid. RETURN

HELP

2. Touch IMMUNO-WASH FLUID.

LAB COMP: TESTING COMPLETE

READY

SAMPLING

PERIODIC MAINTENANCE - Daily

May 19 XX 14:13:12

ON

OFF

VX.XX**250 PM00E

Immuno-Wash Fluid: 1. Change Tip. 2. Change Reservoir. CURRENT RESERVOIR DROP COUNT VALUE: 258 NEW RESERVOIR DROP COUNT VALUE: 300

> Was the fluid reservoir replaced? RETURN

Version 2.0

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

(Y/N): HELP

2–23

Periodic Maintenance Immuno-Wash Fluid

NOTE: You must change the VITROS Micro Tip every eight hours. You must change the Immuno-Wash Fluid Reservoir at least every 72 hours, and clean the reservoir cover seal every 24 hours. Bring a fresh, unopened disposable reservoir to analyzer temperature before use. Do this by placing the reservoir on top of the incubator cover for a minimum of 30 minutes before use. Return any unopened reservoirs to the refrigerator if you will not use them immediately. 3. Swing up the arm so that it forms a right angle with the immunorate metering assembly. Immuno-Rate Metering Arm Immuno-Rate Metering Assembly

4. With one hand, pull the lever to eject the tip. Be prepared to catch the tip with your other hand as it ejects.

VITROS Micro Tip

2–24

Lever

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

Version 2.0

Periodic Maintenance Immuno-Wash Fluid

5. Wipe the immuno-rate proboscis (which holds the VITROS Micro Tip in place) with a lint-free cloth moistened with distilled or deionized water. 6. Dry it with another lint-free cloth. 7. Steady the arm with one hand. Insert a new micro tip by pushing it firmly into place. You will hear a click. 8. Replace the reservoir. — Lift the IR metering arm. — Lift the retainer lid that holds the reservoir. — Remove the old reservoir and discard it. — Wipe out the housing using a lint-free cloth. — Mix the reservoir thoroughly by gentle inversion. — Peel the protective seal off the top of the reservoir after it has reached room temperature. — Place the reservoir into the reservoir housing. The reservoir will have a yellow label and the housing will have a yellow dot.

Cover

Housing Immuno-Wash Fluid Reservoir

WARNING:

Do not place the Immuno-Wash Fluid reservoir into the reference fluid reservoir housing. Biased electrolyte results may occur.

9. Remove the wash fluid reservoir cover.

Version 2.0

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

2–25

Periodic Maintenance Immuno-Wash Fluid

10. Remove the seal from the bottom of the reservoir cover, and clean it with distilled or deionized water. BOTTOM OF RESERVOIR COVER

Seal

11. Wipe the cover with a lint-free cloth moistened with distilled or deionized water. 12. Dry the cover and seal thoroughly, being careful not to leave any lint or fibers. 13. Insert a clean seal on the cover, and return the cover to its normal operating position. 14. Type “Y” and press the Enter key on the keyboard to answer the prompt, “Was the fluid reservoir replaced?” 15. Touch RETURN. The immuno-rate arm assembly will return to the “home” position, and the screen will display the fluid drop count update.

LAB COMP: TESTING COMPLETE

READY

PERIODIC MAINTENANCE - Daily

SAMPLING

May 19 XX 14:13:12

ON

OFF

VX.XX**250 PM00E

Immuno-Wash Fluid: 1. Change Tip. 2. Change Reservoir. CURRENT RESERVOIR DROP COUNT VALUE: 300 NEW RESERVOIR DROP COUNT VALUE: 300

> Was the fluid reservoir replaced? RETURN

(Y/N): HELP

16. Touch RETURN. The analyzer will initialize.

2–26

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

Version 2.0

Periodic Maintenance Weekly Maintenance

Weekly Maintenance

To display the weekly maintenance procedures: 1. Touch PERIODIC MAINTENANCE on the Main Menu. 2. Touch WEEKLY MAINTENANCE.

LAB COMP: TESTING COMPLETE

READY

PERIODIC MAINTENANCE - Weekly

SAMPLING

Apr 24 XX 14:13:12

ON

OFF

VX.XX**250 PM00H

CLEAN: 1. 2. 3. 4.

Tray platform and transport arm. Tip locator assembly. Cup retainer. Control unit screen / keypad cover.

INSPECT: 1.

Sample Metering path for cleanliness.

2.

Air filter.

RETURN

HELP

3. Perform the weekly maintenance procedures displayed on the screen. Instructions follow.

Version 2.0

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

2–27

Periodic Maintenance Cleaning the Tray Platform and Transport Arm

Cleaning the Tray Platform and Transport Arm

To clean the tray platform and transport arm: 1. Lift the top left cover.

2. Moisten a lint-free cloth with distilled water. Wipe the top and sides of the tray platform and transport arm. 3. Dry them with another lint-free cloth. Tray Hook

Transport Arm

Tray Platform

4. Clean and dry the tray hook in the same manner.

2–28

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

Version 2.0

Periodic Maintenance Cleaning the Tip-Locator Assembly

Cleaning the Tip-Locator Assembly

Clean the tip-locator assembly to remove glue deposits as well as any other type of contamination left from slides. 1. Lift the top right cover of the analyzer.

2. Open the incubator cover.

Incubator Cover

Version 2.0

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

2–29

Periodic Maintenance Cleaning the Tip-Locator Assembly

3. Loosen the one thumbscrew that secures the tip-locator assembly cover to the tip-locator assembly.

Tip-Locator Assembly Cover

4. Remove the tip-locator cover, and set it aside. 5. Loosen the three thumbscrews on the tip-locator assembly.

Tip-Locator Assembly

2–30

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

Version 2.0

Periodic Maintenance Cleaning the Tip-Locator Assembly

6. Turn over the tip-locator assembly. Use the edge of a spare slide to remove any glue deposits from the slide block area on the underside of the tip-locator assembly. Discard the slide when you are finished.

Tip-Locator Assembly

7. Wipe the rest of the tip-locator assembly with a lint-free cloth moistened with distilled or deionized water. Avoid touching electrical parts. Use light pressure only. 8. Moisten a cotton swab with distilled or deionized water. Use the swab to clean the area under the tip-locator assembly (anywhere fluid has spilled). Avoid touching electrical parts. 9. Moisten a cotton swab with distilled or deionized water. Use the swab to clean the top of the tip-locator assembly. TIP LOCATOR ASSEMBLY Clean area with swab

Version 2.0

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

2–31

Periodic Maintenance Cleaning the Tip-Locator Assembly

10. Allow the assembly to air-dry. Before replacing the tip-locator assembly and cover, continue with the remaining cleaning steps. 11. Moisten a cotton swab with distilled or deionized water. Use the swab to clean the elevator. Elevator

12. Place the transverse shuttle into the tip-locator assembly. 13. Replace the tip-locator assembly, and hand tighten the three thumbscrews. 14. Replace the tip-locator cover, and hand tighten the one thumbscrew. 15. Close the incubator cover. 16. Close the top right cover of the analyzer.

2–32

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

Version 2.0

Periodic Maintenance Cleaning the Tip-Locator Assembly

17. Touch the status console at the top of the monitor to bring up the error log screen showing the INITIALIZE target.

LAB COMP: TESTING COMPLETE

READY

SAMPLING

Apr 24 XX 14:13:12

ON

OFF

RELEV ERR 8/17/93 11:00:30 Code: 3S7 MALFUNCTION 38 142 SCHEDULER * ENVIRONMENT TASK * interlock open 38 141 8/17/93 11:00:18 Code: 3S6 MALFUNCTION SCHEDULER * ENVIRONMENT TASK * main cover interlock open

VX.XX**250 ER01A

SHUTDOWN MALFUNCTION ACTION ATTENTION TRANSIENT

> TouchUP or DOWN to move highlight bar. RETURN

UP

DOWN

INITIALIZE

HELP

18. Touch INITIALIZE to reset the modules. 19. Run and evaluate quality control (QC) fluids to ensure that all the chemistries are performing correctly.

Version 2.0

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

2–33

Periodic Maintenance Cleaning the Cup Retainer

Cleaning the Cup Retainer

To clean the cup retainer: 1. Lift the top left cover.

2. Moisten a lint-free cloth with distilled or deionized water, and wipe the top and bottom of the cup retainer. Cup Retainer

3. Dry it with another lint-free cloth.

Cleaning the Touchscreen Monitor/Flat LCD Touchscreen Monitor To clean the touchscreen monitor: 1. Touch an area of the touchscreen without buttons and continue touching.

2–34

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

Version 2.0

Periodic Maintenance Cleaning the Keypad Cover

2. Wipe the touchscreen and touchscreen frame with a lint-free cloth moistened with warm, soapy water, as shown. CAUTION:

Do not use solvents, ammonia, glass cleaners, or cleaning agents containing abrasives to clean the touchscreen.

Figure 2-1. Cleaning the Touchscreen Monitor 3. Wipe the touchscreen and touchscreen frame with a lint-free cloth moistened with distilled or deionized water to remove any soap residue. 4. If necessary, clean the touchscreen and touchscreen frame with a lint-free cloth dampened with 70% isopropyl alcohol-in-water solution. 5. Discontinue touching the area of the touchscreen without buttons. 6. Allow the touchscreen and touchscreen frame to air dry thoroughly.

Cleaning the Keypad Cover

Backup QC, Config, and Calibration Data

Version 2.0

Clean the keypad cover with a lint-free cloth moistened with distilled water.

Follow the procedure found in Chapter 10, “Options,” in the Operator’s Manual.

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

2–35

Periodic Maintenance Cleaning the Sample-Metering Path

Cleaning the Sample-Metering Path

Examine the area under the path traveled by the sample metering proboscis. Look for signs of spilled or dried reagents or serum. To clean the sample metering path: 1. Lift both top covers.

2. Moisten a lint-free cloth or cotton swab with distilled or deionized water. 3. Clean the affected area.

Sample-Metering Proboscis

4. Dry the area thoroughly being careful not to leave any lint or cotton fibers behind. 5. Dispose of the cleaning materials in a biohazardous waste box.

2–36

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

Version 2.0

Periodic Maintenance Inspecting the Air Filter

Inspecting the Air Filter

The analyzer uses a washable air filter. You may want to have one or two spares so that you can rotate them after cleaning. To inspect and replace the air filter: 1. Open the right front door of the analyzer.

Air Filter

2. Locate the air filter in the lower right corner. 3. Look for signs of dust or dirt coating the exposed surface of the filter. This could compromise air flow into the analyzer and eventually lead to temperature errors. 4. If the filter is dirty, remove it and replace it with a spare filter. The air filter is held in place by a hook-and-loop type fastening system. 5. Clean the dirty filter. Remove heavy dust buildup by hand or brush, then wash the filter in water and allow it to air dry. When dry, it will be ready to reuse when the current filter becomes dirty. IMPORTANT: Do not install a wet or damp filter. It could cause temperature problems by reducing air flow. Allow filters to dry thoroughly before use.

Version 2.0

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

2–37

Periodic Maintenance As-Required Maintenance

As-Required Maintenance

To display the as-required maintenance procedures: 1. Touch PERIODIC MAINTENANCE on the Main Menu. 2. Touch AS REQUIRED MAINTENANCE.

LAB COMP: TESTING COMPLETE

READY

SAMPLING

Apr 24 XX 14:13:12

ON

PERIODIC MAINTENANCE - As Required

OFF

VX.XX**250 PM00I

REPLACE: 1. 2. 3. 4.

Salt pads in slide supply 1. Desiccant packs in slide supply 2. Reflectometer lamp. Proboscis/sample metering tubing.

CLEAN: 1. 2. 3.

Slide discard chutes. Analyzer cabinetry. Dispense blade/slide path.

RETURN

HELP

Instructions for these periodic maintenance procedures together with additional as-required maintenance procedures follow.

2–38

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

Version 2.0

Periodic Maintenance Replacing Humidity Control Packs and Desiccant Packs

Replacing Humidity Control Packs and Desiccant Packs

Replace humidity control packs when humidity errors are posted for Slide Supply 1 or when directed to do so by your Customer Support Representative for troubleshooting purposes. Replace desiccant packs when humidity errors are posted for Slide Supply 2 or when directed to do so by your Customer Support Representative for troubleshooting purposes. To replace humidity control packs and desiccant packs: 1. Open the right front door of the analyzer.

Humidity Control and Desiccant Pack Carriers

Version 2.0

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

2–39

Periodic Maintenance Replacing Humidity Control Packs and Desiccant Packs

2. Remove the carriers for the humidity control packs and desiccant packs, and discard the old pads and packs.

Pull down, then out

— Pull down on the handle of each carrier to unlatch the carriers from the bottom of the slide supplies. — Pull each carrier straight out of the analyzer. 3. Load new magnesium chloride humidity control packs for Slide Supply 1 (left side). NOTE: The humidity control packs have no expiration date. They should be slightly moist, but not completely dry. Do not use them if they are extremely wet or completely dry. 4. Load new desiccant (humidity control) packs for Slide Supply 2 (right side).

2–40

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

Version 2.0

Periodic Maintenance Replacing Humidity Control Packs and Desiccant Packs

NOTE: There is a blue indicator in each desiccant pack wrapper that ensures the desiccant packs are good; the blue indicator turns pink if the desiccant packs are expired.

Push in, then up

Slide Supply 1 – Magnesium-Chloride Salt Pads Slide Supply 2 – Desiccant packs

IMPORTANT: Do not interchange the carriers when you reinsert them. 5. Return both of the carriers to the slide supplies in the analyzer. 6. Push up on the handle of each carrier to latch it against the bottom of the slide supplies. 7. Close the front door.

Version 2.0

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

2–41

Periodic Maintenance Changing the Reflectometer Lamp

Changing the Reflectometer Lamp

Change the reflectometer lamp when the Help text for an error code directs you to do so or when directed by your Customer Support Representative. To change the reflectometer lamp, you will need a Reflectometer Lamp Extraction Tool, TL-3372. 1. Open the right front door of the analyzer. NOTE: Use the lamp replacement label located on the inside of the slide processor front door as an instruction guide. In the instructions that follow, (Illustration #) refers to the illustration number on the label.

Instructions

Cartridge-Disposal Box

2. Remove the cartridge-disposal box. (Illustration 1) 3. Open the lamp safety door. (Illustration 2) The lamp safety door includes an interlock switch that removes power from the lamp. CAUTION:

The lamp is HOT. Wait 15 minutes for the lamp to cool.

4. Press down Tab A to release the lamp socket latch C. (Illustration 3)

2–42

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

Version 2.0

Periodic Maintenance Adjusting the Reflectometer Iris

5. Grasp the lamp socket, and remove it from the lamp base B. (Illustration 4) 6. Disconnect the lamp socket connector 5A3J/P10. This allows the lamp socket assembly to be removed from the analyzer for easy access on a work surface. 7. Remove the lamp using the extraction tool TL-3372, and discard the lamp. (Illustration 5) 8. Grasp the new lamp using the plastic wrapper to prevent finger oil from contaminating the lamp surface. Insert the new lamp. (Illustration 6) IMPORTANT: Do not touch the lamp with your fingers. Finger oil will affect system performance. 9. Return the lamp socket to its original position in the lamp base B. (Illustration 7) 10. Press the latch C into the lock position. (Illustration 8) 11. Reconnect the lamp socket connector 5A3J/P10. 12. Close the lamp safety door, and check that the interlock switch has engaged. The lamp will illuminate. 13. Reinsert the cartridge disposal box. 14. Allow the lamp to burn in or stabilize for at least 30 minutes. Then perform the reflectometer iris adjustment procedure that follows.

Adjusting the Reflectometer Iris

1. Touch DIAGNOSTICS on the Main Menu.

SAMPLING

REMOTE ENABLED READY

LAB COMP : TESTING COMPLETE

14:13:12 ON

OFF

VX.XX**250 MD00A

DIAGNOSTICS SETUP/ ADJUST

PERFORMANCE TESTS

SUBSYSTEM TESTS

STANDALONE DIAGNOSTIC TESTS

HARDWARE AND CHEM INFO

LAB COMP PROTOCOL ANALYZER

COMPLEX TESTS

MEDS

May 19 XX

> Touch a target to select a function.

RETURN

Version 2.0

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

HELP

2–43

Periodic Maintenance Adjusting the Reflectometer Iris

2. Touch SETUP/ADJUST.

LAB COMP: TESTING COMPLETE

READY

SAMPLING

14:13:12 ON

DIAGNOSTICS - Setup/Adjustments SAMPLE METERING

READ SYNC

SLIDE TRANSPORT RATE/CM CORRECTION LECTURE FACTOR

Apr 24 XX

OFF

VX.XX**250 SA00A

REFLECTOMETER IRIS CURRENT SETUP VALUES

> Touch a target to select a function. RETURN

HELP

3. Touch REFLECTOMETER IRIS.

2–44

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

Version 2.0

Periodic Maintenance Adjusting the Reflectometer Iris

4. Touch START after you have waited for the lamp to stabilize.

LAB COMP: TESTING COMPLETE

READY

SAMPLING

Apr 24 XX 14:13:12

ON

DIAGNOSTICS - Setup/Adjustment - Reflectometer Iris

OFF

VX.XX**250 SA10A

WARNING: If a new lamp has been installed, the lamp must be allowed a 30 minute stabilizing period. Failure to wait the allotted time could result in inaccurate results due to unstable lamp conditions.

> Wait 30 minutes if a new lamp was installed. > Touch START to begin.

RETURN

START

RETURN MAIN DIAG MENU

HELP

5. When “Center the tool slide? (Y/N)” is displayed on the prompt line, type “N” and press the Enter key on the keyboard. IMPORTANT: Do not type “Y” at this prompt. Always type “N” to use the analyzer’s internal reference slide. 6. Touch START. The filter with the highest voltage reading will be displayed. Note and record which filter is displayed. 7. Once the voltage reading is displayed, touch START again.

Version 2.0

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

2–45

Periodic Maintenance Adjusting the Reflectometer Iris

8. Move the iris control switch to the right or left as required to set the voltage according to the table below. (Refer to illustrations 10 and 11 of the lamp replacement label located on the inside of the right front door as a guide.) You will be adjusting the voltage of the filter displayed in step 6 above. All other filter voltages will be less than the displayed filter. • Adjust the displayed filter to within the adjustment guidelines listed in Table 1. • Verify that all filters fall within the verification guidelines listed in Table 2. If any of the filters are not within the verification guidelines, you may need to repeat the adjustment procedure.

Table 1. Filter Adjustment Guidelines Displayed filter wavelength

Target voltage

Any filter

As high as possible up to 8.0 V

9. Touch DONE.

2–46

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

Version 2.0

Periodic Maintenance Adjusting the Reflectometer Iris

10. The screen displays a summary of the current voltages for all of the wavelengths. Verify that all the filter voltages fall within the range listed in table 2 below.

Table 2. Table 2. Filter Verification Guidelines Filter wavelength

Voltage

All filters

3.5 to 9 V

If any of the filters are not within the range listed in table 2, do the following: • Repeat the adjustment from step 5. • If you have just installed a new lamp, reseat the lamp (remove it, turn the prongs around, and reinsert it). Repeat the adjustment procedure starting at step 1. • Install a new lamp following the procedure “Changing the Reflectometer Lamp” in Chapter 2 of this manual. Repeat the adjustment procedure starting at step 1 after the new lamp has stabilized for at least 30 minutes.

Version 2.0

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

2–47

Periodic Maintenance Adjusting the Reflectometer Iris

11. Close the right front door and top covers of the analyzer. 12. Touch RETURN TO MAIN DIAG MENU. 13. Touch RETURN to return to the Main Menu. The analyzer will initialize. 14. Record date and initials on the “As Required” section of your Maintenance Log. 15. Run and evaluate quality control (QC) fluids to ensure all tests are performing correctly. If the QC results are not satisfactory, perform the Rate/CM Correction Factor Test, and recalibrate. Refer to the “Rate/CM Correction Factor Test” in the “Setup/Adjust” section of Chapter 3, “Diagnostics,” in this manual.

2–48

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

Version 2.0

Periodic Maintenance Replacing the Sample Metering Tubing

Replacing the Sample Metering Tubing

WARNING:

Before attempting this procedure, make sure Sampling is OFF, testing is COMPLETE, and the interlock for the cover has not been overridden. Failure to observe these important steps could result in injury.

To change the tubing: 1. Lift the top left cover.

2. Disconnect the sample-metering tubing from the proboscis, the hole in the bracket, and the metering pump.

Tubing Proboscis

Version 2.0

Bracket

Metering Pump

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

2–49

Periodic Maintenance Replacing the Sample Metering Tubing

3. Cut a piece of 0.030-inch inside diameter tubing to the same length as the old tube. If the old tubing is broken, cut a piece of the new tubing to 6.5 inches in length. You can find the tubing in your spare parts kit (Part No. 994659), or order Sample Metering tubing sets. NOTE: If the old tubing simply has a stretched or frayed end, you can cut off the damaged end and reuse the tubing rather than replace it. If you cut the end of the tubing, the length can be no shorter than 5.5 inches. With a tubing length less than 5.5 inches, the proboscis will not be able to reach the bottom of the tubes. 4. Attach the new tubing to the proboscis and the sample metering pump. Make sure the tubing passes through the hole in the bracket and push the tubing firmly onto each fitting as far as possible. 5. Close the cover. 6. Touch the status console to display the error log screen with the INITIALIZE target. 7. Touch INITIALIZE. 8. Touch RETURN to return to the Main Menu. The analyzer is ready for operation.

2–50

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

Version 2.0

Periodic Maintenance Cleaning the Discard Chutes

Cleaning the Discard Chutes

Clean the discard chutes to remove any biohazardous or other type contamination. Also clean the discard chutes if a slide jam occurs in one of the discard chutes. 1. Lift the top right cover of the analyzer.

2. Open the incubator cover.

Incubator Cover

3. Loosen the one thumbscrew that secures the tip-locator assembly cover to the tip-locator assembly.

Version 2.0

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

2–51

Periodic Maintenance Cleaning the Discard Chutes

Tip-Locator Assembly Cover

4. Remove the tip-locator cover, and set it aside. 5. Loosen the three thumbscrews on the tip-locator assembly. 6. Lift the tip-locator assembly and the transverse shuttle out of the way.

Tip-Locator Assembly

7. Loosen the two quarter-turn fasteners on the electrometer.

Electrometer

2–52

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

Version 2.0

Periodic Maintenance Cleaning the Discard Chutes

8. Lift the electrometer into the maintenance position. Swing down the kickstand for support.

Kickstand

9. Using an applicator stick, dislodge any slides that are stuck in either discard chute. Push the applicator stick straight down the discard chutes. Discard Chutes

Electrometer

10. Moisten some cotton swabs with distilled or deionized water. Use these swabs to clean the interior walls of the discard chutes, and allow the discard chutes to air dry. 11. Return the electrometer to its normal operating position, and hand tighten the two quarter-turn fasteners.

Version 2.0

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

2–53

Periodic Maintenance Cleaning the Cabinets

12. Place the transverse shuttle into the tip-locator assembly. 13. Replace the tip-locator assembly, and hand tighten the three thumbscrews. 14. Replace the tip-locator cover, and hand tighten the one thumbscrew. 15. Close the incubator cover. 16. Close the top right cover of the analyzer. 17. Touch the status console at the top of the monitor to bring up the error log screen showing the INITIALIZE target.

LAB COMP: TESTING COMPLETE

READY

SAMPLING

Apr 24 XX 14:13:12

ON

OFF

RELEV ERR 8/17/93 11:00:30 Code: 3S7 MALFUNCTION 38 142 SCHEDULER * ENVIRONMENT TASK * interlock open 38 141 8/17/93 11:00:18 Code: 3S6 MALFUNCTION SCHEDULER * ENVIRONMENT TASK * main cover interlock open

VX.XX**250 ER01A

SHUTDOWN MALFUNCTION ACTION ATTENTION TRANSIENT

> TouchUP or DOWN to move highlight bar. RETURN

UP

DOWN

INITIALIZE

HELP

18. Touch INITIALIZE to reset the modules.

Cleaning the Cabinets

2–54

Wipe the outside cabinet doors and panels of the analyzer with a soft cloth dampened with soapy water. Rinse with water to remove soap residue.

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

Version 2.0

Periodic Maintenance Cleaning the Dispense Blade/Slide Path

Cleaning the Dispense Blade/ Slide Path

To clean the dispense blade/slide path: 1. Lift the top right cover.

2. Remove the platen cover from the platen assembly. — Loosen the two quarter-turn fasteners. — Lift the platen cover out of the way.

Quarter-Turn Fastener Quarter-Turn Fastener

Platen Cover

3. Turn the knob in a counterclockwise direction (up) to bring the slide-dispense blade out (toward the center of the incubator).

Version 2.0

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

2–55

Periodic Maintenance Cleaning the Dispense Blade/Slide Path

Knob

Slide-Dispense Blade

4. Inspect the slide path, platen cover, and dispense blade for dirt— such as dust, powder, etc. 5. Clean any parts, if necessary, using a cotton-tipped swab moistened with distilled or deionized water. 6. Turn the knob in a clockwise direction (down) to retract the slidedispense blade. 7. Use a cotton-tipped swab moistened with distilled or deionized water to clean the slide path under the dispense blade if necessary. 8. Allow the parts to air dry thoroughly before reassembly. 9. Replace the platen cover. — Line up the two platen cover quarter-turn fasteners with the holes in the brass platen stop plate. — Lock the quarter-turn fasteners in place by turning them clockwise. 10. Perform any remaining weekly maintenance procedures.

2–56

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

Version 2.0

Periodic Maintenance Cleaning the Incubator Evaporation Caps and Slots

Cleaning the Incubator Evaporation Caps and Slots

You will have to clean the incubator caps and slots periodically or when directed to do so by your Customer Support Representative. The time between cleanings will vary based on the amount of PM chemistries run per day on the analyzer. High-volume laboratories may need to perform this procedure every four weeks, whereas lowervolume laboratories may need to do it less frequently. IMPORTANT: Position 24 contains the white reference slide. Do not remove this cap for cleaning. (If hardware Mod No. 9 is installed, there will be no cap in position 24.) To clean the incubator evaporation caps: 1. Lift the top right cover.

2. Open the incubator cover.

Incubator Cover

Version 2.0

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

2–57

Periodic Maintenance Cleaning the Incubator Evaporation Caps and Slots

3. Turn the incubator disk by hand until one of the incubator nest positions is lined up with the labeled slot marked by two raised bars or rails.

Incubator Disk

Align

4. Push down on the partially-exposed spring that is exposed just below the top lip of the incubator disk. The spring will unlock and pop forward. IMPORTANT: Note the alignment of the spring and pad to each other before removing them.

Spring

2–58

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

Version 2.0

Periodic Maintenance Cleaning the Incubator Evaporation Caps and Slots

5. Remove the spring and the white plastic cap under it. Spring

Cap

6. Repeat steps 3 through 5 to remove the remaining caps. 7. Use distilled or deionized water to clean the caps you just removed. NOTE: You must wear gloves when you clean the caps. — Soak the caps in water and gently rub them with your fingers. — Pick up a cap with the oval and round indentations facing down, the two small ramps facing up. Gently use (do not scrub) a clean moistened cotton swab to remove dust from the crevices. Hold the swab at an angle to the surface being cleaned, and gently rotate the cotton swab between the thumb and forefinger.

Swab

Cap Bottom

— Pat dry with a lint-free cloth. 8. Clean each slot of the incubator disk with a wooden applicator to remove any white residue.

Version 2.0

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

2–59

Periodic Maintenance Cleaning the Incubator Evaporation Caps and Slots

9. Place the cap on the labeled slot at the front of the incubator.

Spring

10. Put a spring on top of the cap with the notched area of the spring against the taller post and the shorter half of the spring resting over the shorter post. The longer portion of the spring with the small hole should now be on top.

Cap

11. Gently push the cap and spring into the incubator rotor until the upper portion of the spring snaps into place. Verify that the cap and spring are inserted correctly. The spring should lock in place and the cap will have a slight spring-action when pulled forward.

2–60

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

Version 2.0

Periodic Maintenance Cleaning the Incubator Evaporation Caps and Slots

12. Turn the incubator disk by hand until one of the slide positions is lined up with the two raised bars. Replace the other caps and springs in this manner. 13. Close the incubator cover. 14. Close the top right cover of the analyzer. 15. Touch the status console to gain access to the error log screen showing the INITIALIZE target.

LAB COMP: TESTING COMPLETE

READY

SAMPLING

Apr 24 XX 14:13:12

ON

OFF

RELEV ERR

VX.XX**250 ER01A

8/17/93 11:00:30 Code: 3S7 MALFUNCTION 38 142 SCHEDULER * ENVIRONMENT TASK * interlock open 38 141 8/17/93 11:00:18 Code: 3S6 MALFUNCTION SCHEDULER * ENVIRONMENT TASK * main cover interlock open

SHUTDOWN MALFUNCTION ACTION ATTENTION TRANSIENT

> TouchUP or DOWN to move highlight bar. RETURN

UP

DOWN

INITIALIZE

HELP

16. Touch INITIALIZE to reset the modules.

Version 2.0

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

2–61

Periodic Maintenance Replacing the Incubator Evaporation Caps

Replacing the Incubator Evaporation Caps

If you notice scratches or excessive dirt (that you cannot remove), you should replace all of the caps. IMPORTANT: Be sure to replace the entire set. They are matched for reflectance. Do not replace single caps or mixed sets. Position 24 contains the white reference slide. Be sure to return the reference slide to position 24 after you replace the caps. (If hardware Mod No. 9 is installed, there will be no cap in position 24.) To replace the incubator evaporation caps: 1. Lift the top right cover.

2. Open the incubator cover.

Incubator Cover

2–62

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

Version 2.0

Periodic Maintenance Replacing the Incubator Evaporation Caps

3. Turn the incubator disk by hand until one of the incubator nest positions is lined up with the labeled slot marked by two raised bars or rails.

Incubator Disk

Align

4. Push down on the partially-exposed spring that is exposed just below the top lip of the incubator disk. The spring will unlock and pop forward.

Spring

Version 2.0

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

2–63

Periodic Maintenance Replacing the Incubator Evaporation Caps

5. Remove the spring and the white plastic cap under it. IMPORTANT: Note the alignment of the spring and cap to each other before removing them. Spring

Cap

6. Repeat steps 3 to 5 until all caps and springs are removed. 7. Use an entire new set of caps, Part No. 999131. 8. Pick up a cap with the oval and round indentations facing down and the two small posts facing up. 9. Place the cap on the labeled slot at the front of the incubator.

Cap

2–64

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

Version 2.0

Periodic Maintenance Replacing the Incubator Evaporation Caps

10. Put a spring on top of the cap with the notched area of the spring against the taller post and the shorter half of the spring resting over the shorter post. The longer portion of the spring with the small hole should now be on top.

Spring Cap

11. Gently push the cap and spring into the incubator rotor until the upper portion of the spring snaps into place. Verify that the cap and spring are inserted correctly. The spring should lock in place, and the cap will have a slight spring-action when pulled forward. 12. Turn the incubator disk by hand until one of the slide positions is lined up with the two raised bars. Replace the other caps and springs in this manner. 13. Close the incubator cover. 14. Close the top right cover of the analyzer. 15. Touch the status console to gain access to the error log screen showing the INITIALIZE target.

Version 2.0

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

2–65

Periodic Maintenance Replacing the Incubator Evaporation Caps

SAMPLING

LAB COMP: TESTING COMPLETE

READY

Apr 24 XX 14:13:12

ON

OFF

RELEV ERR 8/17/93 11:00:30 Code: 3S7 MALFUNCTION 38 142 SCHEDULER * ENVIRONMENT TASK * interlock open 38 141 8/17/93 11:00:18 Code: 3S6 MALFUNCTION SCHEDULER * ENVIRONMENT TASK * main cover interlock open

VX.XX**250 ER01A

SHUTDOWN MALFUNCTION ACTION ATTENTION TRANSIENT

> TouchUP or DOWN to move highlight bar. RETURN

UP

DOWN

INITIALIZE

HELP

16. Touch INITIALIZE to reset the modules.

2–66

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

Version 2.0

Periodic Maintenance Cleaning the Proboscis

Cleaning the Proboscis

Cleaning Materials Needed: • One 10-cc syringe • Hot distilled or deionized water • A beaker or other container to catch fluid • Compressed air • A gauze pad • 70% Isopropyl Alcohol (or deionized water) To clean the proboscis: 1. Lift the top left cover.

2. Touch DIAGNOSTICS on the Main Menu.

Version 2.0

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

2–67

Periodic Maintenance Cleaning the Proboscis

SAMPLING

REMOTE ENABLED

LAB COMP : TESTING COMPLETE

READY

14:13:12 ON

OFF

VX.XX**250 MD00A

DIAGNOSTICS SETUP/ ADJUST

PERFORMANCE TESTS

SUBSYSTEM TESTS

STANDALONE DIAGNOSTIC TESTS

HARDWARE AND CHEM INFO

LAB COMP PROTOCOL ANALYZER

COMPLEX TESTS

MEDS

May 19 XX

> Touch a target to select a function.

RETURN

HELP

3. Touch MEDS.

SAMPLING REMOTE ENABLED

LAB COMP : TESTING COMPLETE

READY

MEDS – Main Menu SAMPLE HANDLER

SAMPLE METERING

SLIDE SUPPLY 1

RM/IR METERING

SLIDE SUPPLY 2

INCUBATOR

Apr 24 XX 14:13:12

ON

OFF

VX.XX**250 ME00A

REFLECTOMETER

> Touch a target to select a function. RETURN

HELP

4. Touch SAMPLE METERING.

2–68

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

Version 2.0

Periodic Maintenance Cleaning the Proboscis

SAMPLING

REMOTE ENABLED READY

LAB COMP : TESTING COMPLETE

Feb 22 XX 14:13:12

ON

OFF

VX.XX**250 ME04A

MEDS – Main Menu – Sample Metering

TRUCK / PROBOSCIS PUMP / SAMPLE FLUID DROP

> Touch a target to select a function. RETURN TO MAIN DIAG MENU

RETURN

HELP

5. Touch TRUCK/PROBOSCIS.

SAMPLING REMOTE ENABLED

READY

LAB COMP : TESTING COMPLETE

Apr 24 XX 14:13:12

ON

OFF

VX.XX**250 ME04B MEDS – Main Menu – Sample Metering – Truck/Proboscis | - - - - - - - - - - -- - - Truck - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - | | - - - - - - - - - - - Proboscis - - - - - - -- - - - - - -| SAMPLE

MIX CUP RIGHT

CM / RT METERING

HOME

METERING PAUSE

TIP SEAL

SAHA REFERENCE POSITION

DILUENT TRAY / TIP EJECT

CYCLE TRUCK

DILUENT

METERING

CYCLE PROBOSCIS

TIP PICK-UP

TIP SEAL

RESET TRUCK

SAMPLE CUP BOTTOM

TIP PICK-UP

RESET PROBOSCIS

MIX CUP LEFT

PM METERING

MIXING CUP BOTTOM

TIP EJECT

> Touch a target to select a function. RETURN

RETURN TO MAIN DIAG MENU

RESET SAMPLE METERING

HELP

6. Touch RESET SAMPLE METERING to reset the sample metering truck, proboscis, and pump to their home positions.

Version 2.0

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

2–69

Periodic Maintenance Cleaning the Proboscis

7. Touch SAMPLE to move the sample metering truck to the left side of the analyzer.

Sampling Area

8. Disconnect the tubing at the sample metering pump.

Metering Pump Proboscis

Tubing

9. Inspect the sample metering tubing for moisture or serum and for cuts, cracks, or discoloration. Replace the tubing if it is defective.

2–70

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

Version 2.0

Periodic Maintenance Cleaning the Proboscis

10. Put the beaker under the proboscis tip to collect the hot distilled or deionized water used in the next steps.

11. Fill the syringe with hot distilled or deionized water and attach it to the free end of the tubing. 12. Flush the proboscis with the distilled or deionized water. You may need to flush it several times until the water collected in the beaker is free of particles. 13. Attach a dry syringe to the sample metering tubing. Do not use canned air with chemical propellants or building air that contains oil. 14. Place a gauze pad treated with 70% isopropyl alcohol under the proboscis to trap any generated aerosols. If alcohol is not available, moisten the gauze with deionized water. 15. Discharge enough air to thoroughly dry the inside of the proboscis. NOTE: It is very important that the proboscis is dried completely. Performance may be affected if any moisture remains in the proboscis.

Version 2.0

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

2–71

Periodic Maintenance Cleaning the PSID Scanner Window

16. Replace the used sample metering tubing with a 6.5 inch length of new tubing. Do not reuse the old tubing. To replace the sample metering tubing, follow steps 2 through 4 of the procedure “Replacing the Sample Metering Tubing” in Chapter 2 of this manual. 17. Close the top cover. 18. Touch RETURN TO MAIN DIAG MENU. 19. Touch RETURN to return to the Main Menu. Exiting Diagnostics will initialize the analyzer and reset the modules.

Cleaning the PSID Scanner Window

NOTE: The Positive Sample Identification (PSID) Scanner is an optional accessory. You may need to clean the PSID window if a spill occurs during sample handling or when directed to do so by your Customer Support Representative. To clean the window: 1. Lift the top left cover of the analyzer.

WARNING for MODEL DS40 SCANNER USERS Avoid directly and continually exposing your eyes to the laser beam of the Model DS40 scanner, or a reflection of the laser beam.

2–72

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

Version 2.0

Periodic Maintenance Cleaning the PSID Scanner Window

2. Wipe the window with a lint-free cloth moistened with distilled or deionized water. It is acceptable to use 70 percent isopropyl alcohol to clean the lens, if followed by deionized water. The lint-free cloth should be damp, not dripping. Allow the window to air dry. Model DS40 scanner Window on PSID Scanner

Model 3700 Scanner Window on PSID Scanner

CAUTION:

Do not use solvents, ammonia, glass cleaners, or cleaning agents containing abrasives to clean the PSID window. These items will damage the window and affect PSID performance.

3. Close the left cover of the analyzer.

Version 2.0

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

2–73

Periodic Maintenance Decontaminating the Analyzer

Decontaminating the Analyzer

Assume that all used equipment is contaminated with potentially infectious biological material. Use the “Universal Precautions” recommended by OSHA (Occupational Safety and Health Administration) Bloodborne Pathogen Standard 29CFR1910.1030 when handling or cleaning equipment. In particular: • Wear gloves, closed shoes, buttoned lab coats, and safety glasses throughout the cleaning and maintenance process. • Treat all waste materials used in the cleaning process as contaminated. Follow the site procedures for your laboratory to dispose of these materials. • Handle all equipment with care. Mechanical parts may have edges, pinch points, and corners that could potentially cause injury.

Cleaning the Analyzer

1. Empty the disposal boxes and any slides, cups, tips, or fluids. 2. Clean all obvious materials from the outside surfaces of the analyzer with a cloth that is moistened with soapy water. Avoid excessive use of water. Rinse with water to remove soap residue. 3. Clean the control unit, monitor screen, and the keypad cover with distilled water. 4. Clean potentially contaminated areas of the analyzer with a 70 percent isopropyl alcohol in water solution. NOTES: Be sure to use 70 percent alcohol and not more concentrated solutions. It is critical that enough water be present to hydrolyze and thus break down (denature) proteins. Ten percent bleach is not recommended for general cleaning as it can be corrosive to metal parts.

2–74

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

Version 2.0

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System

Daily Maintenance Log Month/Year

Analyzer J Number

Analyzer Serial Number

Daily* - Check (✔) Boxes *Maintenance every 24 hours unless otherwise specified.

Day 1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31

Verify slide inventory/load cartridges Empty mixing cup array / tip disposal box Empty slide disposal box Empty cartridge disposal box Inspect sample trays; tube, cup, and height adaptors Load mixing cup arrays Load sample tips Change Reference Fluid micro tip and clean Reference Fluid proboscis (every 8 hours) Install new Reference Fluid disposable reservoir (white label) Clean Reference Fluid cover/seal Change Immuno-Wash Fluid micro tip and clean Immuno-Wash Fluid proboscis (every 8 hours) Change Immuno-Wash Fluid disposable reservoir (yellow label) (every 72 hours) Clean Immuno-Wash Fluid cover/seal Inspect diluent tray and bottles Check diluent levels and replace if required Clean diluent caps Load diluent tray on analyzer Verify correct date/time on screen Verify that daily QC has been run Operator’s Initials

Reviewed by __________________________________________

Date _____________________

Part Number 994142UC-EN 2005-01-03 (Supersedes 10/01)

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System

Weekly and As-Required Maintenance Log Month/Year Weekly—Date/Initial Boxes

Analyzer J Number Week 1

Week 2

Analyzer Serial Number Week 3

Week 4

Week 5

As Required

Date

Clean tray platform and transport arm

Replace salt pads in slide supply 1

Clean cup retainer

Replace desiccant packs in slide supply 2

Clean diluent bottles

Replace tubing on sample metering proboscis

Clean tip locator assembly

Replace or clean incubator evaporation caps

Clean control unit screen

Replace reference fluid seal

Clean keypad cover

Replace Immuno-Wash Fluid seal

Inspect, clean, and/or replace air filter

Replace diluent caps

Back up QC/Config/Calibration Data

Clean slide discard chutes

Initial

Clean analyzer cabinetry Clean incubator evaporation caps and slots Clean sample metering proboscis Clean dispense blade/slide path Replace reflectometer lamp Adjust reflectometer iris Perform Rate/CM Correction Factors test Archive patient results

Operator’s Initials

Reviewed by __________________________________________

Date _____________________

Ortho-Clinical Diagnostics, Inc. 100 Indigo Creek Drive Rochester, New York 14626-5101 VITROS is a trademark of Ortho-Clinical Diagnostics, Inc.

 Ortho-Clinical Diagnostics, Inc.,.

Printed in U.S.A. Part Number 994142UC-EN 2005-01-03 (Supersedes 10/01)

3 Diagnostics Using the Diagnostics Function

Using the diagnostics screen, you can access several of the diagnostics features provided with the VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System. These features may be helpful should you encounter any difficulties in daily operation of the equipment. To access the diagnostics screen, touch DIAGNOSTICS on the Main Menu.

May 19 XX

SAMPLING

REMOTE ENABLED READY

LAB COMP : TESTING COMPLETE

14:13:12 ON

OFF

VX.XX**250 MD00A

DIAGNOSTICS SETUP/ ADJUST

PERFORMANCE TESTS

SUBSYSTEM TESTS

STANDALONE DIAGNOSTIC TESTS

HARDWARE AND CHEM INFO

LAB COMP PROTOCOL ANALYZER

COMPLEX TESTS

MEDS

> Touch a target to select a function.

RETURN

HELP

The features available on this screen are: • MEDS. Lets you exercise the mechanical parts of the analyzer. You can also use MEDS for multiple moves within or across subsystems. • SUBSYSTEM TESTS. Lets your Field Engineer run electromechanical diagnostics. • LAB COMP PROTOCOL ANALYZER. Displays all characters transmitted to and from the laboratory computer. This feature is useful in troubleshooting the laboratory computer interface.

Version 2.0

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

3–1

Diagnostics Using the Diagnostics Function

• SETUP/ADJUST. Lets you perform the Rate/CM correction factor test (white/black correction factors), adjust the reflectometer iris, and display current setup values. This feature also lets your Field Engineer set up and adjust sample metering, read sync, and slide transport. • STANDALONE DIAGNOSTICS TESTS. Lets you perform the loopback test that verifies the operation of any of the three output device ports for either printer or for the lab computer interface. All other stand-alone diagnostics are for Field Engineer use only. They allow the Field Engineer to determine the status of various subsystems outside the control software. • COMPLEX TESTS. Lets the Field Engineer perform electromechanical simulations. • PERFORMANCE TESTS. Lets you perform tests and generate statistics on selected analyzer components. • HARDWARE AND CHEM INFO. Provides error history, datalogger analysis, and software identification.

3–2

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

Version 2.0

Diagnostics Mechanism Exercise Diagnostics (MEDS)

Mechanism Exercise Diagnostics (MEDS)

Using Mechanism Exercise Diagnostics (MEDS), you can perform basic movements of the analyzer one at a time. This can help you diagnose any problems that may exist in the analyzer. To access the MEDS screen: 1. Touch DIAGNOSTICS on the Main Menu. 2. Touch MEDS on the main Diagnostics screen.

SAMPLING REMOTE ENABLED

READY

LAB COMP : TESTING COMPLETE

MEDS – Main Menu SAMPLE HANDLER

SAMPLE METERING

SLIDE SUPPLY 1

RM/IR METERING

SLIDE SUPPLY 2

INCUBATOR

Apr 24 XX 14:13:12

ON

OFF

VX.XX**250 ME00A

REFLECTOMETER

> Touch a target to select a function. RETURN

HELP

3. Touch the target for the mechanism you want to exercise. Additional targets will appear for each selection. 4. Touch RETURN to exit MEDS. The following pages show the MEDS submenus and suggested movement sequences. IMPORTANT: Each screen that appears has a RESET target at the bottom. Touch the RESET target before returning to the MEDS Main Menu after you have finished exercising a mechanism. For example, after exercising sample metering, touch the RESET SAMPLE METERING target before you return to the MEDS Main Menu.

Version 2.0

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

3–3

Diagnostics MEDS Sample Handler

MEDS Sample Handler Feb 22 XX

SAMPLING LAB COMP : TESTING COMPLETE

READY

14:13:12 ON

OFF

VX.XX**250 ME01A

MEDS – Main Menu – Sample Handler | - - - - - - Tray Transport - - - - - |

Tip Supply

Mixing Cup

| - - - - - Diluent Supply- - - - - -|

CYCLE TRAY POSITIONS

TRAY TO SAMPLE SUPPLY

MOVE TRAY TO PICKUP

CYCLE CUP ARRAY

MOVE TRAY TO POSITION

CYCLE DILUENT TRAY

CYCLE TRAY HOOK

RESET

MOVE TRAY BACK

MOVE TO METERING

CYCLE CONTAINER CAP

RESET

CYCLE SOLENOID

CYCLE TRAY

MOVE BACKWARD 1 POSITION

MOVE TRAY TO HOME

MOVE TRAY N TO METERING

RESET TRAY

RESET ARRAY

UNLOAD DILUENT TRAY

> Touch a target to select a function. RETURN

RETURN TO MAIN DIAG MENU

RESET SAMPLE HANDLING

HELP

The targets in the columns “Mixing Cup” and “Diluent Supply” will not appear if dilution is disabled. To enable or disable dilution, touch these targets in the following order: 1. OPTIONS 2. SYSTEM SERVICES 3. SUBSYSTEM CONTROL 4. SLIDE PROCESSING 5. ON or OFF to enable or disable dilution. To exercise the sample handler: • Touch RESET SAMPLE HANDLING before and after exercising any of the sample handler mechanisms. • To exercise any of the mechanisms, follow the sequences listed below. Touch the RESET target under each mechanism if the mechanism is lost. • Touch RETURN to return to the main MEDS screen, or touch RETURN TO MAIN DIAG MENU to return to the main Diagnostics screen.

3–4

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

Version 2.0

Diagnostics MEDS Sample Handler Movement Sequences

MEDS Sample Handler Movement Sequences

Tray Transport Make sure a tray is present, then touch the targets in the following order. 1. RESET SAMPLE HANDLING 2. CYCLE TRAY POSITION 3. CYCLE TRAY HOOK 4. CYCLE SOLENOID 5. MOVE TRAY N TO METERING 6. TRAY TO SAMPLE SUPPLY 7. RESET 8. RESET SAMPLE HANDLING Tip Supply Make sure the tip tray is present, then touch the targets in the following order. 1. RESET SAMPLE HANDLING 2. MOVE TRAY TO PICKUP 3. MOVE TRAY BACK 4. CYCLE TRAY 5. RESET TRAY 6. RESET SAMPLE HANDLING Mixing Cup Array Make sure a mixing cup array is present, then touch the targets in the following order. 1. RESET SAMPLE HANDLING 2. CYCLE CUP ARRAY 3. MOVE TO METERING 4. MOVE BACKWARD 1 POSITION 5. RESET ARRAY 6. RESET SAMPLE HANDLING

Version 2.0

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

3–5

Diagnostics MEDS Sample Handler Movement Sequences

Diluent Supply Make sure a diluent tray is present, then touch the targets in the following order. 1. RESET SAMPLE HANDLING 2. MOVE TRAY TO POSITION 3. CYCLE CONTAINER CUP 4. MOVE TRAY TO HOME 5. UNLOAD DILUENT TRAY 6. RESET 7. CYCLE DILUENT TRAY 8. RESET 9. RESET SAMPLE HANDLING

3–6

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

Version 2.0

Diagnostics MEDS Slide Supplies 1 and 2

MEDS Slide Supplies 1 and 2 LAB COMP: TESTING COMPLETE

READY

SAMPLING

14:13:12 ON

OFF

MEDS – Main Menu – Slide Supply 1 LOAD DOOR OPEN | CLOSE

RELEASE CARTRIDGE

UNLOAD DOOR OPEN | CLOSE

NEST N TO LOAD

CYCLE LOAD DOOR

NEST N TO DISPENSE

CYCLE UNLOAD DOOR

Feb 22 XX VX.XX**250 ME02A

CYCLE PLUNGER

DISPENSE BLADE INNER RING

DISPENSE BLADE CM INC DEPTH

CYCLE CW

CHECK SLIDE COUNT

HOME DISPENSE . BLADE

DISPENSE BLADE PM INC DEPTH

CYCLE CCW

DISPENSE SLIDE

DISPENSE BLADE PARK

CYCLE DISPENSE BLADE

PLUNGER

DISPENSE BLADE OUTER RING

DISPENSE BLADE METERING

NEST N TO VIEWPORT

UP | DOWN

> Touch a target to select a function. RETURN TO MAIN DIAG MENU

RETURN

RESET SLIDE SUPPLY

LAB COMP: TESTING COMPLETE

READY

SAMPLING

RELEASE CARTRIDGE

UNLOAD DOOR OPEN | CLOSE

NEST N TO LOAD

CYCLE LOAD DOOR

NEST N TO DISPENSE

CYCLE UNLOAD DOOR

Feb 22 XX 14:13:12

ON

OFF

MEDS – Main Menu – Slide Supply 2 LOAD DOOR OPEN | CLOSE

HELP

VX.XX**250 ME02A

CYCLE PLUNGER

DISPENSE BLADE INNER RING

DISPENSE BLADE CM INC DEPTH

CYCLE CW

CHECK SLIDE COUNT

HOME DISPENSE . BLADE

DISPENSE BLADE PM INC DEPTH

CYCLE CCW

DISPENSE SLIDE

DISPENSE BLADE PARK

CYCLE DISPENSE BLADE

PLUNGER

DISPENSE BLADE OUTER RING

DISPENSE BLADE METERING

NEST N TO VIEWPORT

UP | DOWN

> Touch a target to select a function. RETURN

RETURN TO MAIN DIAG MENU

RESET SLIDE SUPPLY

HELP

• Touch RESET SLIDE SUPPLY before and after exercising any of the slide supply mechanisms. • To exercise the slide supply mechanisms, follow the sequence listed below. The same sequence can be used for both slide supplies. • Touch RETURN to return to the main MEDS screen, or touch RETURN TO MAIN DIAG MENU to return to the main Diagnostics screen.

Version 2.0

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

3–7

Diagnostics MEDS Slide Supplies 1 and 2 Movement Sequences

MEDS Slide Supplies 1 and 2 Movement Sequences

Make sure that a cartridge is loaded in the nest position that you want to test, then touch the targets in the following order. 1. RESET SLIDE SUPPLY 2. NEST N TO VIEWPORT 3. NEST N TO DISPENSE 4. DISPENSE BLADE TO OUTER RING 5. PLUNGER UP 6. DISPENSE SLIDE 7. DISPENSE BLADE METERING 8. HOME DISPENSE BLADE 9. RESET SLIDE SUPPLY

3–8

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

Version 2.0

Diagnostics MEDS Sample Metering

MEDS Sample Metering SAMPLING

REMOTE ENABLED READY

LAB COMP : TESTING COMPLETE

MEDS – Main Menu – Sample Metering

Feb 22 XX 14:13:12

ON

OFF

VX.XX**250 ME04A

TRUCK / PROBOSCIS PUMP / SAMPLE FLUID DROP

> Touch a target to select a function. RETURN

RETURN TO MAIN DIAG MENU

HELP

• Touch TRUCK/PROBOSCIS to display the Truck/Proboscis screen. • Touch PUMP/SAMPLE FLUID DROP to display the Pump/Sample Fluid Drop screen. • Touch RETURN to return to the Main MEDS screen, or touch RETURN TO MAIN DIAG MENU to return to the main Diagnostics screen.

Version 2.0

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

3–9

Diagnostics MEDS Sample Metering Movement Sequences—Truck/Proboscis

MEDS Sample Metering Movement Sequences—Truck/Proboscis SAMPLING REMOTE ENABLED

READY

LAB COMP : TESTING COMPLETE

Apr 24 XX 14:13:12

ON

OFF

VX.XX**250 ME04B MEDS – Main Menu – Sample Metering – Truck/Proboscis | - - - - - - - - - - -- - - Truck - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - | | - - - - - - - - - - - Proboscis - - - - - - -- - - - - - -| SAMPLE

MIX CUP RIGHT

CM / RT METERING

HOME

METERING PAUSE

TIP SEAL

SAHA REFERENCE POSITION

DILUENT TRAY / TIP EJECT

CYCLE TRUCK

DILUENT

METERING

CYCLE PROBOSCIS

TIP PICK-UP

TIP SEAL

RESET TRUCK

SAMPLE CUP BOTTOM

TIP PICK-UP

RESET PROBOSCIS

MIX CUP LEFT

PM METERING

MIXING CUP BOTTOM

TIP EJECT

> Touch a target to select a function. RETURN

RETURN TO MAIN DIAG MENU

RESET SAMPLE METERING

HELP

• Touch RESET SAMPLE METERING before and after exercising any of the sample metering mechanisms. • To exercise the sample metering mechanisms, follow the sequences listed below. The truck, proboscis, and pump must be moved in a specific sequence, or you will receive an error message and the movement will not occur. Touch the RESET target under each mechanism if the mechanism is lost. • Touch RETURN to return to the main Sample Metering screen, or touch RETURN TO MAIN DIAG MENU to return to the main Diagnostics screen.

3–10

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

Version 2.0

Diagnostics MEDS Sample Metering Movement Sequences—Truck/

Truck Movement Sequence • If you are at the MEDS Sample Metering screen, touch TRUCK/ PROBOSCIS to get to the Truck/Proboscis screen. Touch the targets in the following order. 1. RESET SAMPLE METERING 2. SAHA REFERENCE 3. DILUENT TRAY/TIP EJECT 4. TIP PICKUP 5. SAMPLE 6. MIX CUP LEFT 7. MIX CUP RIGHT 8. PM METERING 9. CM/RT METERING 10. TIP SEAL 11. RESET TRUCK 12. CYCLE TRUCK 13. RESET SAMPLE METERING Proboscis Movement Sequence • If you are at the MEDS Sample Metering screen, touch TRUCK/ PROBOSCIS to get to the Truck/Proboscis screen. Pull the tip tray out of the sample metering path, then touch the targets in the following order. 1. RESET SAMPLE METERING 2. HOME 3. DILUENT TRAY/TIP EJECT 4. DILUENT 5. RESET SAMPLE METERING 6. SAMPLE 7. SAMPLE CUP BOTTOM 8. RESET SAMPLE METERING 9. PM METERING 10. METERING PAUSE 11. METERING 12. RESET SAMPLE METERING

Version 2.0

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

3–11

Diagnostics MEDS Sample Metering Movement Sequences—Pump/Sample Fluid Drop

MEDS Sample Metering Movement Sequences—Pump/Sample Fluid Drop SAMPLING LAB COMP : TESTING COMPLETE

READY

Feb 22 XX 14:13:12

ON

OFF

VX.XX**250 ME04C MEDS – Main Menu – Sample Metering – Pump / Sample Fluid Drop | - - - Sample Fluid Drop - - -| | - - - - - - - - - - - - - Pump - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - | WETNESS SENSING ON | OFF

PICKUP TIP

METER

PRESSURE SENSING ON | OFF

ASPIRATE DROP

CYCLE PUMP HALF STEP

WETNESS EMITTER ON | OFF

METER SAMPLE DROP

ASPIRATE

RESET PUMP

CYCLE PUMP FULL STEP

CYCLE SAMPLE METERING

EJECT TIP

> Touch a target to select a function. RETURN

RETURN TO MAIN DIAG MENU

RESET SAMPLE METERING

HELP

• Touch RESET SAMPLE METERING before and after exercising any of the sample metering mechanisms. • To exercise the sample metering mechanisms, follow the sequences listed below. The truck, proboscis, and pump must be moved in a specific sequence, or you will receive an error message and the movement will not occur. Touch the RESET target under each mechanism if the mechanism is lost. • Touch RETURN to return to the main Sample Metering screen, or touch RETURN TO MAIN DIAG MENU to return to the main Diagnostics screen.

3–12

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

Version 2.0

Diagnostics MEDS Sample Metering Movement Sequences—Pump/

Pump Movement Sequence • If you are at the MEDS Sample Metering screen, touch PUMP/ SAMPLE FLUID DROP to get to the Pump/Sample Fluid Drop screen. Touch the targets in the following order. 1. RESET SAMPLE METERING 2. ASPIRATE 3. METER 4. CYCLE PUMP HALF STEP 5. CYCLE PUMP FULL STEP 6. RESET SAMPLE METERING Sample Fluid Drop Sequence • If you are at the MEDS Sample Metering screen, touch PUMP/ SAMPLE FLUID DROP to get to the Pump/Sample Fluid Drop screen. IMPORTANT: 1. Make sure the tip tray is in the metering path with tips in the tray. 2. Make sure a sample container is in place with fluid in it (use the target MOVE TRAY N TO METERING on the Sample Handler screen). 3. Make sure that a slide is in place before you meter (use steps 1-8 of the exercise procedure under Slide Supplies 1 & 2 to move a slide to the metering position). Touch the targets in the following order. 1. RESET SAMPLE METERING 2. PICKUP TIP 3. ASPIRATE DROP 4. METER SAMPLE DROP 5. EJECT TIP 6. CYCLE SAMPLE METERING 7. RESET SAMPLE METERING

Version 2.0

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

3–13

Diagnostics MEDS Reference and Immuno-Rate (IR) Metering

MEDS Reference and Immuno-Rate (IR) Metering SAMPLING LAB COMP : TESTING COMPLETE

READY

FEB 22 XX 14:13:12

ON

OFF

VX.XX**250

ME05A MEDS – Main Menu – RM / IR Metering |- - - - - - - - - Reference Metering - - - - - - - - - - - | |- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - IR - - - - - - - - - - - - - | MAINTENANCE

CYCLE ARM

CYCLE RM

MAINTENANCE

CYCLE ARM

CYCLE IR

PREDISPENSE

CYCLE PUMP

RESET PUMP

PREDISPENSE

CYCLE PUMP

RESET PUMP

DISPENSE

ASPIRATE FLUID

DISPENSE

ASPIRATE FLUID

RESERVOIR

METER FLUID

RESERVOIR

METER FLUID

RESET REFERENCE METERING

RESET IR

> Touch a target to select a function. RETURN TO RETURN MAIN DIAG MENU

HELP

The targets under the heading “Reference Metering” will not appear if reference metering is disabled. The targets under the heading “IR” will not appear if immunorate metering is disabled. To enable or disable reference or immuno-rate metering, touch these targets in the following order: 1. OPTIONS 2. SYSTEM SERVICES 3. SUBSYSTEM CONTROL 4. SLIDE PROCESSING 5. ON or OFF to enable or disable reference or immuno-rate metering. To exercise reference or immuno-rate metering: • Touch RESET REFERENCE METERING before selecting any other Reference Metering target. • Touch RESET IR before selecting any other IR target. • Touch RESET PUMP if the pump is lost. • Always touch ASPIRATE FLUID before touching METER FLUID for both reference metering and IR metering. • Touch any other target to exercise the selected mechanism. • Touch RETURN to return to the main MEDS screen, or touch RETURN TO MAIN DIAG MENU to return to the main Diagnostics screen.

3–14

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

Version 2.0

Diagnostics MEDS Incubator, Transverse Shuttle, and Electrometer

MEDS Incubator, Transverse Shuttle, and Electrometer SAMPLING LAB COMP : TESTING COMPLETE

READY

| - Incubator -

Feb 22 XX 14:13:12

ON

OFF

VX.XX**250

ME06A MEDS – Main Menu – Incubator / Transverse Shuttle / Electromet - CM / RT Eject - - PM Eject - - - Transverse Shuttle - - - Electrometer

HOME

EXTEND

EXTEND

IR METERING

CYCLE

RETRACT

RETRACT

DUMP

PURGE

CYCLE

CYCLE

SAMPLE METERING

RESET

RESET

CYCLE

RESET

CYCLE

RESET

> Touch a target to select a function. RETURN

RETURN TO MAIN DIAG MENU

RESET INCUBATOR

HELP

The targets under the heading “Electrometer” will not appear if reference metering is disabled. To enable or disable reference metering, touch these targets in the following order: 1. OPTIONS 2. SYSTEM SERVICES 3. SUBSYSTEM CONTROL 4. SLIDE PROCESSING 5. ON or OFF to enable or disable reference metering. To exercise the incubator, transverse shuttle, and electrometer: • Touch RESET INCUBATOR before selecting an Incubator MEDS operation. • Touch a target to exercise a mechanism. • Touch the RESET target under each mechanism if the mechanism is lost. • Touch RETURN to return to the main MEDS screen, or touch RETURN TO MAIN DIAG MENU to return to the main Diagnostics screen.

Version 2.0

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

3–15

Diagnostics MEDS Incubator, Transverse Shuttle, and Electrometer Movement Sequences

MEDS Incubator, Transverse Shuttle, and Electrometer Movement Sequences

Incubator, CM/RT Eject, and PM Eject Movement Sequence Touch the targets in the following order. 1. RESET INCUBATOR 2. HOME 3. CYCLE 4. PURGE 5. (CM/RT Eject) EXTEND 6. (CM/RT Eject) RETRACT 7. (CM/RT Eject) CYCLE 8. (CM/RT Eject) RESET 9. (PM Eject) EXTEND 10. (PM Eject) RETRACT 11. (PM Eject) CYCLE 12. (PM Eject) RESET 13. RESET INCUBATOR Transverse Shuttle Movement Sequence Touch the targets in the following order. 1. RESET INCUBATOR 2. IR METERING 3. DUMP 4. SAMPLE METERING 5. CYCLE 6. RESET 7. RESET INCUBATOR Electrometer Movement Sequence Touch the targets in the following order. 1. RESET INCUBATOR 2. CYCLE 3. RESET 4. RESET INCUBATOR

3–16

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

Version 2.0

Diagnostics MEDS Reflectometer

MEDS Reflectometer Feb 22 XX

SAMPLING LAB COMP : TESTING COMPLETE

READY

14:13:12 ON

OFF

VX.XX**250 ME07A

MEDS – Main Menu – Reflectometer

SELECT WAVELENGTH

CLOSE SHUTTER

CYCLE FILTER WHEEL

CYCLE SHUTTER

RESET FILTER WHEEL

RESET SHUTTER

OPEN SHUTTER > Touch a target to select a function. RETURN

RETURN TO MAIN DIAG MENU

RESET REFLECTOMETER

HELP

SAMPLING LAB COMP : TESTING COMPLETE

READY

14:13:12 ON

OFF

MEDS – Main Menu – Reflectometer – Select Wavelength FILTER # 0 340 NM (HOME)

FILTER # 4 600 NM

FILTER # 1 400 NM

FILTER # 5 630 NM

FILTER # 2 460 NM

FILTER # 6 670 NM

FILTER # 3 540 NM

FILTER # 7 680 NM

Feb 22 XX VX.XX**250 ME07B

> Touch a target to select a function. RETURN

RETURN TO MAIN DIAG MENU

HELP

• Touch RESET REFLECTOMETER before selecting the first Reflectometer target. • Touch SELECT WAVELENGTH to choose a wavelength to exercise. • Touch any other target to exercise the selected mechanism. • Touch RETURN to return to the main MEDS screen, or touch RETURN TO MAIN DIAG MENU to return to the main Diagnostics screen.

Version 2.0

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

3–17

Diagnostics Subsystem Tests

Subsystem Tests Lab Comp Protocol Analyzer Setup/Adjust

The Subsystem Tests of Diagnostics are for Clinical Diagnostics Field Engineer use only. Do not attempt to use these tests.

Call your Customer Support Representative for assistance in using this feature. The Setup/Adjust feature within Diagnostics allows you to move and record the number of steps for a mechanism to go to a specified location. If the placement is satisfactory, the number of steps will be saved and used by the analyzer. IMPORTANT: You should change the setups only with great care and with a thorough understanding of the desired results. To access the Setup/Adjust screen and begin using the Setup/Adjust feature: 1. Touch DIAGNOSTICS on the Main Menu. 2. Touch SETUP/ADJUST on the main Diagnostics screen.

LAB COMP: TESTING COMPLETE

READY

SAMPLING

14:13:12 ON

DIAGNOSTICS - Setup/Adjustments SAMPLE METERING

READ SYNC

SLIDE TRANSPORT RATE/CM CORRECTION LECTURE FACTOR

Apr 24 XX

OFF

VX.XX**250 SA00A

REFLECTOMETER IRIS CURRENT SETUP VALUES

> Touch a target to select a function. RETURN

HELP

IMPORTANT: Only trained Field Engineers should use the SAMPLE METERING, READ SYNC, and SLIDE TRANSPORT features.

3–18

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

Version 2.0

Diagnostics Rate/CM Correction Factor Test

Rate/CM Correction Factor Test

Perform the Rate/CM Correction Factors Test whenever you change the reflectometer lamp and encounter unacceptable quality control values on multiple tests, or when instructed to do so by your Customer Support Representative. Ensure that the reflectometer iris is adjusted properly before performing the Rate/CM Correction Factors test. If you don’t know how to adjust the reflectometer iris, see the instructions in the next section, “Reflectometer Iris Adjustment.” To perform this procedure you will need: • VITROS White Reference Slides (Part Number 994723) • VITROS Black Reference Slides (Part Number 994724) NOTE: White Reference Slides are also referred to as White Correction Factor (WCF) Slides. Black Reference Slides are also referred to as Black Correction Factor (BCF) Slides. To access the Rate/CM Correction Factors test screen and begin using the Rate/CM Correction Factors test feature: 1. Touch RATE/CM CORRECTION FACTOR on the Setup/Adjustments screen. The next screen will read: “Warning: Adjustments made to the mechanism may result in significant changes in analyzer performance. All adjustments should be made by qualified personnel only. If adjustments are made, all changes should be saved on a backup diskette.” — If you don’t know how to backup information to a diskette, see Chapter 10, “Options,” in the Operator’s Manual. 2. Touch CONTINUE to proceed with the Rate/CM Correction Factors test.

Version 2.0

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

3–19

Diagnostics Rate/CM Correction Factor Test

3. Wait while the incubator and slide transport mechanisms initialize. The screen will display the wavelengths and white slide assay values. The prompt line will ask if you want to use the current assay numbers. Oct 09 92

SAMPLING SS1 SS2 ST INC R/C PM INOP

LAB COMP : TESTING COMPLETE

14:13:12 ON

OFF

DIAGNOSTICS – Setup/Adjustments – Rate/CM Correction Factors Wavelength 340 nm 400 nm 460 nm 540 nm 600 nm 630 nm 670 nm 680 nm

White Slide Assay 0.44020 0.76700 0.82310 0.83690 0.83770 0.83800 0.84120 0.84140

> Use current assay numbers? RETURN

3–20

VX.XX**250 SA20B

(Y/N): RETURN TO MAIN DIAG MENU

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

HELP

Version 2.0

Diagnostics Rate/CM Correction Factor Test

4. Compare the displayed assay values to the assay values on the carton of White Reference Slides. — If the correct values are not on the screen, type “N” for no. Then type the correct assay value from the carton, and press the Enter key on the keyboard for each of the wavelengths displayed. — If the values are correct, type “Y” for yes and press the Enter key on the keyboard. The screen will display the wavelengths, assays, and current white correction factors. SAMPLING SS1 SS2 ST INC R/C PM INOP

LAB COMP : TESTING COMPLETE

Oct 09 92 14:13:12

ON

OFF

VX.XX**250

DIAGNOSTICS – Setup/Adjustments – Rate/CM Correction Factors Wavelength

White Slide Assay

340 nm 400 nm 460 nm 540 nm 600 nm 630 nm 670 nm 680 nm

0.44020 0.76700 0.82310 0.83690 0.83770 0.83800 0.84120 0.84140

SA20C

Current WCF 0.38012 0.72690 0.81089 0.82392 0.81384 0.81181 0.81211 0.81185

1) Empty used slide bin and put in a clean catch cloth. 2) Lift incubator cover and put White slide on labelled slot. 3) Insert White Correction Factor Slide completely into incubator. 4) Lower incubator cover and touch START. RETURN

Version 2.0

START

RETURN TO MAIN DIAG MENU

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

HELP

3–21

Diagnostics Rate/CM Correction Factor Test

5. Lift the top right cover of the analyzer.

6. Open the incubator cover.

Incubator Cover

3–22

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

Version 2.0

Diagnostics Rate/CM Correction Factor Test

7. Place a White Reference Slide on the labeled slot at the front of the incubator. Position the slide with the ribbed side down, notch toward the incubator.

Incubator

Slide

8. Push the slide into the incubator so that the incubator cap closes. 9. Close the incubator cover and touch START. The analyzer will reposition the slide. 10. The analyzer will now display the wavelengths and black slide assay values. The prompt line will ask if you want to use the current assay numbers. Compare the displayed black assay values to the assay values on the carton of Black Reference Slides. — If the values on the screen are not the same as the values on the carton, type “N” for no. Then type the correct assay values from the carton for each of the wavelengths displayed. — If all the values are correct, type “Y” for yes and press the Enter key on the keyboard. 11. The screen will display the wavelength, assays, and current black correction factors. 12. Place a Black Reference Slide on the labeled slot at the front of the incubator. Position the slide with the rib side down, and line up the notch in the slide with the label in front of the incubator slot.

Version 2.0

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

3–23

Diagnostics Rate/CM Correction Factor Test

13. Push the slide into the incubator so that the incubator cap closes. 14. Close the incubator cover and touch START. — The analyzer will reposition the slide. — The test takes approximately twelve minutes to complete 92 read cycles. The screen displays and updates the number of cycles completed until it reaches approximately 84 read cycles. The screen will then go blank because of the screen-saver feature of the analyzer. Touch the screen or press any key on the keyboard to reactivate the screen. — The analyzer will discard the used white and black reference slides automatically. Do not reuse these slides. — The new correction factors are displayed on the summary screen when the test is finished. Oct 09 92

SAMPLING SS1 SS2 ST INC R/C PM INOP

LAB COMP : TESTING COMPLETE

14:13:12 ON

OFF

DIAGNOSTICS – Setup/Adjustments – Rate/CM Correction Factors

VX.XX**250 SA20C

Summary

DISPLAY WHITE DATA

DISPLAY BLACK DATA

Wavelength

New WCF

White Dr S.D.

New BCF

Black Dr S.D.

340 nm 400 nm 460 nm 540 nm 600 nm 630 nm 670 nm 680 nm

** 0.38175 0.84258 0.90888 0.94045 0.95488 0.95760 0.95473 0.95769

** 0.00055 ** 0.00026 0.00007 0.00008 0.00004 0.00008 0.00011 0.00008

*** *** *** *** *** *** *** ***

** ** ** ** ** ** ** **

0.00097 0.00042 0.00015 0.00074 0.00081 0.00071 0.00097 0.00078

(Y/N):

> Automatic Update?

RETURN

3–24

0.00081 0.00100 0.00120 0.00115 0.00170 0.00101 0.00076 0.00129

RETURN TO MAIN DIAG MENU

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

HELP

Version 2.0

Diagnostics Rate/CM Correction Factor Test

15. Display and print both the white correction factor data and the black correction factor data. • Touch DISPLAY WHITE DATA. The White Correction Factors screen appears. Oct 09 92

SAMPLING LAB COMP : TESTING COMPLETE

SS1 SS2 ST INC R/C PM INOP

14:13:12 ON

OFF

VX.XX**250

DIAGNOSTICS – Setup/Adjustments – Rate/CM Correction Factors

SA20C

White Correction Factors Wavelength DISPLAY WHITE DATA

DISPLAY BLACK DATA

340 nm 400 nm 460 nm 540 nm 600 nm 630 nm 670 nm 680 nm

White Assay

Current WCF

0.35680 0.74230 0.81610 0.83770 0.83940 0.83960 0.83630 0.83770

0.42808 0.86311 0.91215 0.93112 0.94345 0.94681 0.95046 0.95221

New WCF

Dr S.D.

** 0.38175 0.84258 0.90888 0.94045 0.95488 0.95760 0.95473 0.95769

** 0.00055 ** 0.00026 0.00007 0.00008 0.00004 0.00008 0.00011 0.00008

> Touch DISPLAY BLACK DATA to display more data.

RETURN

RETURN TO MAIN DIAG MENU

HELP

• Print the screen for your laboratory’s quality control records by pressing the PrtScr key. • Touch DISPLAY BLACK DATA. • Print the screen for your laboratory’s quality control records by pressing the PrtScr key.

Version 2.0

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

3–25

Diagnostics Rate/CM Correction Factor Test

16. Touch RETURN to return to the Summary screen. Oct 09 92

SAMPLING SS1 SS2 ST INC R/C PM INOP

LAB COMP : TESTING COMPLETE

14:13:12 ON

OFF

VX.XX**250

DIAGNOSTICS – Setup/Adjustments – Rate/CM Correction Factors

SA20C

Summary

DISPLAY WHITE DATA

DISPLAY BLACK DATA

Wavelength

New WCF

White Dr S.D.

New BCF

Black Dr S.D.

340 nm 400 nm 460 nm 540 nm 600 nm 630 nm 670 nm 680 nm

** 0.38175 0.84258 0.90888 0.94045 0.95488 0.95760 0.95473 0.95769

** 0.00055 ** 0.00026 0.00007 0.00008 0.00004 0.00008 0.00011 0.00008

*** *** *** *** *** *** *** ***

** ** ** ** ** ** ** **

0.00097 0.00042 0.00015 0.00074 0.00081 0.00071 0.00097 0.00078

0.00081 0.00100 0.00120 0.00115 0.00170 0.00101 0.00076 0.00129 (Y/N):

> Automatic Update? RETURN TO MAIN DIAG MENU

RETURN

HELP

— The Summary screen may show two or three flashing asterisks before some correction factors or standard deviations (S.D.s). The table below explains what the asterisks mean.

Number of Asterisks None

Condition •

New correction factor (WCF or BCF) is within 5% of original value.

•

New correction factor (WCF or BCF) is within 5% to 15% of the original value.

•

New White or Black Dr S.D. is more than .0002 from the original value.

•

New correction factor (WCF or BCF) is more than 15% of the original value.

**

***

3–26

OR

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

Version 2.0

Diagnostics Rate/CM Correction Factor Test

17. Follow the instructions below to determine when to update correction factors.

If Summary Screen Shows: •

Two asterisks (**) or no asterisks in the New WCF or White Dr S.D. columns (no values with three asterisks) AND

•

New BCF values are all within typical range1

•

Two asterisks (**) or no asterisks in the New WCF or White Dr S.D. columns (no values with three asterisks) AND

•

Any New BCF value is outside of typical range1

•

Any New WCF or White Dr S.D. value with three asterisks (***) AND

•

Version 2.0

New BCF values are either within or outside of typical range

Update?

Yes. Continue with step 18 on the next page.

No. Check for errors2 and repeat test. Call your Customer Support Center if New BCF values are out of range after you repeat the test. Yes—if service was performed or you have a new lot of correction factor slides.3 Continue with step 18 on the next page. Otherwise, check for errors2 and repeat test. Call your Customer Support Center if any New WCF or White Dr S.D. values have three asterisks after you repeat the test.

1

It is common for three flashing asterisks to appear in front of New BCF values, regardless of how many times the correction factors test is repeated. Typically, BCF values should fall in the range [-0.0020 to 0.0020].

2

Check for the following errors and repeat the correction factors test. — Ensure that the reference slides were inserted correctly. Reference slides should be inserted ribbed side down. — Ensure that the assay values from the White or Black Reference Slide cartons were entered correctly.

3

Three asterisks in front of New WCF values usually indicates that something has changed in the analyzer’s optical system. This can happen if a service procedure has just been performed, such as the installation of a new internal reference or a new lamp. This can also happen if you have a new lot of correction factor slides. If there is a valid reason for a large change in the correction factors (three asterisks), you should update the correction factors.

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

3–27

Diagnostics Rate/CM Correction Factor Test

18. The prompt line will ask if you want to update the correction factors automatically. If you update the correction factors, repeat the entire correction factors test again from step 1 to verify the new values. — To update the correction factors automatically, type “Y” for yes and press the Enter key on the keyboard. The update takes about ten seconds. — To end the test without updating the correction factors, type “N” for no and press the Enter key on the keyboard. Warning: If you update the correction factors with inappropriate values, patient results may be affected. If this happens, you can manually re-enter previous correction factors from the printouts you made in step 15 using “WCF Manual Entry,” found in the Operator’s Manual. 19. Close the analyzer covers. 20. Touch RETURN to return to the Setup/Adjustments screen, or touch RETURN TO MAIN DIAG MENU to return to the main Diagnostics screen. 21. The prompt line will ask you to confirm that you want to return to the Setup/ Adjustments screen. Type “Y” for yes and press the Enter key on the keyboard. 22. The analyzer will initialize when you exit Diagnostics. Run and evaluate quality control fluids to ensure all tests are performing correctly.

3–28

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

Version 2.0

Diagnostics Reflectometer Iris Adjustment

Reflectometer Iris Adjustment

Perform the reflectometer iris adjustment procedure to adjust the lamp output after you have replaced the lamp. To perform the reflectometer iris adjustment: 1. Touch DIAGNOSTICS on the Main Menu. 2. Touch SETUP/ADJUST.

SAMPLING

REMOTE ENABLED READY

LAB COMP : TESTING COMPLETE

May 19 XX 14:13:12

ON

OFF

VX.XX**250 MD00A

DIAGNOSTICS SETUP/ ADJUST

PERFORMANCE TESTS

SUBSYSTEM TESTS

STANDALONE DIAGNOSTIC TESTS

HARDWARE AND CHEM INFO

LAB COMP PROTOCOL ANALYZER

COMPLEX TESTS

MEDS

> Touch a target to select a function.

RETURN

HELP

3. Touch REFLECTOMETER IRIS on the Setup/Adjustments screen.

LAB COMP: TESTING COMPLETE

READY

SAMPLING

Apr 24 XX 14:13:12

ON

OFF

VX.XX**250 SA00A

DIAGNOSTICS - Setup/Adjustments SAMPLE METERING

READ SYNC

SLIDE TRANSPORT RATE/CM CORRECTION LECTURE FACTOR

REFLECTOMETER IRIS CURRENT SETUP VALUES

> Touch a target to select a function. RETURN

Version 2.0

HELP

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

3–29

Diagnostics Reflectometer Iris Adjustment

4. Touch START after you have waited for the lamp to stabilize.

LAB COMP: TESTING COMPLETE

READY

SAMPLING

Apr 24 XX 14:13:12

ON

OFF

DIAGNOSTICS - Setup/Adjustment - Reflectometer Iris

VX.XX**250 SA10A

WARNING: If a new lamp has been installed, the lamp must be allowed a 30 minute stabilizing period. Failure to wait the allotted time could result in inaccurate results due to unstable lamp conditions.

> Wait 30 minutes if a new lamp was installed. > Touch START to begin.

RETURN

START

RETURN MAIN DIAG MENU

HELP

5. When “Center the tool slide? (Y/N)” is displayed on the prompt line, type “N” and press the Enter key on the keyboard. IMPORTANT: Do not type “Y” at this prompt. Always type “N” to use the analyzer’s internal reference slide. 6. Touch START. The filter with the highest voltage reading will be displayed. Note and record which filter is displayed. 7. Once the voltage reading is displayed, touch START again. 8. Move the iris control switch to the right or left as required to set the voltage according to the table below. (Refer to illustrations 10 and 11 of the lamp replacement label located on the inside of the right front door as a guide.) You will be adjusting the voltage of the filter displayed in step 6 above. All other filter voltages will be less than the displayed filter. • Adjust the displayed filter to within the adjustment guidelines listed in Table 1. Table 1. Filter Adjustment Guidelines Displayed filter wavelength

Target voltage

Any filter

As high as possible, but not to exceed 8.0 V

9. Touch DONE.

3–30

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

Version 2.0

Diagnostics Reflectometer Iris Adjustment

10. The screen displays a summary of the current voltages for all of the wavelengths. Verify that all the filter voltages fall within the Filter Verification Limits listed in Table 2 below.

Table 2. Filter Verification Limits Filter wavelength

Voltage

All filters

3.5 to 9.0 V

If any of the filters are not within the range listed in Table 2, do the following: • Repeat the adjustment from step 5. • If you have just installed a new lamp, reseat the lamp (remove it, turn the prongs around, and reinsert it). Repeat the adjustment procedure starting at step 1. • Install a new lamp following the procedure “Changing the Reflectometer Lamp” in this manual. Repeat the adjustment procedure starting at step 1 after the new lamp has stabilized for at least 30 minutes. 11. Close the right front door and top covers of the analyzer. 12. Touch RETURN TO MAIN DIAG MENU. 13. Touch RETURN to return to the Main Menu. The analyzer will initialize. 14. Note date and initials on the “As Required” section of your Maintenance Log. 15. Run and evaluate quality control (QC) fluids to ensure all tests are performing correctly. If the QC results are not satisfactory, perform the Rate/CM Correction Factor test, and recalibrate. Refer to the “Rate/CM Correction Factor Test” in the “Setup/ Adjust” section of Chapter 3, “Diagnostics,” in this manual.

Version 2.0

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

3–31

Diagnostics Current Setup Values

Current Setup Values

Select this feature to display the current setup values. To display current setup values: 1. Touch CURRENT SETUP VALUES on the Setup/Adjustments screen.

SAMPLING LAB COMP : TESTING COMPLETE

READY

14:13:12 ON

OFF

DIAGNOSTICS – Setup/Adjustments – Current Setup Values TRUCK:

Sample Tip Pick Up Mixing Cup Left Mixing Cup Right Diluent Tray RT/CM Slide PM Slide

SLIDE TRANSPORT:

46 24 33 24 39 75 33

RETURN

INPUT SETUP VALUES

VX.XX**250 SA25A

Disp to Metering 12 Inc/Disp Path 26 Inc RT/CM Depth 45 Inc PM Depth 50 PM Eject Depth 20 Inc Steps/Rev 14412

SAMPLE TRANSPORT: Tray Fin Reference 310 Carriage Meter Pos –75 Mixing Cup Trans 33 Diluent Tray Trans 17 Tray Hook –95 Psid Scan 0

PROBOSCIS: Mixing Cup Bottom 223 Sample Cup Bottom 271 Prob. Compression 56 Tip Height 10 REFERENCE SLIDE CENTER READ SYNC:

Oct 09 92

171 4.0 ms

DISPLAY MORE DATA

RETURN TO MAIN DIAG MENU

HELP

2. Touch DISPLAY MORE DATA to display additional setup values. 3. Touch RETURN to return to the Setup/Adjustments screen, or touch RETURN TO MAIN DIAG MENU to return to the main Diagnostics screen. NOTE: You can print a copy of this screen by pressing the PrtScr Key.

3–32

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

Version 2.0

Diagnostics Stand-Alone Diagnostic Tests

Stand-Alone Diagnostic Tests

The Stand-alone Diagnostic Tests screen displays when you touch STANDALONE DIAGNOSTICS TESTS on the Diagnostics screen.

SAMPLING READY

LAB COMP : TESTING COMPLETE

STANDALONE DIAGNOSTIC TESTS Standalone Diagnostics consist of the following tests:

Oct 09 92 14:13:12

ON

OFF

VX.XX**250

W1.OT

SDSA1

1 – Touch Screen Tests (Calibration, Pixel Sensitivity, Emulation) 2 – Keyboard Test (Echo of all keys, including function and control keys) 3 – Serial Devices (AT4 and M&D Loopback, Printer and Lab Computer Config) 4 – Sensor Tests (A/D Reads, Optical Sensors, Heat Pumps) 5 – Motor Tests (Stepper Motors, Bidirectional DC Motors, Fans) 6 – S/W Version ID Numbers (MIC ROM, Flash, Slave ROM, EEPROM, Analog, PAL) 7 – REC Board Tests (Elec. & Reflec. loopbacks and control line toggles) To initiate Standalones, touch "RETURN" twice to go back to the Diagnostics Menu and then the Main Menu. When in the Main Menu, touch the target "Exit to Boot Menu," and "y" when prompted by "Do you want to continue? Y/N". The analyzer will then proceed to close any open files and reset the Scheduler Computer. When the Vitros Boot Menu appears, select the touch target "STANDALONE ELECTRONIC DIAG." to load and run Standalones. > Touch a TARGET. RETURN

The loopback test for serial devices is the only feature on this screen for routine operator use. All other features are for Field Engineer use only.

Version 2.0

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

3–33

Diagnostics Loopback Tests

Loopback Tests

The loopback test lets you verify the operation of any of the three output device ports for either printer or the lab computer interface (LCI). This is useful in determining the cause of a malfunction in printer or LCI operation by testing the basic functionality of the analyzer ports. If the test passes, it indicates the port is fine and you should check the port configuration in the Options dialogue and/or the cable or output device for a solution to the malfunction. You will need to use the loopback connector TL-3225 (part of the spare parts kit). To run loopback tests:

LAB COMP : TESTING COMPLETE

READY

SAMPLING

14:13:12 ON

OFF

MAIN MENU SAMPLE PROGRAMMING

Apr 24 XX

CARTRIDGE HANDLING

CALIBRATION PROGRAMMING

REVIEW RESULTS

ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING

PERIODIC MAINTENANCE

DIAGNOSTICS

VX.XX**250 SCO3A OPTIONS

QUALITY CONTROL

> Touch a target to select a function. EXIT TO BOOT MENU

SHUTDOWN ANALYZER

HELP

1. Touch EXIT TO BOOT MENU on the Main Menu. 2. Type “Y” and press the Enter key on the keyboard at the prompt, “This will exit to the Boot Menu. Do you wish to continue?” It will take a few minutes for the Boot Menu to display.

3–34

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

Version 2.0

Diagnostics Loopback Tests

VITROS Boot Menu

BT00A

Program Selection COMPUTER SYSTEM CHECKS

CONFIGURE ANALYZER

LOAD NEW SOFTWARE

DISK UTILITIES

ANALYZER SOFTWARE

STANDALONE ELECTRONIC DIAG.

EXIT TO OPERATING SYSTEM

> Touch a target to select a function. SHUTDOWN ANALYZER

HELP

3. Touch STANDALONE ELECTRONIC DIAG. 4. Type the operator access code, and press the Enter key on the keyboard.

STANDALONE DIAGNOSTIC MAIN MENU V5.2

1 – Touch Screen Tests 2 – Keyboard Test 3 – Serial Devices 4 – Sensor Tests 5 – Version Number Test 6 – Motor Tests 7 – REC Board Tests

Touch "RETURN" to exit Standalones or select and enter a number: 3 RETURN

5. Type “3” and press the Enter key on the keyboard to select Serial Devices.

Version 2.0

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

3–35

Diagnostics Loopback Tests

SERIAL DEVICE MAIN MENU

1 – Loopback Tests 2 – Printer 1 Configuration 3 – Printer 2 Configuration 4 – Lab Computer Tests

Touch "RETURN" to go back to the Standalones Main Menu or select and enter a number: 1 RETURN

6. Type “1” and press the Enter key on the keyboard to select Loopback Tests. PG 01 LOOPBACK TEST MENU

1 – AT4 Board Printer Port 1 2 – AT4 Board Printer Port 2 3 – AT4 Board Lab Computer Port 4 – AT4 Board Scheduler Computer Port 5 – Scheduler Computer Output Ports (M&D and REC Board)

For more information on Loopback Tests, see the Diagnostic and Troubleshooting section of the Service Manual.

Touch "RETURN" to go back to the Serial Device Main Menu or select and enter a number: RETURN

7. Type “1,” “2,” or “3,” and press the Enter key on the keyboard to select the port desired. (Selections “4” and “5” are for Clinical Diagnostics Field Engineer use only.)

3–36

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

Version 2.0

Diagnostics Loopback Tests

8. Disconnect the device cable from the selected port on the back of the analyzer. BACK OF ANALYZER

Port Connectors 1 2 3

Device Cable

9. Install the Loopback Connector TL-3225 (supplied in the spare parts kit) on the selected port connector. Loopback Connector TL-3225

10. Touch CONTINUE. 11. The number of tests completed successfully will be displayed on the screen. When you are satisfied the port is functioning properly, touch CONTINUE to stop the test. 12. Remove the loopback connector and reconnect the device cable. 13. Touch RETURN three times. 14. Touch ANALYZER SOFTWARE to start a reset if you want to exit Stand-Alone Diagnostics and return to control software.

Version 2.0

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

3–37

Diagnostics Complex Tests

Complex Tests

The Complex Tests of Diagnostics are for Clinical Diagnostics Field Engineer use only. Do not attempt to use these tests.

Performance Tests

The Performance Tests features within Diagnostics allow you to perform several tests and generate statistics on selected analyzer components. To access the performance tests: 1. Touch DIAGNOSTICS on the Main Menu.

SAMPLING

REMOTE ENABLED READY

LAB COMP : TESTING COMPLETE

14:13:12 ON

OFF

VX.XX**250 MD00A

DIAGNOSTICS SETUP/ ADJUST

PERFORMANCE TESTS

SUBSYSTEM TESTS

STANDALONE DIAGNOSTIC TESTS

HARDWARE AND CHEM INFO

LAB COMP PROTOCOL ANALYZER

COMPLEX TESTS

MEDS

May 19 XX

> Touch a target to select a function.

RETURN

HELP

2. Touch PERFORMANCE TESTS.

SAMPLING LAB COMP : TESTING COMPLETE

READY

Oct 09 92 14:13:12

ON

DIAGNOSTICS – Performance Tests SAMPLE METERING

REFLECTOMETER

ELECTROMETER

INCUBATOR

REF MET & IMM RATE

CARTRIDGE HANDLING

OFF

VX.XX**250 MD00B

PSID SCANNER

> Touch a target to select a function. RETURN

3–38

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

HELP

Version 2.0

Diagnostics Sample Metering

Details on how to run each performance test are found on the following pages.

Sample Metering

Two sample metering performance tests are available: • Leak/Hysteresis Test—Performs a sequence of four checks: A/D reference voltage check, transducer check, leak test, and hysteresis test. — The A/D reference voltage check reads and displays the A/D converter output. — The transducer check monitors and displays the pressure as voltage values while the sealed tip is subjected to a series of aspirations followed by a series of dispenses. — The leak test verifies that a closed or sealed system can be created in the sample metering assembly when the proboscis picks up a tip, aspirates, and dispenses a sample. — The hysteresis test measures the ability of the pump (over its full range) to return to its initial value after a set of dispense/ aspirate actions. The pump is the portion of the sample metering assembly that causes the pressure changes. (Hysteresis is a physics term that indicates the ability or inability of a stressed system to return to its original state when the cause of stress is removed.) The four checks are carried out in the order in which they are listed above. You can end the leak/hysteresis test after completing each check or continue with the next check in the sequence. If you choose to stop the leak/hysteresis test before all four checks have been completed, you must start the test from the beginning to perform the checks missed. For instance, you cannot go directly to the leak test without first doing the A/D reference voltage check and the transducer check. • Drop Detection Test—Verifies that the sample metering drop detection and the slide recognition sensor are functioning properly. This sensor must tell the analyzer a drop of sample was dispensed on the slide and a slide is actually present in the slide block to accept a sample drop.

Version 2.0

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

3–39

Diagnostics Testing Sample Metering Leak/Hysteresis

Testing Sample Metering Leak/ Hysteresis

To test sample metering leak/hysteresis: 1. Touch SAMPLE METERING on the Performance Tests screen.

SAMPLING LAB COMP : TESTING COMPLETE

READY

14:13:12 ON

OFF

SAMPLE METERING PERFORMANCE TESTS LEAK/ HYSTERESIS

VX.XX**250 PT00A

DROP DETECTION

RETURN TO MAIN DIAG MENU

RETURN

Oct 09 92

HELP

2. Touch LEAK/HYSTERESIS.

SAMPLING LAB COMP : TESTING COMPLETE

SH SM PM INOP

14:13:12 ON

OFF

SAMPLE METERING PERFORMANCE TESTS Leak Test – A/D Ref. Voltage Check Reference 4.941 Vdc

Oct 09 92 VX.XX**250 PT04A

Resolution 0.039 Vdc

Ambient Pressure = 2.480

> Compare Precision Reference Voltage, Resolution Voltage and Ambient > Pressure to current specifications. > Do you wish to continue with the Leak Test? (Y/N) : RETURN

RETURN TO MAIN DIAG MENU

HELP

3. The reference and resolution voltages are displayed on the screen. Print the screen by pressing the PrtScr key.

3–40

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

Version 2.0

Diagnostics Testing Sample Metering Leak/Hysteresis

4. A prompt asks if you want to continue with the Leak Test. — To discontinue, type “N” and press the Enter key on the keyboard. The Sample Metering Performance Tests screen is displayed. — To continue, type “Y“ and press the Enter key on the keyboard. The screen displays the results of the transducer check.

SAMPLING LAB COMP : TESTING COMPLETE

SH SM PM INOP

14:13:12 ON

OFF

SAMPLE METERING PERFORMANCE TESTS Leak Test – Transducer Check Aspirate

Oct 09 92 VX.XX**250 PT01A

Dispense

Maximum Delta = 0.742 Vdc Minimum Delta = 0.000 Vdc Mean Delta = 0.215 Vdc

Maximum Delta = 0.781 Vdc Minimum Delta = 0.000 Vdc Mean Delta = 0.254 Vdc

Ambient Pressure = 2.266 Vdc

> Compare Ambient Pressure, Max Delta, Min Delta, and Mean Delta values to > current specifications. > Do you wish to continue with the Leak Check? RETURN

DISPLAY DATA

RETURN TO MAIN DIAG MENU

(Y/N) : HELP

5. Print the screen by pressing the PrtScr key. 6. A prompt asks if you want to continue with the leak test. — To discontinue, type “N” and press the Enter key on the keyboard. The Sample Metering Performance Tests screen is displayed. — To continue, type “Y” and press the Enter key on the keyboard. The screen displays the results of the leak test.

Version 2.0

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

3–41

Diagnostics Testing Sample Metering Leak/Hysteresis

SAMPLING LAB COMP : TESTING COMPLETE

SH SM PM INOP

14:13:12 ON

SAMPLE METERING PERFORMANCE TESTS Leak Test – Voltage Differential Aspirate = 0.117 Vdc

Oct 09 92

OFF

VX.XX**250 PT01B

Dispense = 0.020 Vdc

Ambient Pressure = 2.480 Vdc

> Compare dispense and aspirate leak voltages to current specifications. > Do you wish to continue to Hysteresis Test?

RETURN

DISPLAY DATA

RETURN TO MAIN DIAG MENU

(Y/N) :

HELP

7. Print the screen by pressing the PrtScr key. 8. A prompt asks if you want to continue with the hysteresis test. — To discontinue, type “N” and press the Enter key on the keyboard. The main Sample Metering Performance Test screen is displayed. — To continue, type “Y” and press the Enter key on the keyboard. The screen displays the results of the hysteresis test.

3–42

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

Version 2.0

Diagnostics Testing Sample Metering Leak/Hysteresis

SAMPLING LAB COMP : TESTING COMPLETE

SH SM PM INOP

14:13:12 ON

OFF

SAMPLE METERING PERFORMANCE TESTS Hysteresis Test

Hysteresis : Pressure P0 : Pressure P1 : Pressure P2 :

Oct 09 92

MEAN

MAX

MIN

0.919 2.266 4.746 2.266

2.016 2.285 4.980 2.305

0.000 2.266 4.375 2.227

VX.XX**250 PT01C

> Compare all mean, max, min values to current specifications. > Touch DISPLAY DATA to view data. RETURN

DISPLAY DATA

RETURN TO MAIN DIAG MENU

HELP

9. Print the screen by pressing PrtScr key. The sample metering leak/hysteresis tests are now complete. 10. Touch RETURN to return to the Sample Metering Performance Tests screen, or touch RETURN TO MAIN DIAG MENU to return to the main Diagnostics screen. Interpreting Data You will need assistance to interpret the data. Call your Customer Support Representative and have screen printouts available.

Version 2.0

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

3–43

Diagnostics Testing Sample Metering Drop Detection

Testing Sample Metering Drop Detection

To run the sample metering drop/slide detection test: 1. Touch SAMPLE METERING on the main Performance Tests screen.

SAMPLING LAB COMP : TESTING COMPLETE

READY

14:13:12 ON

OFF

SAMPLE METERING PERFORMANCE TESTS LEAK/ HYSTERESIS

VX.XX**250 PT00A

DROP DETECTION

RETURN TO MAIN DIAG MENU

RETURN

Oct 09 92

HELP

2. Touch DROP DETECTION. The A/D reference voltage check is conducted after sample metering is reset. The data is displayed on the screen.

SAMPLING LAB COMP : TESTING COMPLETE

SH SM PM INOP

14:13:12 ON

OFF

SAMPLE METERING PERFORMANCE TESTS Leak Test – A/D Ref. Voltage Check Reference 4.941 Vdc

Oct 09 92 VX.XX**250 PT04A

Resolution 0.039 Vdc

Ambient Pressure = 2.480

> Compare Precision Reference Voltage, Resolution Voltage and Ambient > Pressure to current specifications. > Do you wish to continue with the Leak Test? (Y/N) : RETURN

RETURN TO MAIN DIAG MENU

HELP

3. Print the screen by pressing the PrtScr key.

3–44

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

Version 2.0

Diagnostics Testing Sample Metering Drop Detection

4. You are prompted to continue with the detection test or not. — To discontinue, type “N” and press the Enter key on the keyboard. — To continue, type “Y” and press the Enter key on the keyboard. If you continue with the detection test, the following screen displays:

SAMPLING LAB COMP : SH SM SS1 SS2 ST INC R/C PM INOP TESTING COMPLETE

Oct 09 92 14:13:12

ON

SAMPLE METERING PERFORMANCE TESTS Drop/Slide Detection Test – A/D Ref. Voltage Check

OFF

VX.XX**250 PT03A

1) Empty used slide bin and put in a clean catch cloth. 2) Open incubator cover and put low transmissionslide on labelled slot. 3) Insert low transmission Tool Slide completely into incubator. 4) Close incubator cover and touch START.

RETURN

START

RETURN TO MAIN DIAG MENU

HELP

5. Open the right front door of the analyzer.

Slide-Disposal Box

6. Empty the slide disposal box, and put in a new slide disposal box liner.

Version 2.0

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

3–45

Diagnostics Testing Sample Metering Drop Detection

7. Lift the top right cover of the analyzer.

8. Open the incubator cover.

Incubator Cover

3–46

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

Version 2.0

Diagnostics Testing Sample Metering Drop Detection

9. Put a low transmission slide (magnesium) on the labeled slot at the front of the incubator. Position the slide with the ribbed side down, notch toward the incubator.

Incubator

Slide

10. Push the slide completely into the incubator. 11. Close the incubator cover. 12. Touch START. The detection test will begin. 13. When you see the screen prompts, retrieve the low transmission test slide from the slide disposal box. 14. Open the incubator cover. 15. Insert a high transmission test slide (albumin) the same way you inserted the low transmission slide. 16. Push the slide completely into the incubator. 17. Close the incubator cover. 18. Touch START. The slide is again discarded and the test is completed. Retrieve the high transmission test slide from the slide disposal box.

Version 2.0

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

3–47

Diagnostics Testing Sample Metering Drop Detection

19. The data generated is displayed on the screen. Print the screen by pressing the PrtScr key. 20. Touch RETURN to return to the Sample Metering Performance Tests screen, or touch RETURN TO MAIN DIAG MENU to return to the main Diagnostics screen Interpreting Data You will need assistance to interpret the data. Call your Customer Support Representative and have screen printouts available.

3–48

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

Version 2.0

Diagnostics Incubator

Incubator

You can use these performance tests to verify or assess the operation of the incubator disk and those mechanisms that control it. Two incubator performance tests are available: • Incubator Pad Reflectance—Verifies that there is a consistent level of reflectance from one incubator pad to the next in the incubator. This ensures accurate and precise slide readings for any test located in any incubator nest position. • Incubator Position Timing—Verifies that the nest-to-nest rotational timing is consistent for all nests on the incubator disk. This also verifies that the aperture in each nest is present and centered over the reflectometer read station at a constant time interval for slide readings to be taken. This ensures accurate and precise slide readings for any test located in any incubator nest position.

Testing Incubator Pad Reflectance

NOTE: The white and black correction factors must be set before this test will run correctly. Refer to the “Rate/CM Correction Factor Test” in the “Setup/Adjust” section earlier in this chapter. To test the incubator pad reflectance: 1. Touch INCUBATOR on the main Performance Tests screen.

SAMPLING LAB COMP : TESTING COMPLETE

READY

14:13:12 ON

DIAGNOSTICS – Performance Tests – Incubator

PAD REFLECTANCE

RETURN

Oct 09 92

OFF

VX.XX**250 PT15A

POSITION TIMING

RETURN TO MAIN DIAG MENU

HELP

2. Touch PAD REFLECTANCE.

Version 2.0

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

3–49

Diagnostics Testing Incubator Pad Reflectance

Oct 09 92

SAMPLING LAB COMP : TESTING COMPLETE

READY

14:13:12 ON

OFF

VX.XX**250 PT16A

DIAGNOSTICS – Performance Tests – Incubator Pad Reflectance Test Mean Min.

=

Reflectance Value

Mean Max.

=

Reflectance Value

Range

=

(Max. Mean – Min. Mean)

Grand Mean =

(Mean of all Slot Means)

Stand Dev

(Std. Dev. of all Slots)

=

> Press START to execute test START

RETURN

RETURN TO MAIN DIAG MENU

HELP

3. Touch START. SAMPLING LAB COMP : TESTING COMPLETE

INC R/C INOP

14:13:12 ON

OFF

DIAGNOSTICS – Performance Tests – Incubator Pad Reflectance Test Mean Min.

=

0.8841 Reflectance Value

Mean Max.

=

0.9043 Reflectance Value

Range

=

0.0202 (Max. Mean – Min. Mean)

Grand Mean =

0.8939 (Mean of all Slot Means)

Stand Dev

0.0047 (Std. Dev. of all Slots)

=

Oct 09 92 VX.XX**250 PT16B

> Compare Range and Grand Mean to Current Specifications. > Press DISPLAY_MORE_DATA to view the means and raw data. RETURN

DISPLAY MORE DATA

START

RETURN TO MAIN DIAG MENU

HELP

4. Press the PrtScr key to print the screen. 5. Touch RETURN to return to the main Incubator Performance Tests screen, or touch RETURN TO MAIN DIAG MENU to return to the main Diagnostics screen. Interpreting Data You will need assistance to interpret the data. Call your Customer Support Representative and have screen printouts available.

3–50

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

Version 2.0

Diagnostics Testing Incubator Position Timing

Testing Incubator Position Timing

To test the incubator position timing: 1. Touch INCUBATOR on the main Performance Tests screen.

SAMPLING LAB COMP : TESTING COMPLETE

READY

Oct 09 92 14:13:12

ON

OFF

VX.XX**250 PT15A

DIAGNOSTICS – Performance Tests – Incubator

PAD REFLECTANCE

POSITION TIMING

RETURN TO MAIN DIAG MENU

RETURN

HELP

2. Touch POSITION TIMING.

SAMPLING LAB COMP : TESTING COMPLETE

INC INOP

14:13:12 ON

DIAGNOSTICS – Performance Tests – Incubator Position Timing Test

Inc. Pos.

Avg. Time (msec)

Standard Deviation

Min. Time (msec)

Oct 09 92

OFF

VX.XX**250 PT17A

Max. Time (msec)

> Revolution number 7 is complete. RETURN

START

RETURN TO MAIN DIAG MENU

HELP

3. Touch START. The prompt line will display the number of revolutions completed.

Version 2.0

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

3–51

Diagnostics Testing Incubator Position Timing

SAMPLING LAB COMP : TESTING COMPLETE

INC INOP

14:13:12 ON

OFF

DIAGNOSTICS – Performance Tests – Incubator Position Timing Test

Inc. Pos.

Avg. Time (msec)

Standard Deviation

Min. Time (msec)

Oct 09 92 VX.XX**250 PT17A

Max. Time (msec)

> Revolution number 7 is complete. RETURN

START

RETURN TO MAIN DIAG MENU

HELP

When all 15 revolutions are completed, the test results will display on the screen.

SAMPLING INC INOP

Inc. Pos. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

LAB COMP : TESTING COMPLETE

Oct 09 92 14:13:12

ON

OFF

DIAGNOSTICS – Performance Tests – Incubator Position Timing Test Avg. Time Standard Min. Time Max. Time (msec) Deviation (msec) (msec) 193.07 0.2582 193 194 192.53 1.5523 190 195 194.33 1.5430 192 197 191.27 1.5796 189 194 193.20 0.6761 192 194 192.80 0.8619 190 194 192.27 1.7099 190 194 193.53 1.1872 193 196 193.53 1.1872 192 197 192.33 1.3973 190 194 193.13 0.3519 193 194 192.80 1.2071 190 194

> Compare each Avg., S.D., Min., and Max. value to current specifications. > 15 of 15 revolutions were completed. RETURN TO DISPLAY RETURN START MAIN DIAG MORE MENU DATA

VX.XX**250 PT17B

HELP

4. Press the PrtScr key to print the screen. 5. Touch RETURN to return to the main Incubator Performance Tests screen, or touch RETURN TO MAIN DIAG MENU to return to the main Diagnostics screen. Interpreting Data You will need assistance to interpret the data. Call your Customer Support Representative and have screen printouts available.

3–52

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

Version 2.0

Diagnostics PSID Scanner

PSID Scanner

NOTE: The Positive Sample Identification (PSID) Scanner is an optional accessory. Two PSID scanner performance tests are available when a PSID scanner is installed: • Tool Side Tests—Checks the performance of the PSID scanner by reading the bar code samples at the limit of the specification and reporting the number of scans necessary for a good read. You will need the PSID Alignment Tool, TL-4531, to perform these tests. • User Samples Test—Checks the quality of sample bar codes you generate by reporting the number of scans necessary for a good read. This test can assist you in diagnosing a malfunction that may be caused by the print quality of your bar codes.

Performing the Tool Side Test

To check the performance of the PSID scanner using TL-4531: 1. Touch PSID SCANNER on the main Performance Tests screen.

LAB COMP : TESTING COMPLETE

SH INOP

SAMPLING

Oct 09 92 14:13:12

ON

DIAGNOSTICS – Performance Tests – PSID

OFF

VX.XX**250 PT45B

TOOL SIDE 1 TOOL SIDE 2

USER SAMPLES

> Touch a target to select a test. RETURN

Version 2.0

RETURN TO MAIN DIAG MENU

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

HELP

3–53

Diagnostics Performing the Tool Side Test

2. Place PSID Alignment Tool, TL-4531, in an empty sample tray. The tool has two labeled sides, Side 1 and Side 2. Side 1 checks the capability of the scanner to read a range of gray densities on bar codes. Side 2 checks the capability of the scanner to read a range of bar widths on bar codes. Place the tool with Side 1 facing the front of the sample tray.

PSID Test tool Insert a 16 mm tube behind Test tool in each location

Universal Sample Tray

3. Place a 16 mm sample tube in each tray location behind the alignment tool. This will hold the tool in place to ensure that it can be read by the PSID scanner. 4. Touch TOOL SIDE 1 to check the capability of the PSID scanner to read a range of gray densities. 5. Type the number of the tray that has been prepared with the alignment tool, and press the Enter key on the keyboard. The results of the test display on the screen. The PSID scanner will beep once each time a successful detection of a bar code occurs.

3–54

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

Version 2.0

Diagnostics Performing the Tool Side Test

LAB COMP : TESTING COMPLETE

SH INOP

SAMPLING

14:13:12 ON

DIAGNOSTICS – Performance Tests – PSID Test Results for Tray: 1 Sample Id 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Code 3 of 9

RETURN

Oct 09 92

OFF

VX.XX**250 PT45C

Rel Decode Pos

Check Digit: OFF

RETURN TO MAIN DIAG MENU

HELP

6. Print the screen by pressing the PrtScr key. 7. Touch RETURN to return to the main PSID Performance Tests screen. 8. Remove the alignment tool and the sample tubes from the sample tray. 9. Place the alignment tool with Side 2 facing the front of the sample tray. 10. Place a 16 mm sample tube in each tray location behind the alignment tool. This will hold the tool in place to ensure that it can be read by the PSID scanner. 11. Touch TOOL SIDE 2 to check the capability of the PSID scanner to read a range of bar widths. 12. Type the number of the tray that has been prepared with the alignment tool, and press the Enter key on the keyboard. The results of the test display on the screen. The PSID scanner will beep once each time a successful detection of a bar code occurs.

Version 2.0

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

3–55

Diagnostics Performing the Tool Side Test

LAB COMP : TESTING COMPLETE

SH INOP

SAMPLING

14:13:12 ON

DIAGNOSTICS – Performance Tests – PSID Test Results for Tray: 1 Sample Id 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Code 3 of 9

RETURN

Oct 09 92

OFF

VX.XX**250 PT45C

Rel Decode Pos

Check Digit: OFF

RETURN TO MAIN DIAG MENU

HELP

13. Print the screen by pressing the PrtScr key. 14. Touch RETURN to return to the main PSID Performance Tests screen, or touch RETURN TO MAIN DIAG MENU to return to the main Diagnostics screen.

3–56

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

Version 2.0

Diagnostics Performing the User Samples Test

Performing the User Samples Test

To check the quality of bar codes you generate: 1. Touch PSID SCANNER on the main Performance Tests screen.

LAB COMP : TESTING COMPLETE

SH INOP

SAMPLING

Oct 09 92 14:13:12

ON

DIAGNOSTICS – Performance Tests – PSID

OFF

VX.XX**250 PT45B

TOOL SIDE 1 TOOL SIDE 2

USER SAMPLES

> Touch a target to select a test. RETURN

RETURN TO MAIN DIAG MENU

HELP

2. Touch USER SAMPLES. 3. Place sample tubes with your bar codes in an empty sample tray. 4. Type the tray number containing your samples, and press the Enter key on the keyboard. 5. The results of the test display on the screen. The PSID will beep once each time a successful bar code detection occurs.

Version 2.0

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

3–57

Diagnostics Performing the User Samples Test

LAB COMP : TESTING COMPLETE

SH INOP

SAMPLING

14:13:12 ON

DIAGNOSTICS – Performance Tests – PSID Test Results for Tray: 2 Sample Id 1 ABCD11 2 ABCD47 3 *************** 4 ABCD27 5 ABCD09 6 ABCD02 7 ABCD46 8 ABCD10 9 ABCD48 10 ABCD49 Code 3 of 9

RETURN

Oct 09 92

OFF

VX.XX**250 PT45C

Rel Decode Pos 16 12 12 16 15 16 10 11 10 Check Digit: OFF

RETURN TO MAIN DIAG MENU

HELP

6. Print the screen by pressing the PrtScr key. 7. Touch RETURN to return to the main PSID Performance Tests screen, or touch RETURN TO MAIN DIAG MENU to return to the main Diagnostics screen. Interpreting Data You will need assistance to interpret the data. Call your Customer Support Representative and have screen printouts available.

3–58

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

Version 2.0

Diagnostics Reflectometer

Reflectometer

You can use these performance tests to verify proper operation of the various mechanisms that make up the reflectometer assembly. Three reflectometer performance tests are available: • Shutter Test—Verifies the performance of the shutter and those mechanisms involved with the shutter operation. To get precise and accurate results, the shutter must be in the correct position (open or closed) at a specified time. • Static Test—Evaluates the reflectometer read precision without moving the incubator disk. Having the rotor remain stationary removes any imprecision resulting from the movement or performance of the disk. The more precise the reading taken by the reflectometer assembly, the greater the precision of the test result. • Dynamic Test—Evaluates reflectometer precision and accuracy. All the readings are taken just as they would be if running a patient test.

Testing the Shutter

To test the shutter: 1. Touch REFLECTOMETER on the main Performance Tests screen.

SAMPLING LAB COMP : TESTING COMPLETE

READY

Oct 09 92 14:13:12

ON

DIAGNOSTICS – Performance Tests – Reflectometer

OFF

VX.XX**250 PT30A

SHUTTER TEST

STATIC TEST

DYNAMIC TEST

> Touch a target to select a function.

RETURN

RETURN TO MAIN DIAG MENU

HELP

2. Touch SHUTTER TEST. 3. Touch START. The test occurs automatically. The data collected is displayed on the screen.

Version 2.0

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

3–59

Diagnostics Testing the Shutter

R/C PM INOP

LAB COMP : TESTING COMPLETE

SAMPLING

Oct 09 92 14:13:12

ON

OFF

VX.XX**250 DIAGNOSTICS – Performance Tests – Reflectometer – Shutter Test PT31A – Data Screen – Open/Done Open/Done Close/Done Close/Done ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– ––––––––––––––––––––––––––– 58 59 59 59 59 59 59 59 59 59 58 58 59 59 59 59 59 60 59 59 59 58 59 59 60 59 59 59 59 59

> Compare Open/Done and Close/Done times to current specifications.

RETURN

RETURN TO MAIN DIAG MENU

HELP

4. Print the screen by pressing the PrtScr key. 5. Touch RETURN to return to the Reflectometer Performance Tests screen, or press RETURN TO MAIN DIAG MENU to return to the main Diagnostics screen. Interpreting Data You will need assistance to interpret the data. Call your Customer Support Representative and have screen printouts available.

3–60

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

Version 2.0

Diagnostics Performing the Reflectometer Static Test

Performing the Reflectometer Static Test

To check the reflectometer static precision: 1. Touch REFLECTOMETER on the main Performance Tests screen.

SAMPLING LAB COMP : TESTING COMPLETE

READY

Oct 09 92 14:13:12

ON

OFF

VX.XX**250

DIAGNOSTICS – Performance Tests – Reflectometer

PT30A

SHUTTER TEST

STATIC TEST

DYNAMIC TEST

> Touch a target to select a function. RETURN TO MAIN DIAG MENU

RETURN

HELP

2. Touch STATIC TEST. 3. The prompt, “Center the tool slide? (Y/N),” appears on the prompt line. — Type “N” and press the Enter key on the keyboard to use the incubator’s permanent reference slide. The wavelength selection screen will display.

LAB COMP : TESTING COMPLETE

READY

SAMPLING

Oct 09 92 14:13:12

ON

OFF

VX.XX**250 DIAGNOSTICS – Performance Tests – Reflectometer – Wavelength Selection PT31B 340

540

670

400

600

680

460

630

ALL WVL

> Touch a wavelength target to select a single, or all wavelengths. RETURN

RETURN TO MAIN DIAG MENU

HELP

4. Touch the desired wavelength target or touch the ALL WVL target if you want data for all of the reflectometer wavelengths.

Version 2.0

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

3–61

Diagnostics Performing the Reflectometer Static Test

5. The prompt, “Interleave the filters? (Y/N),” appears on the prompt line. — Type “N” and press the Enter key on the keyboard. The shutter operating mode selection screen will display.

SS1 SS2 ST INC R/C PM INOP

LAB COMP : TESTING COMPLETE

SAMPLING

Oct 09 92 14:13:12

ON

OFF

DIAGNOSTICS – Performance Tests – Reflectometer – Static Test

VX.XX**250 PT31C

NORMAL READS

SHUTTER OPEN

SHUTTER CLOSED

> Select a test type. RETURN

START

RETURN TO MAIN DIAG MENU

HELP

6. Touch the desired shutter operating mode. — Normal Reads—Readings are taken while the shutter is operating as it would during slide readings. Both signal and dark readings are taken. — Shutter Open—Readings are taken with the shutter held open. Only signal readings are taken. — Shutter Closed—Readings are taken with the shutter closed. Only dark readings are taken. 7. Instructions for inserting the tool slide will display if you answered “Y” to the prompt in step 3. Continue with step 8. — If you answered “N” to the prompt, these instructions will not display. Skip to step 15. 8. Open the right front door of the analyzer.

3–62

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

Version 2.0

Diagnostics Performing the Reflectometer Static Test

Slide-Disposal Box

9. Empty the slide disposal box, and put in a new slide disposal box liner. 10. Lift the top right cover of the analyzer. 11. Open the incubator cover.

Incubator Cover

Version 2.0

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

3–63

Diagnostics Performing the Reflectometer Static Test

12. Put the tool slide TL-4502 on the labeled slot at the front of the incubator. Position the slide with the word “TOP” facing up.

Incubator

TOP

Tool Slide

13. Push the slide completely into the incubator. 14. Close the incubator cover. 15. Close the top right cover of the analyzer. 16. Close the right front cover of the analyzer. 17. Touch START. 18. When the test is completed, the results will display on the screen. Press the PrtScr key to print the screen.

3–64

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

Version 2.0

Diagnostics Performing the Reflectometer Static Test

SS1 SS2 ST INC R/C PM INOP

LAB COMP : TESTING COMPLETE

SAMPLING

14:13:12 ON

OFF

DIAGNOSTICS – Performance Tests – Reflectometer – Static Test – Summary Screen – Wavelength (nm) ––– 340 400 460 540 600 630 670 680

Mean Dark ––––––– 260

SD Dark ––––––– 0.5477

Mean Signal ––––––– 14849

Oct 09 92

SD Signal ––––––– 40.5126

VX.XX**250 PT31D

%CV*1K ––––––– 1.6660

> Compare SD of Dark and/or Signal reads to current specifications. > Compare %CV*1K to current specifications. > Touch DISPLAY MORE DATA to view detailed data. RETURN

DISPLAY MORE DATA

RETURN TO MAIN DIAG MENU

HELP

19. Touch DISPLAY MORE DATA. 20. Print that screen also by pressing the PrtScr key. 21. If you used a tool slide, remove it from the slide disposal box. 22. Touch RETURN to return to the Reflectometer Performance Tests screen, or touch RETURN TO MAIN DIAG MENU to return to the main Diagnostics screen. Interpreting Data You will need assistance to interpret the data. Call your Customer Support Representative and have screen printouts available.

Version 2.0

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

3–65

Diagnostics Running the Dynamic Test

Running the Dynamic Test

NOTE: Running the dynamic test on all reflectometer wavelengths takes approximately thirty minutes. To run the reflectometer dynamic test: 1. Touch REFLECTOMETER on the main Performance Tests screen.

SAMPLING LAB COMP : TESTING COMPLETE

READY

Oct 09 92 14:13:12

ON

OFF

DIAGNOSTICS – Performance Tests – Reflectometer

VX.XX**250 PT30A

SHUTTER TEST

STATIC TEST

DYNAMIC TEST

> Touch a target to select a function. RETURN TO MAIN DIAG MENU

RETURN

HELP

2. Touch DYNAMIC TEST.

LAB COMP : TESTING COMPLETE

READY

SAMPLING

Oct 09 92 14:13:12

ON

OFF

VX.XX**250 DIAGNOSTICS – Performance Tests – Reflectometer – Wavelength Selection PT31B 340

540

670

400

600

680

460

630

ALL WVL

> Touch a wavelength target to select a single, or all wavelengths. RETURN

RETURN TO MAIN DIAG MENU

HELP

3. Touch the desired wavelength target, or touch the ALL WVL target if you want data for all of the reflectometer wavelengths.

3–66

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

Version 2.0

Diagnostics Running the Dynamic Test

LAB COMP : TESTING COMPLETE

READY

SAMPLING

Oct 09 92 14:13:12

ON

OFF

DIAGNOSTICS – Performance Tests – Reflectometer – Dynamic Test

VX.XX**250 PT33A

Selected wavelength = 340ns

Do you wish to use an EXTERNAL SLIDE for precision and accuracy reads? > Type Y or N and press the ENTER key: RETURN

RETURN TO MAIN DIAG MENU

HELP

4. The prompt, “Do you wish to use an EXTERNAL SLIDE?,” appears on the prompt line. — Type “Y” and press the Enter key on the keyboard if you want to use an external reference slide. Do not insert the reference slide until prompted to do so. Enter the assay value of the slide, and press the Enter key on the keyboard. — Type “N” and press the Enter key on the keyboard if you want to use the incubator’s permanent reference slide. 5. Enter the assay value for the wavelengths selected, and press the Enter key on the keyboard.

Version 2.0

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

3–67

Diagnostics Running the Dynamic Test

LAB COMP : TESTING COMPLETE

INC R/C INOP

SAMPLING

Oct 09 92 14:13:12

ON

OFF

DIAGNOSTICS – Performance Tests – Reflectometer – Dynamic Test

VX.XX**250 PT33B

Selected wavelength = 340ns --------------------------------------340nm —> ASSAY value >.8569< --------------------------------------1) Empty used slide bin and put in a clean catch cloth. 2) Open incubator cover and put slide on labelled slot. 3) Insert Tool Slide completely into incubator. 4) Close incubator cover and touch START.

RETURN

START

RETURN TO MAIN DIAG MENU

HELP

6. Instructions for inserting the external reference slide will display if you answered “Y” to the prompt in step 4. Continue with step 7. — If you answered “N” to the prompt, these instructions will not display. Skip to step 14. 7. Open the right front door of the analyzer.

Slide-Disposal Box

8. Empty the slide disposal box, and put in a new slide disposal box liner.

3–68

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

Version 2.0

Diagnostics Running the Dynamic Test

9. Lift the top right cover of the analyzer.

10. Open the incubator cover.

Incubator Cover

Version 2.0

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

3–69

Diagnostics Running the Dynamic Test

11. Put the external reference slide on the labeled slot at the front of the incubator.

Incubator

Slide

12. Push the slide completely into the incubator. 13. Close the incubator cover. 14. Close the top right cover of the analyzer. 15. Close the right front door of the analyzer. 16. Touch START. 17. When the test is complete, the results will display on the screen. Press the PrtScr key to print the screen.

3–70

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

Version 2.0

Diagnostics Running the Dynamic Test

SS1 SS2 ST INC R/C PM INOP

LAB COMP : TESTING COMPLETE

Oct 09 92

SAMPLING

14:13:12 ON

OFF

VX.XX**250

DIAGNOSTICS – Performance Tests – Reflectometer – Dynamic Test – Summary Screen – Wavelength (nm) ––– 340 400 460 540 600 630 670 680

Mean Dark ––––––– 260.1

SD Dark ––––––– 0.5074

Mean Reference ––––––– 14846.8

SD Reference ––––––– 53.4210

PT33E

%CV*/K ––––––– 1.2616

> Compare Dark and Reference SD to SD specification. > Compare %CV*/K to current specification. >Touch DISPLAY MORE DATA to view detailed data. RETURN

DISPLAY MORE DATA

RETURN TO MAIN DIAG MENU

HELP

18. If you used an external reference slide, remove it from the slide disposal box. 19. Touch RETURN to return to the Reflectometer Performance Tests screen. Touch RETURN TO MAIN DIAG MENU to return to the main Diagnostics screen. Interpreting Data You will need assistance to interpret the data. Call your Customer Support Representative and have screen printouts available.

Version 2.0

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

3–71

Diagnostics Reference Metering

Reference Metering

You can use these performance tests to verify the proper functioning of the Reference Fluid Metering Assembly. Two reference metering performance tests are available. • Timing Test—Verifies that the reference fluid metering assembly movements are completed within the time range allowed and within the step range allowed for the reference fluid metering assembly motor. If either the timing or the step range is violated, the ability of the analyzer to deliver a drop of reference fluid to the PM slide properly, to position a drop of reference fluid on the slide properly, or to dispense a drop of reference fluid on the slide accurately will be compromised. • System Tests—Verifies the proper functioning of the reference fluid metering assembly signal processing system, the transducer, and the pump. The reference fluid metering system is checked for leaks. The system test is composed of four subtests. — Signal Processing Test – Measures the reference coarse gain for the A/D converter. NOTE: The remaining three subtests are done with the reference tip sealed, creating a closed system. The pressure can now be increased or decreased within the system. — Transducer Check Test – Monitors the transducer for the effects of changing pressure. — Leak Test – Looks for leaks in the system. The pressure within the system is increased and/or decreased. Once the system has stabilized from the pressure change, the pressure within the system should not change until the pump is activated for another pressure change. A change would indicate a leak in the system. — Hysteresis Test – Monitors the consistency of response to increasing and decreasing pressure changes. The pump is the portion of the reference fluid metering assembly that causes the pressure changes. (Hysteresis is a term that indicates the ability or inability of a stressed system to return to the original state when the cause of stress is removed.) The four subtests are carried out in this order. You can end the system tests after completing each subtest or continue with the next test in the sequence. Whether the next test is performed depends on the success of the test just completed. If completed results warrant further investigation with the system tests, then you should conduct the next test. — If you choose to stop the system tests before all four subtests have been completed, the test must be started from the beginning to perform the subtest(s) missed; for instance, you cannot go directly to the leak test without first doing the signal processing test and the transducer check test.

3–72

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

Version 2.0

Diagnostics Testing the Reference Fluid Metering Assembly Timing

Testing the Reference Fluid Metering Assembly Timing

To test the reference fluid metering assembly timing: 1. Touch REF MET & IMM RATE on the main Performance Tests screen.

LAB COMP : TESTING COMPLETE

READY

SAMPLING

Oct 09 92 14:13:12

ON

OFF

VX.XX**250

DIAGNOSTICS – Performance Test Reference Metering – Immuno-Rate Test Selection Reference Metering

PT20A

Immuno-Rate Metering

TIMING TEST

TIMING TEST

SYSTEM TEST

SYSTEM TEST

> Touch a target to select a function. RETURN

RETURN TO MAIN DIAG MENU

HELP

2. Touch TIMING TEST in the Reference Metering column. 3. Touch START ten times until ten repetitions are displayed on the screen. 4. Press the PrtScr key to print the screen. 5. Touch RETURN to return to the main Reference Metering— Immuno-Rate Test Selection screen, or touch RETURN TO MAIN DIAG MENU to return to the main Diagnostics screen. Interpreting Data You will need assistance to interpret the data. Call your Customer Support Representative and have screen printouts available.

Version 2.0

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

3–73

Diagnostics Running the System Tests

Running the System Tests

To run the reference fluid metering assembly system tests: 1. Touch REF MET & IMM RATE on the main Performance Tests screen.

LAB COMP : TESTING COMPLETE

READY

SAMPLING

14:13:12 ON

OFF

DIAGNOSTICS – Performance Test Reference Metering – Immuno-Rate Test Selection Reference Metering

Oct 09 92 VX.XX**250 PT20A

Immuno-Rate Metering

TIMING TEST

TIMING TEST

SYSTEM TEST

SYSTEM TEST

> Touch a target to select a function. RETURN TO MAIN DIAG MENU

RETURN

HELP

2. Touch SYSTEM TEST in the Reference Metering column.

LAB COMP : TESTING COMPLETE

SH SM PM INOP

DIAGNOSTICS – Performance Test Reference Metering – System Check

SAMPLING

Oct 09 92 14:13:12

ON

OFF

VX.XX**250 PT22A

> Touch START to begin test. RETURN

START

RETURN TO MAIN DIAG MENU

HELP

3. Touch START. The reference metering arm will lift out of the reservoir to the tip-change position. The prompt line instructs you to install the tool reservoir and a new tip.

3–74

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

Version 2.0

Diagnostics Running the System Tests

4. Lift the top right cover of the analyzer.

5. Swing up the arm so it forms a right angle with the reference -metering assembly. Reference Metering Arm Reference Metering Assembly

Version 2.0

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

3–75

Diagnostics Running the System Tests

6. With one hand, pull the lever to eject the tip. Be prepared to catch the tip with your other hand.

Lever

VITROS Micro Tip

7. Steady the arm with one hand. Insert a new tip by pushing the new tip firmly into place. You will hear a click. 8. While the reference metering arm is still rotated away from the fluid reservoir, lift the retainer lid that holds the reservoir.

Housing Retainer Lid

9. Remove the reservoir.

3–76

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

Version 2.0

Diagnostics Running the System Tests

10. Place the tool reservoir, Part No. 995298, into the reservoir housing.

Tool Reservoir

RM/IR TL-4538

11. Close the top right cover of the analyzer. 12. Touch CONTINUE. The reference arm assembly will return to the “home” position, and the results of the signal processing test will display on the screen.

SH SM PM INOP

LAB COMP : TESTING COMPLETE DIAGNOSTICS – Performance Test Reference Metering – System Check

SAMPLING

Oct 09 92 14:13:12

ON

OFF

VX.XX**250 PT22B

Signal Processing Check COARSE GAIN 2.305 Vdc

> Compare the values to current specifications. > Do you wish to continue the next system test? RETURN

RETURN TO MAIN DIAG MENU

(Y) : HELP

13. Press the PrtScr key to print the results of the signal processing check. 14. The prompt, “Do you wish to continue the next system test?” appears on the prompt line. — To stop testing, type “N” and press the Enter key on the keyboard. You will be prompted to replace the tool reservoir and tip with a new reservoir and tip. Skip to step 22.

Version 2.0

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

3–77

Diagnostics Running the System Tests

— To continue to the transducer check, type “Y” and press the Enter key on the keyboard. The screen displays the results of the transducer check.

LAB COMP : TESTING COMPLETE

SH SM PM INOP

SAMPLING

14:13:12 ON

OFF

DIAGNOSTICS – Performance Test Reference Metering – System Check Transducer Check ASPIRATE DISPENSE Rep. Vdc 1 2..109 2 2.070 3 2.031 4 1.992 5 1.973

Delta 0.039 0.039 0.039 0.039 0.020

Rep. Vdc 6 1.953 7 1.934 8 1.914 9 1.875 10 1.875

Delta 0.020 0.020 0.020 0.039 0.000

Max = 2.109 Min = 1.875 Mean Delta Pressure = 0.020

Rep. Vdc 1 2.871 2 2.949 3 3.047 4 3.125 5 3.223

Delta 0.059 0.078 0.098 0.078 0.098

Rep. Vdc 6 3.320 7 3.418 8 3.496 9 3.594 10 3.672

VX.XX**250 PT22C

Delta 0.098 0.098 0.078 0.098 0.078

Max = 3.672 Min = 2.871 Mean Delta Pressure = 0.078

> Compare the values to current specifications. > Do you wish to continue the next system test?

(Y) :

RETURN TO MAIN DIAG MENU

RETURN

Oct 09 92

HELP

15. Press the PrtScr key to print the results. 16. The prompt, “Do you wish to continue the next system test?”

LAB COMP : TESTING COMPLETE

SH SM PM INOP

DIAGNOSTICS – Performance Test Reference Metering – Reference Timing Rep. 1

HOME to Pre-Dispense Time (sec.) Steps 2.121 2802

Pre-Dispense to Dispense Time (sec.) Steps .203 287

SAMPLING

Oct 09 92 14:13:12

ON

OFF

VX.XX**250 PT21A

Dispense to HOME Time (sec.) Steps 1.799 2978

> Compare the values to current specifications. > Touch START to begin test. RETURN

START

RETURN TO MAIN DIAG MENU

HELP

appears on the prompt line. — To stop testing, type “N” and press the Enter key on the keyboard. You will be prompted to replace the tool reservoir and tip with a new reservoir and tip. Skip to step 22. — To continue to the leak check, type “Y” and press the Enter key on the keyboard. The screen displays the results of the leak check.

3–78

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

Version 2.0

Diagnostics Running the System Tests

LAB COMP : TESTING COMPLETE

SH SM PM INOP

SAMPLING

Oct 09 92 14:13:12

ON

OFF

VX.XX**250

DIAGNOSTICS – Performance Test Reference Metering – System Check Leak Check Ambient Pressure = Ambient-Aspirate 0 sec. read = Ambient-Dispense 0 sec. read = Aspirate Leak Rate = Dispense Leak Rate =

PT22D

2.813 Vdc 0.137 0.586 0.020 0.098

> Compare the values to current specifications. > Do you wish to continue the next system test? DISPLAY DATA

RETURN

(Y) :

RETURN TO MAIN DIAG MENU

HELP

17. Press the PrtScr key to print the results. 18. The prompt, “Do you wish to continue the next system test?” appears on the prompt line. — To stop testing, type “N” and press the Enter key on the keyboard. You will be prompted to replace the tool reservoir and tip with a new reservoir and tip. Skip to step 22. — To continue to the hysteresis check, type “Y” and press the Enter key on the keyboard. The screen displays the results of the hysteresis check.

LAB COMP : TESTING COMPLETE

SH SM PM INOP

SAMPLING

14:13:12 ON

DIAGNOSTICS – Performance Test Reference Metering – System Check Hysteresis Check

Hysteresis: Pressure P0: P1: P2:

MEAN 0.117 2.891 2.813 3.027

MAX 0.293 3.145 2.969 3.281

MIN 0.000 2.754 2.715 2.832

Oct 09 92

OFF

VX.XX**250 PT22L

Vdc Vdc Vdc Vdc

> Compare the values to current specifications. RETURN

DISPLAY DATA

RETURN TO MAIN DIAG MENU

HELP

19. Press the PrtScr key to print the results. 20. Touch RETURN.

Version 2.0

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

3–79

Diagnostics Running the System Tests

LAB COMP : TESTING COMPLETE

SH SM PM INOP

SAMPLING

Oct 09 92 14:13:12

ON

OFF

VX.XX**250 PT20C

DIAGNOSTICS – Performance Test Reference Metering – Remove Reservoir

> Please replace tool reservoir and tip with a new reservoir and tip. RETURN

RETURN TO MAIN DIAG MENU

HELP

21. Install a new reference tip. 22. Replace the tool reservoir with a new reservoir. 23. Touch RETURN to return to the Reference Metering—Immuno-Rate Test Selection screen, or touch RETURN TO MAIN DIAG MENU to return to the main Diagnostics screen. Interpreting Data You will need assistance to interpret the data. Call your Customer Support Representative and have screen printouts available.

3–80

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

Version 2.0

Diagnostics Immuno-Rate Metering

Immuno-Rate Metering

You can use these performance tests to verify the proper functioning of the immuno-rate (IR) metering assembly. Two reference metering performance tests are available. • Timing Test—Verifies that the IR metering assembly movements are completed within the time range allowed and within the step range allowed for the IR Metering Assembly motor. If either the timing or the step range is violated, the ability of the analyzer to deliver a drop of Immuno-Wash Fluid to the IR slide properly, to position a drop of Immuno-Wash Fluid on the slide properly, or to dispense a drop of Immuno-Wash Fluid on the slide accurately will be compromised. • System Tests—Verifies the proper functioning of the IR metering assembly signal processing system, the transducer, and the pump. The IR metering system is checked for leaks. The system test is composed of four subtests. — Signal Processing Test – Measures the reference coarse gain for the A/D converter. NOTE: The remaining three subtests are done with the reference tip sealed, creating a closed system. The pressure can now be increased or decreased within the system. — Transducer Check Test – Monitors the transducer for the effects of changing pressure. — Leak Test – Looks for leaks in the system. The pressure within the system is increased and/or decreased. Once the system has stabilized from the pressure change, the pressure within the system should not change until the pump is activated for another pressure change. A change would indicate a leak in the system. — Hysteresis Test – Monitors the consistency of response to increasing and decreasing pressure changes. The pump is the portion of the IR metering assembly that causes the pressure changes. (Hysteresis is a term that indicates the ability or inability of a stressed system to return to the original state when the cause of stress is removed.)

Version 2.0

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

3–81

Diagnostics Testing the Immuno-Rate Metering Assembly Timing

• The four subtests are carried out in this order. You can end the system tests after completing each subtest or continue with the next test in the sequence. Whether the next test is performed depends on the success of the test just completed. If completed results warrant further investigation with the system tests, then you should conduct the next test. — If you choose to stop the system tests before all four subtests have been completed, the test must be restarted from the beginning to perform the subtest(s) missed; for instance, you cannot go directly to the leak test without first doing the signal processing test and the transducer check test. Testing the Immuno-Rate Metering Assembly Timing

To test the immuno-rate metering assembly timing: 1. Touch REF MET & IMM RATE on the main Performance Tests screen.

LAB COMP : TESTING COMPLETE

READY

SAMPLING

14:13:12 ON

DIAGNOSTICS – Performance Test Reference Metering – Immuno-Rate Test Selection Reference Metering

Oct 09 92

OFF

VX.XX**250 PT20A

Immuno-Rate Metering

TIMING TEST

TIMING TEST

SYSTEM TEST

SYSTEM TEST

> Touch a target to select a function. RETURN

RETURN TO MAIN DIAG MENU

HELP

2. Touch TIMING TEST in the Immuno-Rate Metering column. 3. Touch START ten times until ten repetitions are displayed on the screen.

3–82

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

Version 2.0

Diagnostics Testing the Immuno-Rate Metering Assembly Timing

LAB COMP : TESTING COMPLETE

READY

SAMPLING

Aug 09 xx 14:13:12

ON

OFF

VX.XX**250

DIAGNOSTICS – Performance Test Immuno-Rate – Immuno-Rate Timing Rep. 1

HOME to Dispense Time (sec.) Steps 2.121 2802

PT23A

Dispense to HOME Time (sec.) Steps 1.799 2978

> Compare the values to current specifications. > Touch START to begin test. RETURN

START

RETURN TO MAIN DIAG MENU

HELP

4. Press the PrtScr key to print the screen. 5. Touch RETURN to return to the main Reference Metering— Immuno-Rate Test Selection screen, or touch RETURN TO MAIN DIAG MENU to return to the main Diagnostics screen. Interpreting Data You will need assistance to interpret the data. Call your Customer Support Representative and have screen printouts available.

Version 2.0

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

3–83

Diagnostics Running the System Tests

Running the System Tests

To run the immuno-rate metering assembly system tests: 1. Touch REF MET & IMM RATE on the main Performance Tests screen.

LAB COMP : TESTING COMPLETE

READY

SAMPLING

14:13:12 ON

OFF

DIAGNOSTICS – Performance Test Reference Metering – Immuno-Rate Test Selection Reference Metering

Oct 09 92 VX.XX**250 PT20A

Immuno-Rate Metering

TIMING TEST

TIMING TEST

SYSTEM TEST

SYSTEM TEST

> Touch a target to select a function. RETURN TO MAIN DIAG MENU

RETURN

HELP

2. Touch SYSTEM TEST in the Immuno-Rate Metering column.

LAB COMP : TESTING COMPLETE

READY

DIAGNOSTICS – Performance Test Immuno-Rate – System Check

SAMPLING

Aug 09 xx 14:13:12

ON

OFF

VX.XX**250 PT24A

> Touch START to begin test. RETURN

START

RETURN TO MAIN DIAG MENU

HELP

3. Touch START. The immuno-rate metering arm will lift out of the reservoir to the tip-change position. The prompt line instructs you to install the tool reservoir and a new tip.

3–84

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

Version 2.0

Diagnostics Running the System Tests

4. Lift the top right cover of the analyzer.

5. Swing up the arm so it forms a right angle with the immuno-rate metering assembly. Immuno-Rate Metering Arm Immuno-Rate Metering Assembly

Version 2.0

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

3–85

Diagnostics Running the System Tests

6. With one hand, pull the lever to eject the tip. Be prepared to catch the tip with your other hand.

Vitros Micro Tip

Lever

7. Steady the arm with one hand. Insert a new tip by pushing the new tip firmly into place. You will hear a click. 8. While the immuno-rate metering arm is still rotated away from the fluid reservoir, lift the retainer lid that holds the reservoir.

Cover

Housing Immuno-Wash Fluid Reservoir

9. Remove the reservoir.

3–86

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

Version 2.0

Diagnostics Running the System Tests

10. Place the tool reservoir, Part No. 995298, into the reservoir housing.

Tool Reservoir

RM/IR TL-4538

11. Close the top right cover of the analyzer. 12. Touch CONTINUE. The immuno-rate arm assembly will return to the “home” position, and the results of the signal processing test will display on the screen.

READY

LAB COMP : TESTING COMPLETE

SAMPLING

Aug 09 xx 14:13:12

ON

OFF

DIAGNOSTICS – Performance Test Immuno-Rate – System Check

VX.XX**250 PT24B

Signal Processing Check COARSE GAIN 4.980 Vdc

> Compare the values to current specifications. > Do you wish to continue the next system test? RETURN

RETURN TO MAIN DIAG MENU

(Y) : HELP

13. Press the PrtScr key to print the results of the signal processing check.

Version 2.0

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

3–87

Diagnostics Running the System Tests

14. The prompt, “Do you wish to continue the next system test?” appears on the prompt line. — To stop testing, type “N” and press the Enter key on the keyboard. You will be prompted to replace the tool reservoir and tip with a new reservoir and tip. Skip to step 21. — To continue to the transducer check, type “Y” and press the Enter key on the keyboard. The screen displays the results of the transducer check.

LAB COMP : TESTING COMPLETE

READY

DIAGNOSTICS – Performance Test Immuno-Rate – System Check Transducer Check ASPIRATE Rep. Vdc 1 2..109 2 2.070 3 2.031 4 1.992 5 1.973

Delta 0.039 0.039 0.039 0.039 0.020

Rep. Vdc 6 1.953 7 1.934 8 1.914 9 1.875 10 1.875

Delta 0.020 0.020 0.020 0.039 0.000

Max = 2.109 Min = 1.875 Mean Delta Pressure = 0.020

Rep. Vdc 1 2.871 2 2.949 3 3.047 4 3.125 5 3.223

Aug 09 xx 14:13:12

ON

OFF

VX.XX**250 PT24C

DISPENSE

Delta 0.059 0.078 0.098 0.078 0.098

Rep. Vdc 6 3.320 7 3.418 8 3.496 9 3.594 10 3.672

Delta 0.098 0.098 0.078 0.098 0.078

Max = 3.672 Min = 2.871 Mean Delta Pressure = 0.078

> Compare the values to current specifications. > Do you wish to continue the next system test? RETURN

SAMPLING

RETURN TO MAIN DIAG MENU

(Y) : HELP

15. Press the PrtScr key to print the results. 16. The prompt, “Do you wish to continue the next system test?” appears on the prompt line. — To stop testing, type “N” and press the Enter key on the keyboard. You will be prompted to replace the tool reservoir and tip with a new reservoir and tip. Skip to step 21. — To continue to the leak check, type “Y” and press the Enter key on the keyboard. The screen displays the results of the leak check.

3–88

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

Version 2.0

Diagnostics Running the System Tests

LAB COMP : TESTING COMPLETE

READY

SAMPLING

Aug 09 xx 14:13:12

ON

OFF

VX.XX**250

DIAGNOSTICS – Performance Test Immuno-Rate – System Check Leak Check Ambient Pressure = Ambient-Aspirate 0 sec. read = Ambient-Dispense 0 sec. read = Aspirate Leak Rate = Dispense Leak Rate =

2.637 Vdc 0.137 0.488 0.059 0.078

> Compare the values to current specifications. > Do you wish to continue the next system test? RETURN

DISPLAY DATA

PT24D

RETURN TO MAIN DIAG MENU

(Y) : HELP

17. Press the PrtScr key to print the results. 18. The prompt, “Do you wish to continue the next system test?” appears on the prompt line. — To stop testing, type “N” and press the Enter key on the keyboard. You will be prompted to replace the tool reservoir and tip with a new reservoir and tip. Skip to step 21. — To continue to the hysteresis check, type “Y” and press the Enter key on the keyboard. The screen displays the results of the hysteresis check.

Version 2.0

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

3–89

Diagnostics Running the System Tests

LAB COMP : TESTING COMPLETE

READY

SAMPLING

Aug 09 xx 14:13:12

ON

OFF

VX.XX**250

DIAGNOSTICS – Performance Test Immuno-Rate – System Check Hysteresis Check

Hysteresis: Pressure P0: P1: P2:

MEAN 0.117 2.891 2.813 3.027

MAX 0.293 3.145 2.969 3.281

MIN 0.000 2.754 2.715 2.832

PT24L

Vdc Vdc Vdc Vdc

> Compare the values to current specifications. RETURN

DISPLAY DATA

RETURN TO MAIN DIAG MENU

HELP

19. Press the PrtScr key to print the results. 20. Touch RETURN.

LAB COMP : TESTING COMPLETE

READY

SAMPLING

Aug 09 xx 14:13:12

ON

DIAGNOSTICS – Performance Test Immuno-Rate – Remove Reservoir

OFF

VX.XX**250 PT20C

> Please replace tool reservoir and tip with a new reservoir and tip. RETURN

RETURN TO MAIN DIAG MENU

HELP

21. Install a new micro tip. 22. Replace the tool reservoir with a new reservoir.

3–90

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

Version 2.0

Diagnostics Electrometer

Electrometer

You can use these performance tests to run all mechanical and electrical electrometer sequences. Five electrometer performance tests are available. • Normal Cycle–Verifies the integrity of the electrometer using normal slide reading operations. Verifies the mechanical and electrical operation. • Contact Drive Timing–Verifies the proper operation of the motor that moves the contact points and that the motor can move the contact points to their intended destination within the time allowed in the software. • Auto Checks—Verifies the electrical operation of the electrometer by taking readings while the contact points are up, down, or cycling. Any deviations from normal would indicate that the electrometer was at fault rather than any external mechanism. — Contacts Up—measurements are taken with the contact points in the up position. — Contacts Down—measurements are taken with the contacts down against the internal test pad. — Cycle Contacts—basically the same as a normal cycle except the incubator and PM eject blade are not actuated. This isolates electrometer problems to outside or to internal origin. • Extended Auto Checks—Verifies the integrity of the electronics of the electrometer to uncover extreme bias or surface currents that may adversely affect the accuracy of any slide readings taken, and to identify the presence of any current leaks due to impedance failures or surface contamination. • Basic Modes—Allows independent mode control and readings from the electrometer. This test is for Clinical Diagnostics Field Engineer use only. NOTE: The electrometer is reset after each test is completed. However, the electrometer A/D converter recalibrates only when you exit Diagnostics and return to normal operations, when you power down the analyzer and then power up, or when you perform a full reset.

Version 2.0

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

3–91

Diagnostics Testing Electrometer Normal Cycle

Testing Electrometer Normal Cycle

To test the electrometer normal cycle: 1. Touch ELECTROMETER on the main Performance Tests screen.

LAB COMP : TESTING COMPLETE

READY

SAMPLING

Oct 09 92 14:13:12

ON

DIAGNOSTICS – Performance Tests – Electrometer

OFF

VX.XX**250 PT35A

AUTO CHECKS

NORMAL CYCLE BASIC MODES CONTACT DRIVE TIMING

EXTENDED AUTO CHECKS

> Touch a target to select a function; then touch START. RETURN

RETURN TO MAIN DIAG MENU

HELP

2. Touch NORMAL CYCLE. 3. Touch START. The test occurs automatically. Data generated is displayed on the screen when the test is complete.

3–92

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

Version 2.0

Diagnostics Testing Electrometer Normal Cycle

SS1 SS2 ST INC R/C PM INOP

LAB COMP : TESTING COMPLETE

SAMPLING

Oct 09 92 14:13:12

ON

OFF

VX.XX**250

DIAGNOSTICS – Performance Tests – Electrometer Normal Cycle

Avg. S.D. Min. Max.

= = = =

High Z Zero +0.099 0.0153 +0.084 +0.114

High Z Ref. –199.964 0.0153 –199.971 –199.948

Signal +14.297 3.8298 +5.012 +18.760

Slide Validation –199.956 0.0153 –199.964 –199.941

Low Z Zero +0.099 0.0153 +0.092 +0.114

PT35B

Low Z Ref. –199.964 0.0153 –199.971 –199.948

> Compare Avg., S.D., Min & Max values to current specifications. RETURN

DISPLAY ALL DATA

RETURN TO MAIN DIAG MENU

HELP

4. Press the PrtScr key to print the screen. 5. Touch RETURN to return to the main Electrometer Performance Tests screen, or touch RETURN TO MAIN DIAG MENU to return to the main Diagnostics screen. Interpreting Data You will need assistance to interpret the data. Call your Customer Support Representative and have screen printouts available.

Version 2.0

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

3–93

Diagnostics Testing Electrometer Contact Drive Timing

Testing Electrometer Contact Drive Timing

To test the electrometer contact drive timing: 1. Touch ELECTROMETER on the main Performance Tests screen.

LAB COMP : TESTING COMPLETE

READY

SAMPLING

Oct 09 92 14:13:12

ON

DIAGNOSTICS – Performance Tests – Electrometer

OFF

VX.XX**250 PT35A

AUTO CHECKS

NORMAL CYCLE BASIC MODES CONTACT DRIVE TIMING

EXTENDED AUTO CHECKS

> Touch a target to select a function; then touch START. RETURN

RETURN TO MAIN DIAG MENU

HELP

2. Touch CONTACT DRIVE TIMING. 3. Touch START. The test occurs, and the data generated by the test is displayed on the screen when the test is complete.

3–94

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

Version 2.0

Diagnostics Testing Electrometer Contact Drive Timing

4. Press the PrtScr key to print the screen. 5. Touch RETURN to return to the main Electrometer Performance Tests screen, or touch RETURN TO MAIN DIAG MENU to return to the main Diagnostics screen. Interpreting Data You will need assistance to interpret the data. Call your Customer Support Representative and have screen printouts available.

Version 2.0

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

3–95

Diagnostics Testing Electrometer Auto Checks

Testing Electrometer Auto Checks

To test electrometer auto checks: 1. Touch ELECTROMETER on the main Performance Tests screen.

LAB COMP : TESTING COMPLETE

READY

SAMPLING

Oct 09 92 14:13:12

ON

OFF

DIAGNOSTICS – Performance Tests – Electrometer

VX.XX**250 PT35A

AUTO CHECKS

NORMAL CYCLE BASIC MODES CONTACT DRIVE TIMING

EXTENDED AUTO CHECKS

> Touch a target to select a function; then touch START. RETURN TO MAIN DIAG MENU

RETURN

HELP

2. Touch AUTO CHECKS.

LAB COMP : TESTING COMPLETE

READY

SAMPLING

Oct 09 92 14:13:12

ON

DIAGNOSTICS – Performance Tests – Electrometer Auto checks CYCLE CONTACTS CONTACTS UP (PART C) (PART A)

OFF

VX.XX**250 PT36A

CONTACTS DOWN (PART B)

> Touch a target to select a function; then touch START. RETURN

RETURN TO MAIN DIAG MENU

HELP

IMPORTANT: Before you perform Part B or Part C, be sure there is no slide in the read station and that the contact pad under the reflectometer is clean.

3–96

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

Version 2.0

Diagnostics Testing Electrometer Auto Checks

NOTE: The following instructions describe how to perform the three parts of this test in sequence—Part A first, Part B second, and Part C third. You can, however, end the auto checks test after completing part A or Part B, or continue with the next test in the sequence. Depending on the nature of the problem, you do not need to run Part A first. You could run Part B only or Part C only. 3. Touch CONTACTS UP (PART A). 4. Touch START. The test occurs and the results are displayed on the screen when the test is complete.

SS1 SS2 ST INC R/C PM INOP

LAB COMP : TESTING COMPLETE

SAMPLING

14:13:12 ON

OFF

DIAGNOSTICS – Performance Tests – Electrometer Auto Checks – Contacts Up

High Z Zero High Z Ref. Avg. S.D. Min. Max.

= = = =

–0.328 0.0076 –0.328 –0.320

–200.986 0.0076 –200.994 –200.978

Low Z Zero –0.328 0.0076 –0.336 –0.320

DISPLAY ALL DATA

VX.XX**250 PT36B

Low Z Ref. –200.986 0.0076 –200.994 –200.978

> Continue with the next test? > Compare Avg., S.D., Min & Max values to current specifications. RETURN

Oct 09 92

RETURN TO MAIN DIAG MENU

(Y/N) :

HELP

5. Press the PrtScr key to print the screen. 6. To continue to contacts down (Part B), type “Y” and press the Enter key on the keyboard when you see the prompt, “Continue with the next test?” The results for the auto checks contacts down test are displayed on the screen.

Version 2.0

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

3–97

Diagnostics Testing Electrometer Auto Checks

SS1 SS2 ST INC R/C PM INOP

LAB COMP : TESTING COMPLETE

SAMPLING

14:13:12 ON

OFF

DIAGNOSTICS – Performance Tests – Electrometer Auto Checks – Contacts Down

High Z Zero High Z Ref. Avg. S.D. Min. Max.

= = = =

–0.412 0.0076 –0.412 –0.397

–0.404 0.0076 –0.404 –0.397

Low Z Zero

Low Z Ref.

–0.404 0.0076 –0.404 –0.389

–0.404 0.0076 –0.404 –0.397

> Continue with the next test? > Compare Avg., S.D., Min & Max values to current specifications. RETURN

DISPLAY ALL DATA

RETURN TO MAIN DIAG MENU

Oct 09 92 VX.XX**250 PT36H

(Y/N) :

HELP

7. Press the PrtScr key to print the screen. 8. To continue to cycle contacts (Part C), type “Y” and press the Enter key on the keyboard at the “Continue with the next test?” prompt. The results for the auto checks cycle contacts test are displayed on the screen.

3–98

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

Version 2.0

Diagnostics Testing Electrometer Auto Checks

SS1 SS2 ST INC R/C PM INOP

SAMPLING

LAB COMP : TESTING COMPLETE

14:13:12 ON

OFF

DIAGNOSTICS – Performance Tests – Electrometer Auto Checks – Cycle Contacts Contacts Up High Z Zero High Z Ref. Low Z Zero Low Z Ref. Avg. S.D. Min. Max.

= = = =

–0.328 0.0153 –0.343 –0.313 Signal

Avg. S.D. Min. Max.

= = = =

–0.397 0.0153 –0.404 –0.381

–200.978 0.0153 –200.986 –200.963

–0.328 0.0153 –0.343 –0.320

Contacts Down Sig. Valid. Low Z Zero –0.389 0.0076 –0.397 –0.381

Oct 09 92 VX.XX**250 PT36N

–200.987 0.0153 –200.994 –200.963 Low Z Ref.

–0.397 0.0076 –0.404 –0.381

–0.397 0.0076 –0.404 –0.381

> Compare Avg., S.D., Min & Max values to current specifications. DISPLAY RETURN TO RETURN ALL MAIN DIAG DATA MENU

HELP

9. Press the PrtScr key to print the screen. 10. Touch RETURN to return to the main Electrometer Performance Tests screen, or touch RETURN TO MAIN DIAG MENU to return to the main Diagnostics screen. Interpreting Data You will need assistance to interpret the data. Call your Customer Support Representative and have screen printouts available.

Version 2.0

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

3–99

Diagnostics Testing Electrometer Extended Auto Checks

Testing Electrometer Extended Auto Checks

To test electrometer auto checks: 1. Touch ELECTROMETER on the main Performance Tests screen.

LAB COMP : TESTING COMPLETE

READY

SAMPLING

Oct 09 92 14:13:12

ON

OFF

VX.XX**250

DIAGNOSTICS – Performance Tests – Electrometer

PT35A

AUTO CHECKS

NORMAL CYCLE BASIC MODES CONTACT DRIVE TIMING

EXTENDED AUTO CHECKS

> Touch a target to select a function; then touch START. RETURN TO MAIN DIAG MENU

RETURN

HELP

2. Touch EXTENDED AUTO CHECKS. 3. Touch START. The test occurs and the data generated by the test is displayed on the screen.

LAB COMP : TESTING COMPLETE

SS1 SS2 ST INC R/C PM INOP

SAMPLING

14:13:12 ON

OFF

DIAGNOSTICS – Performance Tests – Electrometer Extended Auto Checks – Part A Contacts Up High Z Zero High Z Ref. Low Z Zero Low Z Ref. –0.336 –0.336 –0.336

+199.392 +199.392 +199.392

–0.336 –0.336 –0.336

> Continue with the next test? > Compare results to current specifications. RETURN

Oct 09 92 VX.XX**250 PT35J

+199.392 +199.392 +199.392

(Y/N) :

RETURN TO MAIN DIAG MENU

HELP

4. Press the PrtScr key to print the screen.

3–100

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

Version 2.0

Diagnostics Testing Electrometer Extended Auto Checks

5. To continue to Part B of the test, type “Y” and press the Enter key on the keyboard when you see the prompt, “Continue with the next test?” The results for the extended auto checks, part B, are displayed on the screen.

LAB COMP : TESTING COMPLETE

SS1 SS2 ST INC R/C PM INOP

SAMPLING

14:13:12 ON

OFF

DIAGNOSTICS – Performance Tests – Electrometer Extended Auto Checks – Part B Bias (+) –0.359 –0.359 –0.359

Bias (–) –0.366 –0.366 –0.366

Leakage (+) +199.353 +199.353 +199.353

Oct 09 92 VX.XX**250 PT35K

Leakage (–) –200.994 –200.994 –200.994

Derived Values (Corrected leakage = Leakage – Bias) Corrected Leakage (+) Corrected Leakage (–) +199.712

–200.627

> Compare results to current specifications. RETURN TO MAIN DIAG MENU

RETURN

HELP

6. Press the PrtScr key to print the screen. 7. Touch RETURN to return to the main Electrometer Performance Tests screen, or touch RETURN TO MAIN DIAG MENU to return to the main Diagnostics screen. Oct 09 92 SAMPLING

LAB COMP :

14:13:12

Interpreting Data SS1 SS2 ST INC R/C PM INOP TESTING COMPLETE ON OFF VX.XX**250 You will need assistance to interpret the Tests data.– Electrometer Call your Customer PT35L DIAGNOSTICS – Performance Contact Drive Timing Support Representative and have screen printouts available.

Avg. S.D. Min. Max.

= = = =

Contacts Down – Time (seconds) 0.13 0.00 0.13 0.13

Contacts Up – Time (seconds) 0.54 0.01 0.53 0.55

> Compare Avg., S.D., Min & Max values to current specifications. RETURN

Version 2.0

DISPLAY ALL DATA

RETURN TO MAIN DIAG MENU

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

HELP

3–101

Diagnostics Cartridge Handling

Cartridge Handling

You can use these performance tests to verify or assess the operation of the cartridge handling system and those mechanisms that control it. The performance tests check the operation of the cartridge plunger, bar code scanner, and cartridge rotor movement. Three cartridge handling performance tests are available. • Plunger Count Test—The plunger count test is for Clinical Diagnostics Field Engineer use only. • Bar Code Scanner Test—Assesses bar code integrity and scanner operation. Tests the bar code scanners that are located on the back wall of each slide cartridge load station. • Rotor Movement Test—Verifies proper mechanical operation of the slide supply rotors.

Plunger Count Test

This test is for Clinical Diagnostics Field Engineer use only.

Testing the Bar Code Scanner

To test the bar code scanner: 1. Touch CARTRIDGE HANDLING on the main Performance Tests screen.

LAB COMP : TESTING COMPLETE

READY

SAMPLING

Oct 09 92 14:13:12

ON

OFF

DIAGNOSTICS – Performance Tests – Cartridge Handling

VX.XX**250 PT25A

PLUNGER COUNT

BAR CODE SCANNER

ROTOR MOVEMENT

> Touch a target to select a function. RETURN

RETURN TO MAIN DIAG MENU

HELP

2. Touch BAR CODE SCANNER.

3–102

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

Version 2.0

Diagnostics Testing the Bar Code Scanner

LAB COMP : TESTING COMPLETE

READY

SAMPLING

14:13:12 ON

OFF

DIAGNOSTICS – Performance Tests – Cartridge Handling Bar Code Scanner Repitition

Scanner #1 Reads

Repitition

Oct 09 92 VX.XX**250 PT27A

Scanner #2 Reads

> Insert test cartridge into Slide Supply 1 or Slide Supply 2. RETURN TO MAIN DIAG MENU

RETURN

HELP

3. Place a cartridge in either cartridge load station. Using a smooth continuous motion, push the cartridge into the opening as far as it will go (its bottom will touch the load door). The bar code label must face away from you.

Cartridge Load Station

Test Cartridge

2

1

4. The bar code is scanned, and the data generated is sent to the screen. NOTE: As you push the cartridge into the load station, look for the blink of the LED at the back of each cartridge load station. This indicates a good read. If you see the blink but the read does not display on the screen, there may be an unusual condition in the scheduler board communication. Call your Customer Support Representative if this occurs.

Version 2.0

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

3–103

Diagnostics Testing the Bar Code Scanner

LAB COMP : TESTING COMPLETE

READY

Oct 09 92

SAMPLING

14:13:12 ON

OFF

VX.XX**250

DIAGNOSTICS – Performance Tests – Cartridge Handling Bar Code Scanner Repetition

Scanner #1 Reads xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx FAILED xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx FAILED xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx

Repetition

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

PT27A

Scanner #2 Reads xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx FAILED xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx FAILED xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx

> Insert test cartridge into Slide Supply 1 or Slide Supply 2. > SCANNER #1: Scans= 8 Failures= 2 SCANNER #2 Scans= 8 Failures= 2. RETURN

RETURN TO MAIN DIAG MENU

HELP

Repetition—number of bar code scanner trials that have been attempted. Reads—represents what is read by that bar code reader. The read should match the human readable characters that appear on the cartridge bar code label on the side of the cartridge. If the read failed, the bar code could not be read by the scanner. Possible causes of a failed read are: — Scanner damaged — Label damaged — Label missing — Operator error – Cartridge inserted without the bar code label facing rear of analyzer. – Insertion technique not smooth enough. – Cartridge inserted too fast or too slow. 5. Press the PrtScr key to print the screen when you are finished testing. 6. Touch RETURN to return to the main Cartridge Handling Performance Tests screen, or touch RETURN TO MAIN DIAG MENU to return to the main Diagnostics screen. Interpreting Data You will need assistance to interpret the data. Call your Customer Support Representative and have screen printouts available.

3–104

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

Version 2.0

Diagnostics Testing Rotor Movement

Testing Rotor Movement

To test the rotor movement: 1. Touch CARTRIDGE HANDLING on the main Performance Tests screen.

LAB COMP : TESTING COMPLETE

READY

SAMPLING

Oct 09 92 14:13:12

ON

OFF

DIAGNOSTICS – Performance Tests – Cartridge Handling

VX.XX**250 PT25A

PLUNGER COUNT

BAR CODE SCANNER

ROTOR MOVEMENT

> Touch a target to select a function. RETURN TO MAIN DIAG MENU

RETURN

HELP

2. Touch ROTOR MOVEMENT.

LAB COMP : TESTING COMPLETE

READY

SAMPLING

Oct 09 92 14:13:12

ON

OFF

DIAGNOSTICS – Performance Tests – Cartridge Handling Rotor Movement

VX.XX**250 PT28A

SLIDE SUPPLY 1

SLIDE SUPPLY 2

> Select Slide Supply and touch START. RETURN

START

RETURN TO MAIN DIAG MENU

HELP

3. Select the slide supply by touching SLIDE SUPPLY 1 or SLIDE SUPPLY 2. 4. Touch START.

Version 2.0

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

3–105

Diagnostics Testing Rotor Movement

SS1 SS2 ST INC R/C PM INC

LAB COMP : TESTING COMPLETE

SAMPLING

Oct 09 92 14:13:12

ON

OFF

VX.XX**250

DIAGNOSTICS – Performance Tests – Cartridge Handling Rotor Movement

PT28B

SLIDE SUPPLY 1

SLIDE SUPPLY 2

> Enter the total number of rotor movements desired (1 – 100) : 12 Note: the average time per movement is approximately 2 seconds. RETURN

RETURN TO MAIN DIAG MENU

HELP

5. Enter the total number of rotor movements desired at the prompt. Type the number (1 to 100), and press the Enter key on the keyboard. — The prompt line on the screen indicates that the estimated time to complete each movement is two seconds. — The test occurs, and the selected slide supply is reset. — Data generated is displayed on the screen. Any rotor movement errors are reported on the line below the prompt line on the screen. 6. The prompt will ask you if the test is to be repeated. — Type “Y” and press the Enter key on the keyboard to repeat the test. — Type “N” and press the Enter key on the keyboard to end the test.

3–106

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

Version 2.0

Diagnostics Testing Rotor Movement

7. Press the PrtScr key to print the test results when you are finished testing. 8. Touch RETURN to return to the main Cartridge Handling Performance Tests screen, or touch RETURN TO MAIN DIAG MENU to return to the main Diagnostics screen. Interpreting Data The number of successful rotor movements is displayed on the screen. For instance, if twelve movements are requested and there are three failures, the screen will display, “# ROTOR MOVEMENTS COMPLETED = 9 out of 12.” All of the desired movements should be completed without error. No error text should be displayed below the prompt line. If any of the movements fail or if there are error codes, call your Customer Support Representative for assistance in interpreting the data. Have a printout of the test results available when you call.

Version 2.0

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

3–107

Diagnostics Hardware and Chemistry Information

Hardware and Chemistry Information

To access Hardware and Chemistry Information: 1. Touch DIAGNOSTICS on the Main Menu. 2. Touch HARDWARE AND CHEM INFO.

SAMPLING LAB COMP : TESTING COMPLETE

READY

HARDWARE AND CHEMISTRY INFORMATION RECENT HISTORY LOG

CONDITION CODE

DATALOGGER ANALYSIS

Oct 09 92 14:13:12

ON

OFF

VX.XX**250 SDMM1

W2.0B SOFTWARE IDENTIFICATION

> Touch a TARGET. RETURN

HELP

Four categories of hardware and chemistry information are available: • Recent History Log—Displays the last 99 condition codes in chronological order. This feature also allows you to display: — Each condition code that has appeared on the analyzer. — The entire message for selected condition codes. • Condition Code—Displays a more detailed description of selected error codes, possible causes, and possible solutions.

3–108

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

Version 2.0

Diagnostics Hardware and Chemistry Information

• Datalogger Analysis—Enables you to identify trends in specific chemistries or environmental conditions by generating information from a data logger file. You are able to sort the records by four search criteria: — Chemistry. Sorts the datalogger file by chemistry and includes cup position, drop number, slide supply position, cartridge position, incubator position, and result. — Incubator Position. Sorts the datalogger file by incubator position and includes chemistry, cup position, drop number, slide supply position, cartridge position, and result. — Environmental Data. Sorts the datalogger file by temperature/ humidity or by power supply voltages. — Error Codes. Sorts the datalogger file by error codes. All of the error codes together with date, time, module number, error number, error type, severity, and condition code display for the selected file. • Software Identification—Use this feature only when instructed by your Customer Support Representative to do so. The feature allows you to: — Verify checksums. (File verify takes approximately five minutes.) — Verify EEPROM and ROM versions.

Version 2.0

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

3–109

Diagnostics Recent History Log

Recent History Log

To display the recent history log: 1. Touch RECENT HISTORY LOG on the main Hardware and Chemistry Information screen.

SAMPLING LAB COMP : TESTING COMPLETE

READY

14:13:12 ON

OFF

RECENT HISTORY LOG 1 Condition Code: 434 10/21/92 10:33:31 ATTENTION 37 MONITOR CONTROL * invalid message 2 Condition Code: 434 10/21/92 10:33:31 ATTENTION 37 MONITOR CONTROL * invalid message 3 Condition Code: 434 10/21/92 10:33:31 ATTENTION 37 MONITOR CONTROL * invalid message 4 Condition Code: 434 10/21/92 10:33:31 ATTENTION 37 MONITOR CONTROL * invalid message 5 Condition Code: 434 10/21/92 10:33:30 ATTENTION 37 MONITOR CONTROL * invalid message 6 Condition Code: 1EA 10/20/92 12:24:07 ATTENTION 4 SCHEDULER * CART HANDLING * cart with slides might unload 7 Condition Code: AE1 10/20/92 12:23:12 MALFUNCTION 102 SLIDE SUPPLY * LOAD DOOR #2 * jam 8 Condition Code: 430 10/20/92 08:31:26 TRANSIENT 37 MONITOR CONTROL * communications error > Touch a TARGET or touch "HELP" for commands made on KEYBOARD. RETURN

CONDITION CODE SUMMARY

DISPLAY NEXT SCREEN

Oct 21 92

COMPLETE MESSAGE

VX.XX**250 SDHL1 17 17 17 17 17 53 90 28

HELP

2. To display additional condition codes, touch DISPLAY NEXT SCREEN. The last 92 codes are available for display. NOTE: Errors that have occurred since you entered Diagnostics will not display in the recent history log. 3. Press the PrtScr key to print any of the screens you may need for review and interpretation. To print the entire recent history log, type “PRINT” and press the Enter key on the keyboard. The last 92 codes will print. 4. To display each condition code that has appeared on the analyzer, touch CONDITION CODE SUMMARY.

3–110

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

Version 2.0

Diagnostics Recent History Log

SAMPLING LAB COMP : TESTING COMPLETE

READY

Oct 21 92 14:13:12

ON

OFF

VX.XX**250

CONDITION CODE SUMMARY Ocurrences Condition Since 00/00/00 Code 00000 1A1 00000 1B1 00000 1B2 00000 1B4 00000 1B5 00000 1B6 00000 1B7 00000 1B8 00000 1BB 00000 1BN 00000 1BP 00000 1BQ 00000 1BR 00000 1BS 00000 1BT > Touch a TARGET or touch "HELP" for commands made on KEYBOARD. RETURN

RECENT HISTORY LOG

DISPLAY NEXT SCREEN

COMPLETE MESSAGE

SDHL2

HELP

5. To display additional condition codes and occurrences, touch DISPLAY NEXT SCREEN. 6. Press the PrtScr key to print any of the screens you may need for review and interpretation. To print all condition codes that have occurrences, type “PRINT” and press the Enter key on the keyboard. 7. To display the entire message for a condition code, possible causes, and possible solutions, touch COMPLETE MESSAGE. 8. At the prompt, enter the alphanumeric condition code.

Version 2.0

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

3–111

Diagnostics Recent History Log

SAMPLING LAB COMP : TESTING COMPLETE

READY

Oct 21 92 14:13:12

ON

OFF

CONDITION CODE MESSAGE 1A1 Scheduler * REPORT ERROR * internal software error

VX.XX**250 SDCC2

The Report Error Module encountered an out of range value while reporting another error. Possible Cause: – Software self check error. Things to do: – Report it to the key operator.

> Touch a TARGET. RETURN

RETURN TO COND. CODE SUMMARY

DISPLAY NEXT SCREEN

HELP

9. Press the PrtScr key to print the screen for review or interpretation. 10. Touch RETURN to return to the main Hardware and Chemistry Information screen, or touch RETURN TO COND. CODE SUMMARY to return to the Condition Code Summary screen. 11. To reset the condition code summary to today’s date, type “RESET” and press the Enter key on the keyboard when you are at the Condition Code Summary screen. The date displayed in the Occurrences column will change to today’s date.

3–112

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

Version 2.0

Diagnostics Condition Code

Condition Code

You may also display condition code detail for multiple condition codes from the Hardware and Chemistry Information screen. To display detailed descriptions of selected error codes, including possible causes and solutions: 1. Touch CONDITION CODE on the Hardware and Chemistry Information screen. 2. Enter the alphanumeric condition code.

SAMPLING LAB COMP : TESTING COMPLETE

READY

Oct 21 92 14:13:12

ON

OFF

VX.XX**250 SDCC2

CONDITION CODE MESSAGE 434 MONITOR CONTROL * invalid message A valid message is not displayed on the Monitor. Possible Cause: – Computer memory malfunction. Things to do: – Touch "RETURN" until the main menu is displayed. Touch "SHUTDOWN ANALYZER". Typewrite "Y" and press "ENTER". When the prompt is displayed, actuate the "PRGM LOAD/RESET"SWITCH to operate Computer System Checks. – If this code occurs again, record the "Code" and the module/error numbers displayed on the error log screen, then obtain help from your Customer Support Representative. > Touch a TARGET. RETURN

ENTER NEW CONDITION CODE

HELP

3. Touch ENTER NEW CONDITION CODE to enter additional condition codes. 4. Press the PrtScr key to print any of the screens you may need for review and interpretation. 5. Touch RETURN to return to the main Hardware and Chemistry Information screen.

Version 2.0

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

3–113

Diagnostics Datalogger Analysis

Datalogger Analysis

The datalogger logs significant events that occur on the analyzer into a log file. The datalogger turns on automatically when you start up or reboot the analyzer. There are a maximum of ten log files available. Each time the datalogger is turned on, data is written into a new file. Entry into that file is terminated when you turn off the datalogger. When log file ten is closed, log file one will be written to (erasing the data currently in that file) the next time you turn on the datalogger. Depending on the nature of the condition you are investigating, you can search datalogger files by chemistry, incubator position, environmental data, and error codes. This will aid you in determining the possible cause of a system-related or intermittent condition. NOTE: It is not possible to do a datalogger analysis on a file that is currently open. You must close the file first.

3–114

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

Version 2.0

Diagnostics Closing the Current Datalogger File

Closing the Current Datalogger File

To close the datalogger file that is currently open: 1. Touch OPTIONS on the Main Menu. 2. Enter the operator access code, and press the Enter key on the keyboard.

LAB COMP : TESTING COMPLETE

READY

OPTIONS Disk Srvcs

Jul 15 92

SAMPLING

14:13:12 ON

OFF

VX.XX**250 OP00B System Services

Test Data

Cal Data

TEST/ FLUID CONFIG

CAL PARAMS

LOAD CAL DISKETTE

REPORT CONTROL

SUBSYSTEM CONTROL

COEF & LIMITS

CALIBRATOR LOT # SELECTION

BACKUP/ RESTORE DISKETTE

WORKLOAD & USAGE REPORTS

ANALYZER CONFIG

ADDITIONAL TESTS CONFIG

CALIBRATOR SAVs

DISK FILE SERVICES

SPECIAL SERVICES

DILUENT DATA > Touch a target to select an option. PRINT CONFIG REPORT

RETURN

HELP

3. Touch SPECIAL SERVICES in the System Services column.

SAMPLING LAB COMP : TESTING COMPLETE

READY

OPTIONS – Special Services

Oct 21 92 14:13:12

ON

OFF

VX.XX**250 OP00F

Categories DATE AND TIME DATA LOGGER

U.S. PATENT INFO

> Touch a target to select a category.

RETURN

HELP

4. Touch DATA LOGGER.

Version 2.0

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

3–115

Diagnostics Closing the Current Datalogger File

LAB COMP : TESTING COMPLETE

READY

SAMPLING

14:13:12 ON

OFF

OPTIONS – Data Logging Control DATA LOGGING ON OFF

Oct 21 92 VX.XX**250 OP10A

Function Environment Log Time Interval: 30 min

CHANGE ENVIRONMENT INTERVAL

Newest Data Log File Name: LOG02

ENCRYPT SAMPLE ID ON OFF

Oldest Data Log File Name: LOG03

EXCL CONF ENTRIES ON OFF

> Touch a target to change data logging control or to select a function. DECIPHER

RETURN

HELP

SAMPLE IDs

5. Touch DATALOGGING ON/OFF to OFF.

LAB COMP : TESTING COMPLETE

READY

SAMPLING

14:13:12 ON

OPTIONS – Data Logging Control DATA LOGGING ON OFF

Oct 21 92

OFF

VX.XX**250 OP10B

Function CHANGE ENVIRONMENT INTERVAL TRANSFER LOGGED DATA TO DISKETTE DELETE ALL LOGGED INITIAL

Environment Log Time Interval: 30 min Newest Data Log File Name: LOG02 Oldest Data Log File Name: LOG03

> Touch a target to change data logging control or to select a function. RETURN

HELP

6. Touch DATALOGGING ON/OFF to ON. NOTE: Turning the datalogger file off and then on closes the existing file to make it available for analysis. A new file is opened. 7. Touch RETURN until you reach the Main Menu.

3–116

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

Version 2.0

Diagnostics Accessing and Searching Datalogger Files

Accessing and Searching Datalogger Files

To access and search datalogger files: 1. Touch DIAGNOSTICS on the Main Menu. 2. Touch HARDWARE AND CHEM INFO. 3. Touch DATALOGGER ANALYSIS.

LAB COMP : TESTING COMPLETE

READY

SAMPLING

14:13:12 ON

OFF

W2.0B

DATALOG UTILITY – Main Menu SELECT DATALOG FILE

Oct 21 92 VX.XX**250 SDDU1

SELECT SEARCH CRITERIA

> Touch a TARGET. RETURN

HELP

4. Touch SELECT DATALOG FILE.

LAB COMP : TESTING COMPLETE

READY SCREEN 1 Filename -------LOG01 LOG02 LOG03 LOG04 LOG05 LOG06 LOG07 LOG08 LOG09 LOG10 LOG11 LOG12

Length -----154563 101792 63974 466388 210526 244676 67070 83237 205597 118268 0 0

Create -----10/01/92 13:59:30 10/01/92 13:59:31 10/01/92 13:59:31 10/01/92 13:59:32 10/01/92 13:59:32 10/01/92 13:59:33 10/01/92 13:59:33 10/01/92 13:59:34 10/01/92 13:59:34 10/01/92 13:59:34 10/01/92 13:59:35 10/01/92 13:59:35

Oct 21 92 14:13:12

ON

OFF

DATALOG UTILITY – File Directory

> Touch a TARGET. RETURN

SAMPLING

VX.XX**250 SDDU3

Access Modify ----------10/16/92 14:11:31 10/16/92 14:11:31 10/21/92 10:27:02 10/21/92 10:27:02 10/21/92 10:28:17 10/21/92 10:28:17 10/05/92 09:41:46 10/05/92 09:41:46 10/07/92 13:51:52 10/07/92 13:51:52 10/13/92 10:02:00 10/13/92 10:02:00 10/13/92 10:28:20 10/13/92 10:28:20 10/14/92 14:08:52 10/14/92 14:08:52 10/16/92 10:55:06 10/16/92 10:55:06 10/16/92 12:35:45 10/16/92 12:35:45 10/01/92 13:59:35 10/01/92 13:59:35 10/01/92 13:59:35 10/01/92 13:59:35 Datalog file to sort: Not defined

SELECT FILE FOR SORT

DISPLAY NEXT SCREEN

HELP

5. Touch SELECT FILE FOR SORT.

Version 2.0

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

3–117

Diagnostics Accessing and Searching Datalogger Files

6. Type the filename that contains the records of interest (for example, log01), and press the Enter key on the keyboard. 7. Touch RETURN.

LAB COMP : TESTING COMPLETE

READY

DATALOG UTILITY – Main Menu SELECT DATALOG FILE

SAMPLING

Oct 21 92 14:13:12

ON

OFF

W2.0B

VX.XX**250 SDDU1

SELECT SEARCH CRITERIA

> Touch a TARGET. RETURN

HELP

8. Touch SELECT SEARCH CRITERIA.

LAB COMP : TESTING COMPLETE

READY

SAMPLING

Oct 21 92 14:13:12

ON

DATALOG UTILITY – Select Criteria

CHEMISTRY

ENVIRONMENTAL DATA

INCUBATOR POSITION

ERROR CODES

OFF

VX.XX**250 SDDU4

> Touch a TARGET. RETURN

HELP

You are able to sort the records by the four search criteria shown on the screen.

3–118

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

Version 2.0

Diagnostics Accessing and Searching Datalogger Files

Search Criteria—Chemistry To sort the datalogger file by chemistry: 1. Touch CHEMISTRY on the Datalog Utility Select Criteria screen.

SAMPLING

LAB COMP : TESTING COMPLETE

READY SCREEN 1

Aug 09 04 14:13:12

ON

OFF

DATALOG UTILITY – Chemistry Selection

VX.XX**250 SDDU2

NA+

GLU

TP

Bu

AST

ALKP

TRIG

Mg

PROT

K+

BUN

ALB

Bc

ALT

GGT

CHOL

AMON

LAC

Cl –

CREA

Ca

TBIL

LDH

AMYL

dHDL

THEO

DGXN

ECO2

URIC

PHOS

CKMB

CK

LIPA

Fe

TIBC

ALC

1

2

SET PANEL Datalog file to sort: LOG01

> Touch a TARGET. RETURN

DELETE PANEL

DISPLAY DATA

DISPLAY NEXT SCREEN

HELP

2. Select the chemistries: — To select a single chemistry, touch the desired target. — To select multiple chemistries, touch the desired targets. — To set a panel of chemistries, touch SET PANEL. – Enter the number of the panel (1 to 7), and press the Enter key on the keyboard. – Type the name of the panel, and press the Enter key on the keyboard. – Touch all test targets to be included in the panel. – Touch SET PANEL again to save the panel. – To select additional tests and panels, touch DISPLAY NEXT SCREEN. During future datalogger analysis activities, it will only be necessary to select the desired active panel by touching the panel name. Chemistries selected previously for the panel will be highlighted. 3. Touch DISPLAY DATA.

Version 2.0

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

3–119

Diagnostics Accessing and Searching Datalogger Files

SAMPLING LAB COMP : TESTING COMPLETE

READY Screen #: 1 DATE ----10/16/92 10/16/92 10/16/92 10/16/92 10/16/92 10/16/92 10/16/92 10/16/92 10/16/92 10/16/92 10/16/92 10/16/92 10/16/92 10/16/92

DATALOG UTILITY – Data Display

TIME ---13:08:47 13:09:00 13:09:15 13:09:29 13:09:43 13:09:58 13:10:19 13:10:33 13:10:55 13:11:10 13:11:24 13:11:45 13:12:00 13:12:14

CHEM POS -------CREA 1 CREA 1 TP 1 TP 1 ALB 1 ABL 1 LIPA 1 LIPA 1 LDH 1 LDH 1 ALT 1 ALT 1 AST 1 AST 1

DROP NUM SS POS ------------------1 45 2 45 3 5 4 5 5 2 6 2 7 8 8 8 1 47 2 47 3 52 4 52 5 36 6 36

Oct 21 92 14:13:12

ON

OFF

W2.0B

CART POS ----------48 47 50 49 50 50 49 48 49 48 48 47 48 47

VX.XX**250 SDDU5

INC POS RESULT ---------------7 ****** 9 ****** 11 ****** 13 ****** 15 ****** 17 ****** 20 ****** 22 ****** 1 ****** 3 ****** 5 ****** 8 ****** 10 ****** 12 ******

> Touch a TARGET. RETURN

PRINT DATA

DISPLAY PREVIOUS SCREEN

DISPLAY NEXT SCREEN

HELP

4. Touch PRINT DATA to print the data display. 5. Touch RETURN to return to the Datalog Utility Select Criteria screen.

3–120

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

Version 2.0

Diagnostics Accessing and Searching Datalogger Files

Search Criteria—Incubator Position To sort the datalogger file by incubator position: 1. Touch INCUBATOR POSITION on the Datalog Utility Select Criteria screen. 2. Enter the incubator nest position number (1 to 23) where you suspect an unusual condition, and press the Enter key on the keyboard.

SAMPLING LAB COMP : TESTING COMPLETE

READY Screen #: 1

DATALOG UTILITY – Data Display

DATE TIME -------10/16/92 13:16:25 10/16/92 13:25:01 10/16/92 13:33:35

CHEM POS -------CREA 5 CKMB 2 AMON 7

DROP NUM SS POS ------------------1 45 1 49 2 44

Oct 21 92 14:13:12

ON

OFF

W2.0B

CART POS ----------44 46 47

VX.XX**250 SDDU5

INC POS RESULT ---------------23 ****** 23 ****** 23 ******

> Touch a TARGET. RETURN

PRINT DATA

HELP

3. Touch PRINT DATA to print the data display. 4. Touch RETURN to return to the Datalog Utility Select Criteria screen.

Version 2.0

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

3–121

Diagnostics Accessing and Searching Datalogger Files

Search Criteria—Environmental Data To sort the datalogger file by environmental data: 1. Touch ENVIRONMENTAL DATA on the Datalog Utility Select Criteria screen.

LAB COMP : TESTING COMPLETE

READY

DATALOG UTILITY – Environmental Data TEMPERATURE/ HUMIDITY

SAMPLING

Oct 21 92 14:13:12

ON

OFF

W2.0B

VX.XX**250 SDDU6

POWER SUPPLY VOLTAGES

> Touch a TARGET. RETURN

HELP

2. To view temperature and humidity data, touch TEMPERATURE/ HUMIDITY.

SAMPLING LAB COMP : TESTING COMPLETE

READY Screen #: 1

DATALOG UTILITY – Data Display

TEMP 1 -------Incubator 37.03 Slide Supply 1 22.19 Slide Supply 2 Ambient 24.78 Incubator Slide Supply 1 Slide Supply 2 Ambient

37.06 22.03

Incubator Slide Supply 1 Slide Supply 2 Ambient

37.05 21.80

TEMP 2 -------36.94 21.95

RELATIVE HUMIDITY ------------------------

OFF

W2.0B

VX.XX**250 SDDU5 TIME ------13:11:29 13:11:29 13:11:29 13:11:29

42.59 29.00

10/16/92 10/16/92 10/16/92 10/16/92

13:41:24 13:41:24 13:41:24 13:41:24

42.59 29.00

10/16/92 10/16/92 10/16/92 10/16/92

14:11:19 14:11:19 14:11:19 14:11:19

42.83 29.00

24.78 36.94 21.93

14:13:12 ON

DATE -------10/16/92 10/16/92 10/16/92 10/16/92

36.98 22.27

Oct 21 92

24.78

> Touch a TARGET. RETURN

PRINT DATA

HELP

3. Touch PRINT DATA to print the data display.

3–122

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

Version 2.0

Diagnostics Accessing and Searching Datalogger Files

4. Touch RETURN to return to the Datalog Utility Environmental Data screen. 5. To view power supply voltage data, touch POWER SUPPLY VOLTAGES.

SAMPLING LAB COMP : TESTING COMPLETE

READY Screen #: 1

DATALOG UTILITY – Data Display

POWER SUPPLIES

5V ---

12V ----

–12V -----

15V ----

–15V -----

Oct 21 92 14:13:12

ON

OFF

VX.XX**250

W2.0B 24VM ------

SDDU5

24VFV -------

Slide Supply/Cart. Load Incubator/Radial Wash Ref. Mtrng/Slide Transport Sample Handler Sample Metering Electrometer Reflectometer Slide Supply/Cart. Load Incubator/Radial Wash Ref. Mtrng/Slide Transport Sample Handler Sample Metering Electrometer Reflectometer > Touch a TARGET. RETURN

PRINT DATA

DISPLAY PREVIOUS SCREEN

DISPLAY NEXT SCREEN

HELP

6. Touch PRINT DATA to print the data display for power supply voltages. 7. Touch RETURN to return to the Datalog Utility Select Criteria screen.

Version 2.0

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

3–123

Diagnostics Accessing and Searching Datalogger Files

Search Criteria—Error Codes To sort the datalogger file by error codes: 1. Touch ERROR CODES on the Datalog Utility Select Criteria screen.

SAMPLING LAB COMP : TESTING COMPLETE

READY Screen #: 1

DATE TIME MOD NUM ---------------------10/16/92 12:44:32 51 10/16/92 12:54:21 63 10/16/92 12:54:55 74 10/16/92 12:54:55 74 10/16/92 12:54:55 74 10/16/92 13:04:03 8 10/16/92 13:07:02 131 10/16/92 13:12:43 44 10/16/92 13:17:45 63 10/16/92 13:17:53 131 10/16/92 13:18:15 131 10/16/92 13:20:15 82 10/16/92 13:20:28 82 10/16/92 13:23:27 44

ERROR NUM ERR TYPE -----------------------52 OPER. 5 OPER. 2 OPER. 2 OPER. 2 OPER. 49 OPER. 43 OPER. 20 OPER. 5 OPER. 43 OPER. 43 OPER. 5 OPER. 5 OPER. 20 OPER.

14:13:12 ON

OFF

W2.0B

DATALOG UTILITY – Data Display

Oct 21 92

SEVERITY ---------MALFUN TRANST ACTION ACTION ACTION ATTENT MALFUN ATTENT TRANST MALFUN MALFUN ACTION ACTION ATTENT

VX.XX**250 SDDU5

COND CODE -------------829 4J1 578 578 578 2D2 * EA * 54 * 4J1 EA * EA * 6M * 6M3 * 54 *

> Touch a TARGET. RETURN

PRINT DATA

DISPLAY PREVIOUS SCREEN

DISPLAY NEXT SCREEN

HELP

2. Touch PRINT DATA to print the error codes data display. Interpreting Data You will need assistance to interpret the data. Call your Customer Support Representative and have screen printouts available.

3–124

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

Version 2.0

Diagnostics Software Identification

Software Identification

Use this diagnostics feature only when instructed to do so by your Customer Support Representative. To access software identification: 1. Touch SOFTWARE IDENTIFICATION on the Hardware and Chemistry Information screen.

SAMPLING

LAB COMP : TESTING COMPLETE

READY

Oct 21 92 14:13:12

ON

SOFTWARE IDENTIFICATION

OFF

W2.0B

VX.XX**250 SDSW1

SCHEDULER SOFTWARE ID

FILE VERIFY

> Touch a target. Note: File Verify requires 5 minutes. RETURN

HELP

2. Touch FILE VERIFY to verify checksums. NOTE: File Verify takes approximately five minutes. SAMPLING LAB COMP : TESTING COMPLETE

READY

14:13:12 ON

FILE VERIFICATION

SCREEN 1 FILENAME CHECKSUM --------------------------:F0:adbbld..286 54940 :F0:adml_flow 33854 :F0:adml_sub 61998 :F0:adml_text 35709 :F0:bdbbld.286 1823 :F0:both 35553 :F0:cdbbld.286 17298 :F0:comm 34497 :F0:comm.bin 4038 :F0:config.m 466 :F0:control.m 61760 :F0:cpdbld.286 48339 :F0:cscpgm 48861 :F0:cscram.m 28996

OFF

W2.0B

CALCULATED CHECKSUM --------------------------------54940 33854 61998 35709 1823 35553 17298 34497 34497 466 61760 48339 48861 28996

Oct 21 92 VX.XX**250 SDSW2

FILE STATUS ---------------GOOD GOOD GOOD GOOD GOOD GOOD GOOD GOOD GOOD GOOD GOOD GOOD GOOD GOOD

> Touch a TARGET. RETURN

PRINT DATA

DISPLAY PREVIOUS SCREEN

DISPLAY NEXT SCREEN

HELP

3. Touch PRINT DATA to send the information to the printer.

Version 2.0

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

3–125

Diagnostics Software Identification

4. Touch RETURN to return to the Software Identification screen. 5. Touch SCHEDULER SOFTWARE ID to verify EEPROM and ROM versions and applicable processors.

SAMPLING LAB COMP : TESTING COMPLETE

READY

14:13:12 ON

SCHEDULER SOFTWARE IDENTIFICATION

SCREEN 1

PROCESSOR ----------------Not Used MASTER SCHEDULER–COMM SCHEDULER–MAIN 6811–01 6811–02 6811–03 6811–04 6811–05 6811–06 6811–07 6811–08 6811–09 6811–10

Oct 21 92

FILENAME EEPROM VERSION ----------------------------------:F0:UNUSED V1.1A :F0:MASTER V1.1C :F0:COMM.BIN V1.1A :F0:MAIN.BIN V1.1A :F0:CT_MIC.BIN V5.0B :F0:SSE_MIC.BIN V3.0F :F0:INC_MIC.BIN V4.3A :F0:IR_MIC.BIN V1.4C :F0:ST_MIC.BIN V4.1C :F0:RM_MIC.BIN V4.1B :F0:TRAY_MIC.BIN V1.0H :F0:TIP_MIC.BIN V1.0H :F0:SM_MIC.BIN V4.1Q :F0:REF_MIC.BIN V3.2B

OFF

W2.0B

VX.XX**250 SDSW3

ROM VERSION -----------------V1.0A V1.00 V3.5D V3.5D V4.0A V4.0A V4.0A V4.0A V4.0A V4.0A V4.0A V4.0A V4.0A V1.8A

> Touch a TARGET. RETURN

PRINT DATA

DISPLAY PREVIOUS SCREEN

DISPLAY NEXT SCREEN

HELP

6. Touch PRINT DATA to send the information to the printer. 7. Touch RETURN to exit.

3–126

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

Version 2.0

4 Environmental Monitoring Environmental Monitoring

You can use this diagnostic feature to review the status of the environmentally controlled stations and the power supplies. After you touch the ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING target on the Main Menu, the following screen is displayed. Apr 24 XX

SAMPLING

REMOTE ENABLED READY

LAB COMP : TESTING COMPLETE

14:13:12 ON

OFF

VX.XX**250 ME15A

ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING Temperature 1 Incubator 35.86* Slide Supply 1 25.51* Slide Supply 2 22.19 Reflectometer 69.00 Ambient 22.85 POWER SUPPLY 5V Slide Supply/Cart.Load 5.15 Incubator/Immuno-Rate 5.15 Ref. Mtrng/Slide Transport 5.15 Sample Handler 0.00* Sample Metering 5.00 Electrometer 4.96 Reflectometer 5.03

Temperature 2 36.37*

Relative Humidity 33.40 29.00*

12V 11.77 11.68 11.77

–12V –12.20 –12.10 –12.05

15V 14.30 13.20* 13.20*

–15V –16.62* –14.91 –14.86

24VM 23.86 24.05 23.86 0.00* 23.86

14.97

24VF 23.50 23.86 23.50 0.00* 23.86 23.83

> Station and voltage readings are updated on a ten-second interval. NOTE: Flashing * indicates station or voltage readings not within spec. RETURN

HELP

NOTES: When you first turn on the analyzer, it takes time for environmental monitoring to reach the required limits. You may see flashing asterisks next to the temperature and humidity readings. The readings may display as zeros. When the required limits are reached, the asterisks will disappear and the correct temperature and humidity readings will display. Power monitoring, a diagnostics tool for Field Engineers, may be turned on or off by the Field Engineer in the Options subsystem. The reflectometer temperature will be zero unless power monitoring is turned on.

Version 2.0

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

4–1

Environmental Monitoring Environmental Error Conditions

Environmental Error Conditions

Environmental error conditions are brought to your attention through error messages posted on the status console of the monitor. The error messages will define what portion of the analyzer is experiencing the error and give more detail on what the error is. This section contains some suggestions that may solve the environmental errors.

Incubator Temperature Control

1. Lift the top right analyzer cover.

2. Make sure that the incubator cover is seated properly.

Incubator Cover

3. Open the right front door of the analyzer.

4–2

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

Version 2.0

Environmental Monitoring Incubator Temperature Control

4. Make sure that the air filter is clean and allows adequate airflow.

Air Filter

5. Check the vents of the analyzer to see if they are obstructed. Vents are located at the lower portion of the two front door panels and at the back right panel.

Vents

6. Close the top cover and the right front door of the analyzer.

Version 2.0

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

4–3

Environmental Monitoring Incubator Temperature Control

7. Touch RETURN until the Main Menu is displayed.

LAB COMP : TESTING COMPLETE

READY

Apr 24 XX

SAMPLING

14:13:12 ON

OFF

VX.XX**250 SCO3A

MAIN MENU SAMPLE PROGRAMMING

CARTRIDGE HANDLING

CALIBRATION PROGRAMMING

REVIEW RESULTS

ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING

PERIODIC MAINTENANCE

DIAGNOSTICS

OPTIONS

QUALITY CONTROL

> Touch a target to select a function. EXIT TO BOOT MENU

SHUTDOWN ANALYZER

HELP

8. Touch ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING. Apr 24 XX

SAMPLING

REMOTE ENABLED READY

LAB COMP : TESTING COMPLETE

14:13:12 ON

OFF

VX.XX**250 ME15A

ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING Temperature 1 Incubator 35.86* Slide Supply 1 25.51* Slide Supply 2 22.19 Reflectometer 69.00 Ambient 22.85 POWER SUPPLY 5V Slide Supply/Cart.Load 5.15 Incubator/Immuno-Rate 5.15 Ref. Mtrng/Slide Transport 5.15 Sample Handler 0.00* Sample Metering 5.00 Electrometer 4.96 Reflectometer 5.03

Temperature 2 36.37*

Relative Humidity 33.40 29.00*

12V 11.77 11.68 11.77

–12V –12.20 –12.10 –12.05

15V 14.30 13.20* 13.20*

14.97

–15V –16.62* –14.91 –14.86

24VM 23.86 24.05 23.86 0.00* 23.86

24VF 23.50 23.86 23.50 0.00* 23.86 23.83

> Station and voltage readings are updated on a ten-second interval. NOTE: Flashing * indicates station or voltage readings not within spec. RETURN

HELP

9. Look at the incubator temperature to see if a flashing asterisk is displayed next to it.

4–4

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

Version 2.0

Environmental Monitoring Incubator Temperature Control

NOTE: If you performed any of the corrective action steps suggested (for example, if you replaced the air filter), it may take up to five minutes for the incubator temperature control to reach the required limits. If the asterisk (*) is still flashing after five minutes, ask your key operator for assistance or call your Customer Support Representative. If no asterisk is displayed next to the incubator temperature: — Touch the status console to access the error log screen showing the INITIALIZE target.

SAMPLING

LAB COMP: TESTING COMPLETE

READY

Apr 24 XX 14:13:12

ON

OFF

RELEV ERR 8/17/93 11:00:30 Code: 3S7 MALFUNCTION 38 142 SCHEDULER * ENVIRONMENT TASK * interlock open 38 141 8/17/93 11:00:18 Code: 3S6 MALFUNCTION SCHEDULER * ENVIRONMENT TASK * main cover interlock open

VX.XX**250 ER01A

SHUTDOWN MALFUNCTION ACTION ATTENTION TRANSIENT

> TouchUP or DOWN to move highlight bar. RETURN

UP

DOWN

INITIALIZE

HELP

— Touch INITIALIZE. — Touch RETURN until you reach the Main Menu. — Continue normal analyzer operation.

Version 2.0

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

4–5

Environmental Monitoring Slide Supply Temperature Control

Slide Supply Temperature Control

1. Lift the top right cover of the analyzer.

2. Open the right front door of the analyzer. 3. Make sure that: — The cartridge load doors are closed. — The cartridge trap door is closed. — The cartridge unload doors are closed. Remove the cartridge disposal box to gain easy access to the cartridge discard chute. Reach up into the cartridge discard chute and locate both cartridge unload doors. Feel to make sure both doors are closed.

Cartridge Disposal Box

Cartridge Trap Door

4–6

Cartridge Discard Chute

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

Version 2.0

Environmental Monitoring Slide Supply Temperature Control

— The carriers for the humidity control packs and desiccant packs are in the correct locations and are latched into place against the bottom of the slide supplies.

Salt Pad and Desiccant Pack Carriers

4. Close the right top cover and the right front door of the analyzer. 5. Touch RETURN until the Main Menu is displayed.

LAB COMP : TESTING COMPLETE

READY

SAMPLING

14:13:12 ON

OFF

MAIN MENU SAMPLE PROGRAMMING

Apr 24 XX

CARTRIDGE HANDLING

CALIBRATION PROGRAMMING

REVIEW RESULTS

ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING

PERIODIC MAINTENANCE

DIAGNOSTICS

VX.XX**250 SCO3A OPTIONS

QUALITY CONTROL

> Touch a target to select a function. EXIT TO BOOT MENU

Version 2.0

SHUTDOWN ANALYZER

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

HELP

4–7

Environmental Monitoring Slide Supply Temperature Control

6. Touch ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING. Apr 24 XX

SAMPLING

REMOTE ENABLED READY

LAB COMP : TESTING COMPLETE

14:13:12 ON

OFF

VX.XX**250 ME15A

ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING Temperature 1 Incubator 35.86* Slide Supply 1 25.51* Slide Supply 2 22.19 Reflectometer 69.00 Ambient 22.85 POWER SUPPLY 5V Slide Supply/Cart.Load 5.15 Incubator/Immuno-Rate 5.15 Ref. Mtrng/Slide Transport 5.15 Sample Handler 0.00* Sample Metering 5.00 Electrometer 4.96 Reflectometer 5.03

Temperature 2 36.37*

Relative Humidity 33.40 29.00*

12V 11.77 11.68 11.77

–12V –12.20 –12.10 –12.05

15V 14.30 13.20* 13.20*

14.97

–15V –16.62* –14.91 –14.86

24VM 23.86 24.05 23.86 0.00* 23.86

24VF 23.50 23.86 23.50 0.00* 23.86 23.83

> Station and voltage readings are updated on a ten-second interval. NOTE: Flashing * indicates station or voltage readings not within spec. RETURN

HELP

7. Look at the slide supply temperature to see if a flashing asterisk is displayed next to it. NOTE: If you performed any of the corrective action steps required (for example, if you relatched the carrier for the humidity control packs), it may take up to five minutes for the slide supply temperature control to reach the required limits. If the asterisk (*) is still flashing after five minutes, ask your key operator for assistance or call your your Customer Support Representative.

4–8

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

Version 2.0

Environmental Monitoring Slide Supply Temperature Control

If no asterisk is displayed next to the incubator temperature: — Touch the status console to access the error log screen showing the INITIALIZE target.

SAMPLING

LAB COMP: TESTING COMPLETE

READY

Apr 24 XX 14:13:12

ON

OFF

RELEV ERR 8/17/93 11:00:30 Code: 3S7 MALFUNCTION 38 142 SCHEDULER * ENVIRONMENT TASK * interlock open 38 141 8/17/93 11:00:18 Code: 3S6 MALFUNCTION SCHEDULER * ENVIRONMENT TASK * main cover interlock open

VX.XX**250 ER01A

SHUTDOWN MALFUNCTION ACTION ATTENTION TRANSIENT

> TouchUP or DOWN to move highlight bar. RETURN

UP

DOWN

INITIALIZE

HELP

— Touch INITIALIZE. — Touch RETURN until you reach the Main Menu. — Continue normal analyzer operation.

Version 2.0

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

4–9

Environmental Monitoring Slide Supply Humidity Control

Slide Supply Humidity Control

1. Lift the top right cover of the analyzer.

2. Open the right front door of the analyzer. 3. Make sure that: — The cartridge load doors are closed. — The cartridge trap door is closed. — The cartridge unload doors are closed. Remove the cartridge disposal box to gain easy access to the cartridge discard chute. Reach up into the cartridge discard chute and locate both cartridge unload doors. Feel to make sure both doors are closed.

Cartridge Disposal Box

Cartridge Trap Door

4–10

Cartridge Discard Chute

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

Version 2.0

Environmental Monitoring Slide Supply Humidity Control

— The carriers for the humidity control packs and desiccant packs are in the correct locations and are latched into place against the bottom of the slide supplies.

Salt Pad and Desiccant Pack Carriers

4. Touch RETURN until the Main Menu is displayed.

LAB COMP : TESTING COMPLETE

READY

SAMPLING

14:13:12 ON

OFF

MAIN MENU SAMPLE PROGRAMMING

Apr 24 XX

CARTRIDGE HANDLING

CALIBRATION PROGRAMMING

REVIEW RESULTS

ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING

PERIODIC MAINTENANCE

DIAGNOSTICS

VX.XX**250 SCO3A OPTIONS

QUALITY CONTROL

> Touch a target to select a function. EXIT TO BOOT MENU

SHUTDOWN ANALYZER

HELP

5. Touch ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING.

Version 2.0

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

4–11

Environmental Monitoring Slide Supply Humidity Control

Apr 24 XX

SAMPLING

REMOTE ENABLED READY

LAB COMP : TESTING COMPLETE

14:13:12 ON

OFF

VX.XX**250 ME15A

ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING Temperature 1 Incubator 35.86* Slide Supply 1 25.51* Slide Supply 2 22.19 Reflectometer 69.00 Ambient 22.85 POWER SUPPLY 5V Slide Supply/Cart.Load 5.15 Incubator/Immuno-Rate 5.15 Ref. Mtrng/Slide Transport 5.15 Sample Handler 0.00* Sample Metering 5.00 Electrometer 4.96 Reflectometer 5.03

Temperature 2 36.37*

Relative Humidity 33.40 29.00*

12V 11.77 11.68 11.77

–12V –12.20 –12.10 –12.05

15V 14.30 13.20* 13.20*

–15V –16.62* –14.91 –14.86

24VM 23.86 24.05 23.86 0.00* 23.86

24VF 23.50 23.86 23.50 0.00* 23.86 23.83

14.97

> Station and voltage readings are updated on a ten-second interval. NOTE: Flashing * indicates station or voltage readings not within spec. RETURN

HELP

6. Look at the slide supply relative humidity to see if a flashing asterisk is displayed next to it. NOTE: If you performed any of the corrective action steps required (for example, if you relatched the carrier for the humidity control packs), it may take up to five minutes for the slide supply temperature control to reach the required limits. If no asterisk is displayed next to either slide supply relative humidity: — Close the top right cover and the right front door of the analyzer. — Touch the status console to access the error log screen showing the INITIALIZE target.

4–12

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

Version 2.0

Environmental Monitoring Slide Supply Humidity Control

— Touch INITIALIZE. — Touch RETURN until you reach the Main Menu. — Continue normal analyzer operation. If the asterisk (*) is still flashing after five minutes, make sure testing is complete and sampling is off. — Remove the carrier for the affected slide supply by pulling down the handle and pulling the carrier straight out of the analyzer.

Pull down, then out

Version 2.0

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

4–13

Environmental Monitoring Slide Supply Humidity Control

— Discard the old packs. — Load the new packs for the affected slide supply. Humidity control packs are required for Slide Supply 1 (left side). Desiccant packs are required for Slide Supply 2 (right side). NOTE: Humidity control packs have no expiration date. They should be slightly moist. Do not use them if they are extremely wet or completely dry. There is a blue indicator in each desiccant pack wrapper that ensures the desiccant packs are good; the blue indicator turns pink if the desiccant packs are expired. — Return the carrier to the slide supply in the analyzer. Push the carrier straight into the analyzer. Push up on the handle to latch it against the bottom of the slide supply.

Push in, then up

Slide Supply 1 – Magnesium-Chloride Salt Pads Slide Supply 2 – Desiccant packs

IMPORTANT: Do not interchange the carriers when you reinsert them. — Close the top right cover and the right front door of the analyzer.

4–14

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

Version 2.0

Environmental Monitoring Voltage Readings

— Touch the status console to access the error log screen showing the INITIALIZE target. — Touch INITIALIZE. — Touch RETURN until you reach the Main Menu. — Continue normal analyzer operation. 7. If the condition recurs, ask your key operator for assistance or call your Customer Support Representative. Voltage Readings

If a flashing asterisk (*) is displayed next to any of the voltage readings, the reading is not within specifications. Call your your Customer Support Representative for assistance. NOTE: Power monitoring is always off at reboot or power up. Turn on power monitoring in the Options subsystem.

Version 2.0

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

4–15

Environmental Monitoring Voltage Readings

4–16

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

Version 2.0

5 Troubleshooting Self-Diagnostic Features Error Conditions

The analyzer contains numerous sensors and other devices that monitor instrument performance. Also, each slide is monitored closely as it progresses through the various stations in the analyzer. When deviations from normal operation are discovered by any of the software modules with the control program, the condition is reported to the “error reporter” software module. The error reporter module sends an error indication to the status console on the monitor or to the printer when the power goes down. An error is defined as any deviation from acceptable performance.

Severity Levels

The definition of “error” includes unusual hardware conditions, momentary communication difficulties in the computer system, out-ofslide conditions, or a sample outside the analyzer’s spline range. A severity level is assigned to each error condition to convey the severity of the condition and to indicate the analyzer’s response to the error. Severity indicators are displayed on line one of the status console when an error occurs.

Error Information

01- SHUTDOWN

n Status

01-MALFUNCTION

SAMPLING Target

01-ACTION

REMOTE ENABLED

01-ATTENTION

TESTING COMPLETE

READY

Operating Status

SAMPLING

Jul 15 92

ON

14:13:12 VX.XX**250

LAB COMP : OFF

Date, Time, Software Version, Analyzer Name

Instrument State

The number preceding a severity indicator is the total number of errors that have occurred in that severity level since you last examined the error log. Two question marks (??) instead of a number indicate that the number exceeds 92. A description of the five severity levels follows, from the least severe to the most severe.

Version 2.0

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

5–1

Troubleshooting Severity Levels

Transient Transient severity level indicates error conditions that are temporary system conditions and do not normally affect analyzer operation. Transient errors are not reported on the status console because they do not require corrective action. They are, however, logged in a history file on the fixed disk and can be reviewed through the error log screen. Attention Attention severity level indicates error conditions that will eventually affect analyzer operation if left uncorrected. Examples of attention errors are low slide conditions and a printer that is off-line. Attention errors are reported on the status console; however, they are not logged in the history file on the fixed disk because they will progress to a higher severity level if not corrected. Action Action severity level indicates error conditions that prevent the execution of some but not all operator requests. As implied by its name, immediate operator intervention is suggested to correct the condition. Examples of action errors are out-of-slide conditions or an unsuccessful calibration. Action errors are reported on the status console with an audible alert consisting of a single, long, low tone. Malfunction A malfunction is an error condition that prevents the continued operation of one or more of the analyzer components (sample metering, incubator, tip transport, environmental monitoring). If possible, the processing of the slides currently in the incubator will be completed before the incubator is deactivated by the analyzer software. For example, if the reference arm fails to arrive at the tip-locator to meter a potentiometric slide, no more slides will be dispensed. Yet, those slides already in the incubator could be completed. However, if one of the incubator eject blades is stuck in the incubator disk so that the disk cannot turn, the incubator will be deactivated and no more slides will be processed. This method of selective deactivation minimizes the loss of valid test results while preventing damage to the analyzer components. Malfunction errors are reported on the status console accompanied by an audible alert consisting of a single, long, low tone.

5–2

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

Version 2.0

Troubleshooting Error Log Screen

Shutdown A shutdown is an error condition that is of sufficient severity to warrant reloading the control program or resetting the analyzer. Shutdown errors usually indicate an unusual condition in the control program in random access memory or an extreme condition on the fixed disk. IMPORTANT: The shutdown severity level is usually an instruction to the operator; the analyzer does not turn itself off. Only conditions in the analyzer’s electrical system or the line voltage can result in an automatic shutdown. However, the Shutdown indicator will be cleared from the status console only after you reset the analyzer. Shutdown errors are reported on the status console (except in rare instances of automatic shutdowns) and are accompanied by an audible alert consisting of a combination of high and low tones. Error Log Screen

When a severity level indicator is displayed on the status console, you can view the error by touching the status console. This will cause the error log for the displayed severity level to appear on the unit monitor. If more than one severity level is displayed, touching the status console will display the error log for the highest severity level. The error log screen shows a list of the last eight errors for a given severity level. The most recent error appears at the top of the list and will be backlit by the highlight bar. When a new error is added to the list, the eighth error is erased. Although this error is no longer displayed on the screen, it is still retrievable from the Error History Log contained on the fixed disk (except for Attention errors; they are not recorded on the fixed disk). If there are no errors displayed on the status console, touching the status console will cause the malfunction error log screen to appear on the monitor. Once on the malfunction log screen, you can access any of the other severity levels by touching the severity level target located at the right margin of the error log screen. This is useful when you need to access the error logs but no errors are displayed on the status console. When trying to resolve an analyzer condition, it may be necessary to move back and forth between the error screens and the operating software screens. Finally, when viewing an error log screen and a new error is displayed on the status console, DO NOT touch the status console to view the new error. This action will cause a message on line three of the status console and an audible alert, consisting of a single long tone. The message is displayed for only a few seconds and says “Touch RETURN to exit displayed errors.” Touching RETURN will exit you from the error log screen. You can now touch the status console to display the error log screen for this latest error. An alternative is to simply touch the severity level target that corresponds to the new error. This also displays the latest error on the monitor.

Version 2.0

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

5–3

Troubleshooting Error Log Screen

An error log screen is illustrated below, followed by explanations.

LAB COMP: TESTING COMPLETE

READY

SAMPLING

Apr 24 XX 14:13:12

ON

OFF

RELEV ERR 8/17/93 11:00:30 Code: 3S7 MALFUNCTION 38 142 SCHEDULER * ENVIRONMENT TASK * interlock open 38 141 8/17/93 11:00:18 Code: 3S6 MALFUNCTION SCHEDULER * ENVIRONMENT TASK * main cover interlock open

VX.XX**250 ER01A

SHUTDOWN MALFUNCTION ACTION ATTENTION TRANSIENT

> TouchUP or DOWN to move highlight bar. RETURN

UP

DOWN

INITIALIZE

HELP

Date/Time This is the date and time that the error was logged. This information is useful when more than one error has occurred. The error posted first is most often the cause of the condition. Following the help text for the first error code could save time in getting the analyzer back into operation. Date and time are also useful when matching an error code to a result printed on a lab report. You can obtain more information about the flagged result by locating the error code that most closely matches the date and time the lab report was printed. Following the help text for this error can help you get the correct reporting result. Condition Code Each error condition is assigned a three-character code. The first letter of the condition code indicates the subsystem that posted the error. For example, G31 indicates an incubator error because G = incubator. There is a label on the underside of the top right analyzer cover. This label depicts the letter designation for each subsystem and its location in the analyzer.

5–4

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

Version 2.0

Troubleshooting Error Log Screen

This error condition code is also linked to the troubleshooting Help screens. Each condition code calls up a unique Help screen. The troubleshooting Help screens used with the line drawing label will assist you in your troubleshooting efforts. (For more information on Help screens and the line drawing label, see “Troubleshooting Help Screens” in this chapter.) The error condition code is also helpful if you request assistance from your Customer Support Representative to correct an error condition. Severity Level The associated severity level is displayed following the condition code. Module/Error Number Each error condition is assigned a unique module/error number. This is often referred to as the module/error pair. These numbers may be required when requesting assistance from your Customer Support Representative to correct an error condition. Error Message The error message is composed of two or three parts separated by asterisks. The first part of the message identifies the module that is the source of the problem or the module that is reporting the problem. The second part of the message identifies the location within the module. (This error message component may be omitted from some messages if location cannot be identified or is not applicable.) The final error message component describes the problem. (Messages for prediction error conditions are preceded by the same two-letter code that is printed on the laboratory report. This code is provided so that you can correlate the error message with the printed report.) The laboratory may choose to have these error messages displayed on line one of the status console in place of the severity indicators. See “Configuring the Analyzer” in Chapter 10, “Options,” of the Operator’s Manual.

Version 2.0

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

5–5

Troubleshooting Error Log Screen

RETURN Target Touching the RETURN target returns the display to the screen that was on the monitor when you touched the status console. The severity level indicator is cleared from the status console when you enter the associated error log screen for all severity levels except shutdown. UP/DOWN Targets You can use these targets to move the highlight bar to the error message for which you desire more troubleshooting information. The highlight bar always rests on the first error in the list when the error log is first displayed. INITIALIZE Target When you touch the INITIALIZE target, the analyzer initializes only the systems that were deactivated due to a malfunction error condition. Initialization is necessary to bring the affected system back to operational status after you have performed the recommended corrective actions. If a sample is being metered when you touch the INITIALIZE target, all slides for the sample are spotted before beginning the initialization process. After it is touched, the target changes from bright inverse video to normal video until the initialization process is completed. This initialization process does not affect slides being processed by systems unaffected by the deactivation. The INITIALIZE target is not operational if any of the analyzer’s interlocked covers are open. If you attempt to initialize with any interlocks open, an Attention error will be generated. Close the covers of the analyzer before trying to initialize. NOTE: If you experience a malfunction error condition with the electrometer, touching the INITIALIZE target following corrective action will only initialize the mechanical operational status of the electrometer. The electrometer A/D converter recalibrates only when you exit Diagnostics and return to the normal operation, when you power down the analyzer and then power up, or when you perform a full program load/reset. Severity Level Targets These are the targets located at the right margin of the error log screen. All five of the error severity levels are represented by a target. You can touch any one of these targets to display the error log screen for that severity level. The backlit target identifies the currently displayed error log. NOTE: A transient error target is included here even though this severity level is not displayed on the status console.

5–6

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

Version 2.0

Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Help Screens

Troubleshooting Help Screens

When you touch the HELP target on the error log screen, the monitor displays a Help screen containing troubleshooting information for the condition code highlighted on the log screen. An example of a Troubleshooting Help screen is illustrated below; a description of the important features of the screen follows.

LAB COMP: TESTING COMPLETE

READY

SAMPLING .

Dec 01 92 14:13:12

ON

OFF

Condition Code Description

VX.XX**250 ER02A

EAL SAMPLE METERING * Aspirate error A bubble was detected while aspirating fluid Position: 3 Track: 2 Possible Causes: – There are air bubbles in the sample fluid. – There is fluid on the sample cup PIERCEABLE CAP. – There is a leak in the metering system. Things to do: – Pipette the air bubbles out of the sample container. – Install a new PIERCEABLE CAP. – Add more sample fluid to the container. – Process the SAMPLE METERING LEAK PERFORMANCE TEST. – Touch "INITIALIZE", and process the sample again.

RETURN

Version 2.0

NEXT SCREEN

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

5–7

Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Help Screens

Condition Code and Error Message The applicable condition code and error message are shown. The first letter of the condition code indicates the subsystem that posted the error. There is a label on the underside of the top right analyzer cover. This label depicts the letter designation for each subsystem and its location in the analyzer. For example, EAL indicates a Sample Metering error. Top View

E

F D1

K4 K1 K2

J

D2

K5

L1

T

L2

G

L3 Y

A2 A1

K3

A1 A2 D E F G J

5–8

Slide Supply-Outer Ring (High % Relative Humidity Supply) Slide Supply-Inner Ring (Low % Relative Humidity Supply) D1-Slide Transport D2-Tip Locator (part of slide transport) Sample Metering Reference Metering Incubator Immuno-Rate Metering

K

L T Y

K1-Tray Transport K2-Tray Transport Hook K3-Sample Supply K4-Container Centering Unit K5-PSID L1-Tip Supply L2-Mixing Cup Array Supply L3-Diluent Supply Bar Code Scanners for Cartridges Electrometer

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

Version 2.0

Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Help Screens

Front View

P

T

NN

R H R

L

Q

H Reflectometer L Line-Voltage Selector (MCB) N Monitor Keyboard/Touch screen (Control Unit) P Printer

R

Q Q

R Environmental Control (Slide Supply % Relative Humidity) T

Bar Code Scanners for Cartridges

Q Electronics (Computer Systems Checks)

If the same code continues to occur, record the condition code and the module/error numbers displayed on the error log screen. Then obtain assistance from your Customer Support Representative. Error Description If appropriate, an expanded description of the error condition is provided. Sample/Test Identification When appropriate, the tray, sample container, and test are identified to facilitate rerunning the sample affected by the error.

Version 2.0

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

5–9

Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Help Screens

Possible Causes When possible, one or more possible causes for the error condition are listed. Things To Do For most error conditions, one or more procedures are suggested for correcting the condition. When a number of items are listed, you should perform the first item, then check whether the condition has been corrected. If it has not been corrected, proceed to the next item on the list, and so forth, until you have performed all suggested procedures. The first item listed is generally the most frequent resolution for the error. NEXT/PREVIOUS SCREEN Targets These targets appear at the bottom of the error log screen when there is more troubleshooting text about the condition code than can be displayed on a single screen. Touching the NEXT SCREEN target will advance ahead one screen and display additional causes and solutions. This additional information is for trained service personnel. Touching the PREVIOUS SCREEN target will back up one screen. The NEXT SCREEN target does not appear on the screen on the last or only page of text. The PREVIOUS SCREEN target does not appear on the screen on the first or only page of text. RETURN Target Touching the RETURN target returns the display to the error log screen.

5–10

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

Version 2.0

Troubleshooting Error Messages for Downloaded Samples

Error Messages for Downloaded Samples

Flags and Codes on Forms Printer Reports

In Sample Programming, you can display the last 24 error messages generated for downloaded samples. Refer to Chapter 7, “Programming Samples” in the Operator’s Manual for additional information.

Flags and codes appear on the laboratory report to indicate problems with specific samples. Refer to the Operator’s Quick Guide or Operator’s Manual for a listing of these flags and codes.

Hardware Troubleshooting Initializing the Analyzer

When you touch the INITIALIZE target on the error log screen, the analyzer initializes only the systems that were deactivated due to an error condition. Initialization is necessary to bring the affected system back to operational status after the recommended corrective actions have been performed. If a sample is being metered when you touch the INITIALIZE target, all slides for the sample are spotted before initialization begins. Also, this initialization process does not affect slides being processed in systems unaffected by the deactivation. After you touch the target, the target changes from bright, inverse video to normal video until the initialization process is completed. To initialize all the mechanical parts, the analyzer must be in the ON mode. The INITIALIZE target is not operational if any of the analyzer’s interlocked covers are open. If you attempt to initialize with any interlocks open, an Attention error will be generated. Close the covers of the analyzer before trying to initialize. NOTE: If you experience an error condition with the electrometer, touching the INITIALIZE target following corrective action will only initialize the mechanical operational status of the electrometer. The electrometer A/D converter recalibrates only when you exit Diagnostics and return to the normal operation, when you power down the analyzer and then power up, or when you perform a full program load/reset.

Version 2.0

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

5–11

Troubleshooting Loading/Resetting (Rebooting) the Analyzer Program

Loading/Resetting (Rebooting) the Analyzer Program

To load or reset the analyzer program: 1. Shut down the analyzer by touching the SHUTDOWN ANALYZER target on the Main Menu. — If the touchscreen is not working, continue with Step 4 of this procedure. 2. Type “Y” and press the Enter key on the keyboard when prompted. 3. Wait until you see the message, “The analyzer has been shut down. Reset or power down is required.” 4. Turn off the analyzer’s main power switch (O or OFF). Leave the analyzer turned off for at least two minutes before turning the analyzer back on. 5. Turn on the analyzer’s main power switch (I or ON). Wait for the Main Menu to appear (approximately ten minutes). 6. Verify that the correct date and time are displayed in the upper right corner of the screen. To correct the date and time, see the “Special Services” section of Chapter 10, “Options,” in the Operator’s Manual, or see the Operator’s Quick Guide. NOTE: Make sure the date and time are correct to prevent discrepancies in storage and retrieval of calibration, slide disposal, and patient data. 7. The analyzer is now ready for normal operation.

Clearing Sample Tray Jams

To clear jams in the sample tray area: 1. Open the top left cover of the analyzer.

5–12

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

Version 2.0

Troubleshooting Clearing Sample Tray Jams

2. Move the tray transport arm manually to the left until the arm is aligned with tray track No. 1. Remove any tray that is on track No. 1.

Tray Transport Arm

Track No. 1

3. Grasp the sample tray that is jammed inside the analyzer with your right hand, and depress the tray retention clip with your left hand. Slide the sample tray off the transport arm and onto tray track No. 1.

Jammed Sample Tray

Tray Hook

Tray Retention Clip

Version 2.0

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

5–13

Troubleshooting Clearing Sample Tray Jams

4. Move the transport arm manually to the right approximately one inch to disengage the tray hook from the sample tray. 5. Close the top cover. 6. Touch the status console to gain access to the error log screen showing the INITIALIZE target. 7. Touch INITIALIZE to reset the modules. 8. If the condition recurs, ask your key operator for assistance.

5–14

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

Version 2.0

Troubleshooting Clearing Sample Metering Jams

Clearing Sample Metering Jams

To clear jams in the sample metering area: 1. Open both top covers.

2. Grasp the proboscis, and carefully push it up until it clears the obstruction. If you push the proboscis too high, the tip may eject. This could result in a serum spill if the tip is still full. Truck

Proboscis

3. You may also need to manually move the truck until the proboscis has cleared the obstruction. 4. Close the top covers. 5. Touch the status console to gain access to the error log screen showing the INITIALIZE target. 6. Touch INITIALIZE to reset the modules. 7. If the condition recurs, ask your key operator for assistance.

Version 2.0

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

5–15

Troubleshooting Clearing Slide Cartridge Jams at the Load Door

Clearing Slide Cartridge Jams at the Load Door

Check to see if the cartridge has partially entered the slide supply from the cartridge load station. If the cartridge has not yet entered the slide supply, do the following: 1. Verify that the cartridge was inserted into the correct slide supply (yellow top label in slide supply 1, white top label in slide supply 2).

Cartridge Load Station

2 Slide Supply 2 White Top Label

1 Slide Supply 1 Yellow Top Label

2. Verify that the side bar code label on the cartridge is facing the rear of the analyzer. 3. Check the bar code label for damage. If damaged, try using one of the manual cartridge loading procedures, or try a new cartridge. 4. If the label is not damaged, try reloading the cartridge. With a smooth, continuous motion, push the cartridge into the opening as far as it will go. A beep will sound indicating that the cartridge was accepted for loading into the slide supply. If the cartridge has entered the slide supply, there may be a cartridge jam at the load door. You must remove any jammed cartridge manually. To clear a slide cartridge jam at one of the load doors: 1. Allow all slide processing to complete if possible. 2. Touch RETURN until you reach the Main Menu. 3. Touch DIAGNOSTICS on the Main Menu.

5–16

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

Version 2.0

Troubleshooting Clearing Slide Cartridge Jams at the Load Door

SAMPLING

REMOTE ENABLED READY

LAB COMP : TESTING COMPLETE

14:13:12 ON

OFF

DIAGNOSTICS

VX.XX**250 MD00A

SETUP/ ADJUST

PERFORMANCE TESTS

SUBSYSTEM TESTS

STANDALONE DIAGNOSTIC TESTS

HARDWARE AND CHEM INFO

LAB COMP PROTOCOL ANALYZER

COMPLEX TESTS

MEDS

May 19 XX

> Touch a target to select a function.

RETURN

HELP

4. Touch MEDS.

SAMPLING REMOTE ENABLED

READY

LAB COMP : TESTING COMPLETE

14:13:12 ON

MEDS – Main Menu SAMPLE HANDLER

SAMPLE METERING

SLIDE SUPPLY 1

RM/IR METERING

SLIDE SUPPLY 2

INCUBATOR

Apr 24 XX

OFF

VX.XX**250 ME00A

REFLECTOMETER

> Touch a target to select a function. RETURN

Version 2.0

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

HELP

5–17

Troubleshooting Clearing Slide Cartridge Jams at the Load Door

5. Touch SLIDE SUPPLY 1.

LAB COMP: TESTING COMPLETE

READY

SAMPLING

14:13:12 ON

OFF

MEDS – Main Menu – Slide Supply 1 LOAD DOOR OPEN | CLOSE

RELEASE CARTRIDGE

UNLOAD DOOR OPEN | CLOSE

NEST N TO LOAD

CYCLE LOAD DOOR

NEST N TO DISPENSE

CYCLE UNLOAD DOOR

Feb 22 XX VX.XX**250 ME02A

CYCLE PLUNGER

DISPENSE BLADE INNER RING

DISPENSE BLADE CM INC DEPTH

CYCLE CW

CHECK SLIDE COUNT

HOME DISPENSE . BLADE

DISPENSE BLADE PM INC DEPTH

CYCLE CCW

DISPENSE SLIDE

DISPENSE BLADE PARK

CYCLE DISPENSE BLADE

PLUNGER

DISPENSE BLADE OUTER RING

DISPENSE BLADE METERING

NEST N TO VIEWPORT

UP | DOWN

> Touch a target to select a function. RETURN

RETURN TO MAIN DIAG MENU

RESET SLIDE SUPPLY

HELP

6. Touch LOAD DOOR OPEN | CLOSE to toggle it to Open.

5–18

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

Version 2.0

Troubleshooting Clearing Slide Cartridge Jams at the Load Door

7. Open the top right analyzer cover.

Load Door

8. If a cartridge is jammed in the load door and is protruding above the door, use the eraser end of a pencil and push the cartridge up and out of the slide supply. Gently pull out the cartridge. 9. When you have finished checking the slide supply 1 load door, touch LOAD DOOR OPEN | CLOSE to toggle it to close for supply 1. 10. Touch RETURN. 11. Touch SLIDE SUPPLY 2. 12. Touch LOAD DOOR OPEN | CLOSE to toggle it to OPEN for slide supply 2. 13. If a cartridge is jammed in the load door and is protruding above the door, use the eraser end of a pencil and push the cartridge up and out of the slide supply. Gently pull out the cartridge. 14. When you have finished checking the slide supply 2 load door, touch LOAD DOOR OPEN | CLOSE to toggle it to CLOSE for slide supply 2. 15. Close the top right cover of the analyzer. 16. Touch RETURN until you exit Diagnostics. The analyzer will initialize. 17. If the condition recurs or you could not extract the cartridge, ask your key operator for assistance.

Version 2.0

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

5–19

Troubleshooting Clearing Slide Cartridge Jams at the Unload Door

Clearing Slide Cartridge Jams at the Unload Door

If a cartridge is stuck at one of the unload doors, the cartridge rotor may be out of position, there may be an unusual condition in the unload door, or slide cartridges may be backed up in the discard chute. To clear a slide cartridge jam at one of the unload doors: 1. Allow all slide processing to complete if possible. 2. Touch RETURN until you reach the Main Menu. 3. Touch DIAGNOSTICS on the Main Menu.

SAMPLING

REMOTE ENABLED READY

LAB COMP : TESTING COMPLETE

14:13:12 ON

OFF

VX.XX**250 MD00A

DIAGNOSTICS SETUP/ ADJUST

PERFORMANCE TESTS

SUBSYSTEM TESTS

STANDALONE DIAGNOSTIC TESTS

HARDWARE AND CHEM INFO

LAB COMP PROTOCOL ANALYZER

COMPLEX TESTS

MEDS

May 19 XX

> Touch a target to select a function.

RETURN

HELP

4. Touch MEDS.

5–20

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

Version 2.0

Troubleshooting Clearing Slide Cartridge Jams at the Unload Door

SAMPLING REMOTE ENABLED

LAB COMP : TESTING COMPLETE

READY

Apr 24 XX 14:13:12

ON

OFF

MEDS – Main Menu

VX.XX**250 ME00A

REFLECTOMETER

SAMPLE HANDLER

SAMPLE METERING

SLIDE SUPPLY 1

RM/IR METERING

SLIDE SUPPLY 2

INCUBATOR

> Touch a target to select a function. RETURN

HELP

5. Touch SLIDE SUPPLY 1.

LAB COMP: TESTING COMPLETE

READY

SAMPLING

14:13:12 ON

OFF

MEDS – Main Menu – Slide Supply 1 LOAD DOOR OPEN | CLOSE

RELEASE CARTRIDGE

UNLOAD DOOR OPEN | CLOSE

NEST N TO LOAD

CYCLE LOAD DOOR

NEST N TO DISPENSE

CYCLE UNLOAD DOOR

Feb 22 XX VX.XX**250 ME02A

CYCLE PLUNGER

DISPENSE BLADE INNER RING

DISPENSE BLADE CM INC DEPTH

CYCLE CW

CHECK SLIDE COUNT

HOME DISPENSE . BLADE

DISPENSE BLADE PM INC DEPTH

CYCLE CCW

DISPENSE SLIDE

DISPENSE BLADE PARK

CYCLE DISPENSE BLADE

PLUNGER

DISPENSE BLADE OUTER RING

DISPENSE BLADE METERING

NEST N TO VIEWPORT

UP | DOWN

> Touch a target to select a function. RETURN

RETURN TO MAIN DIAG MENU

RESET SLIDE SUPPLY

HELP

6. Touch UNLOAD DOOR OPEN | CLOSE to toggle it to OPEN.

Version 2.0

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

5–21

Troubleshooting Clearing Slide Cartridge Jams at the Unload Door

7. Open the right front analyzer door.

CartridgeDisposal Box

8. Remove the cartridge disposal box to gain access to the cartridgediscard chute. 9. Reach up into the cartridge-discard chute, and locate the cartridgeunload door for slide supply 1. Feel inside the open door for a jammed cartridge. If a cartridge is present, try to pull the cartridge through the open door.

CartridgeDiscard Chute

10. When you have finished checking the slide supply 1 unload door, touch UNLOAD DOOR OPEN | CLOSE to toggle it to CLOSE for slide supply 1. 11. Touch RETURN. 12. Touch SLIDE SUPPLY 2. 13. Touch UNLOAD DOOR OPEN | CLOSE to toggle it to OPEN for slide supply 2.

5–22

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

Version 2.0

Troubleshooting Clearing Slide Cartridge Jams at the Unload Door

14. Reach up into the cartridge discard chute, and locate the cartridge unload door for slide supply 2. Feel inside the open door for a jammed cartridge. If a cartridge is present, try to pull the cartridge through the open door. 15. When you have finished checking the slide supply 2 unload door, touch UNLOAD DOOR OPEN | CLOSE to toggle it to CLOSE for slide supply 2. 16. Empty the cartridge disposal box, and reinsert the disposal box into the analyzer. 17. Close the front right analyzer door. 18. Touch RETURN until you exit Diagnostics. The analyzer will initialize. 19. If the condition recurs or you could not extract the cartridge, ask your key operator for assistance.

Version 2.0

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

5–23

Troubleshooting Clearing Slide Cartridge Jams at the Slide Supply Access Door

Clearing Slide Cartridge Jams at the Slide Supply Access Door

To clear a slide cartridge jam at the slide supply access door: 1. Allow all slide processing to complete if possible. 2. Touch RETURN until you reach the Main Menu. 3. Touch DIAGNOSTICS on the Main Menu. 4. Touch MEDS. 5. Touch SLIDE SUPPLY 1. 6. Touch RESET SLIDE SUPPLY. 7. Wait for the message “SS1 SS2 INC R/C PM INOP” to appear in the status bar. 8. Open the top cover of the analyzer. 9. Open the slide supply viewport window cover to observe the slide supplies. Wait until the slide supplies have finished moving (about 30 seconds).

Slide Supply Viewport

5–24

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

Version 2.0

Troubleshooting Clearing Slide Cartridge Jams at the Slide Supply Access Door

10. Open the right front analyzer door.

CartridgeDisposal Box

11. Remove the cartridge disposal box for easier access to the slide supply access door. 12. Reach above the cartridge disposal box area to locate the slide supply access door. Refer to the “Clearing Slide Cartridge Jams” section of the slide supply label which is located on the front of the slide supply.

Version 2.0

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

5–25

Troubleshooting Clearing Slide Cartridge Jams at the Slide Supply Access Door

13. Loosen the access door screw. The access door will swing open. 14. Reach into the slide supply and remove any jammed cartridges. 15. Close the slide supply access door and tighten the access door screw. IMPORTANT: The slide supply access door must be closed and the access door screw tightened to maintain the correct humidity and temperature in the slide supplies. 16. Empty the cartridge disposal box, and reinsert the disposal box into the analyzer. 17. Close the right front door and the top cover of the analyzer. 18. Touch RETURN three times to exit to the Main Menu. The analyzer will initialize. 19. If the condition recurs or you could not extract the cartridge, ask your key operator for assistance or contact your Customer Support Representative.

5–26

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

Version 2.0

Troubleshooting Clearing Slide Cartridge and Slide Jams at the Slide Dispense Station, the Dispense Blade Path, and the Platen Area

Clearing Slide Cartridge and Slide Jams at the Slide Dispense Station, the Dispense Blade Path, and the Platen Area

To clear a slide cartridge or a slide jam at the slide dispense station, the dispense blade path, or the platen area: 1. Lift the top right cover of the analyzer.

Slide Supply Viewport

2. Open the slide supply view port cover. 3. Make note of the cartridge rotor nest numbers. This may be helpful if the condition recurs. 4. Close the slide supply view port cover. 5. Close the top right analyzer cover. 6. Touch the status console to access the error log screen showing the INITIALIZE target. 7. Touch INITIALIZE to return the analyzer to normal operation.

Version 2.0

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

5–27

Troubleshooting Clearing Slide Cartridge and Slide Jams at the Slide Dispense Station, the Dispense Blade Path, and the Platen Area If this does not correct the condition, do the following: 8. Repeat steps 1 through 3. 9. Remove the platen cover by loosening the two quarter-turn fasteners, and set it aside.

Platen Cover

10. Turn the knob located on the left side of the slide dispense motor clockwise (down) until you hear a ratchet noise. This should fully retract the dispense blade from the slide dispense area. Knob

Slide-Dispense Blade

5–28

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

Version 2.0

Troubleshooting Clearing Slide Cartridge and Slide Jams at the Slide Dispense Station, the Dispense Blade Path, and the Platen Area 11. Remove any slides that are hanging out of the cartridge by pulling them out of the cartridge. Note the cartridge by placing an “X” on the top label with a pencil. (Do not use a pen or marker.) This allows you to track the cartridge to determine if it jams repeatedly. If a cartridge was jammed in this location, it should drop back into the slide supply. NOTE: The cartridge may not drop down if the plunger is still in the “up” position. (The platens will be raised if the plunger is still in the “up” position.) If this occurs, actuate the slide supply plungers through MEDS to lower the plungers. — Touch RETURN until you reach the Main Menu. — Touch DIAGNOSTICS on the Main Menu.

SAMPLING

REMOTE ENABLED READY

LAB COMP : TESTING COMPLETE

14:13:12 ON

OFF

VX.XX**250 MD00A

DIAGNOSTICS SETUP/ ADJUST

PERFORMANCE TESTS

SUBSYSTEM TESTS

STANDALONE DIAGNOSTIC TESTS

HARDWARE AND CHEM INFO

LAB COMP PROTOCOL ANALYZER

COMPLEX TESTS

MEDS

May 19 XX

> Touch a target to select a function.

RETURN

Version 2.0

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

HELP

5–29

Troubleshooting Clearing Slide Cartridge and Slide Jams at the Slide Dispense Station, the Dispense Blade Path, and the Platen Area — Touch MEDS.

SAMPLING REMOTE ENABLED

LAB COMP : TESTING COMPLETE

READY

14:13:12 ON

OFF

MEDS – Main Menu SAMPLE HANDLER

SAMPLE METERING

SLIDE SUPPLY 1

RM/IR METERING

SLIDE SUPPLY 2

INCUBATOR

Apr 24 XX VX.XX**250 ME00A

REFLECTOMETER

> Touch a target to select a function. RETURN

HELP

— Touch SLIDE SUPPLY 1.

LAB COMP: TESTING COMPLETE

READY

SAMPLING

14:13:12 ON

OFF

MEDS – Main Menu – Slide Supply 1 LOAD DOOR OPEN | CLOSE

RELEASE CARTRIDGE

UNLOAD DOOR OPEN | CLOSE

NEST N TO LOAD

CYCLE LOAD DOOR

NEST N TO DISPENSE

CYCLE UNLOAD DOOR

Feb 22 XX VX.XX**250 ME02A

CYCLE PLUNGER

DISPENSE BLADE INNER RING

DISPENSE BLADE CM INC DEPTH

CYCLE CW

CHECK SLIDE COUNT

HOME DISPENSE . BLADE

DISPENSE BLADE PM INC DEPTH

CYCLE CCW

DISPENSE SLIDE

DISPENSE BLADE PARK

CYCLE DISPENSE BLADE

PLUNGER

DISPENSE BLADE OUTER RING

DISPENSE BLADE METERING

NEST N TO VIEWPORT

UP | DOWN

> Touch a target to select a function. RETURN

RETURN TO MAIN DIAG MENU

RESET SLIDE SUPPLY

HELP

— Touch PLUNGER UP | DOWN to toggle once or twice, as needed, to make the plunger move down.

5–30

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

Version 2.0

Troubleshooting Clearing Slide Cartridge and Slide Jams at the Slide Dispense Station, the Dispense Blade Path, and the Platen Area — Touch RETURN. — Touch SLIDE SUPPLY 2.

LAB COMP: TESTING COMPLETE

READY

SAMPLING

14:13:12 ON

OFF

RELEASE CARTRIDGE

UNLOAD DOOR OPEN | CLOSE

NEST N TO LOAD

CYCLE LOAD DOOR

NEST N TO DISPENSE

CYCLE UNLOAD DOOR

VX.XX**250 ME02A

MEDS – Main Menu – Slide Supply 2 LOAD DOOR OPEN | CLOSE

Feb 22 XX

CYCLE PLUNGER

DISPENSE BLADE INNER RING

DISPENSE BLADE CM INC DEPTH

CYCLE CW

CHECK SLIDE COUNT

HOME DISPENSE . BLADE

DISPENSE BLADE PM INC DEPTH

CYCLE CCW

DISPENSE SLIDE

DISPENSE BLADE PARK

CYCLE DISPENSE BLADE

PLUNGER

DISPENSE BLADE OUTER RING

DISPENSE BLADE METERING

NEST N TO VIEWPORT

UP | DOWN

> Touch a target to select a function. RETURN

RETURN TO MAIN DIAG MENU

RESET SLIDE SUPPLY

HELP

— Touch PLUNGER UP | DOWN to toggle once or twice, as needed, to make the plunger move down. — Touch RETURN until you exit Diagnostics. The analyzer will initialize. 12. Verify that the cartridge below the platens is positioned correctly. The side bar code label should face the front of the analyzer. If the cartridge is positioned incorrectly, you will need to unload it using the Unload features in Cartridge Handling. — Touch RETURN until you reach the Main Menu.

Version 2.0

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

5–31

Troubleshooting Clearing Slide Cartridge and Slide Jams at the Slide Dispense Station, the Dispense Blade Path, and the Platen Area — Touch CARTRIDGE HANDLING.

LAB COMP: TESTING COMPLETE

READY

Nov 02 92 14:13:12

SAMPLING ON

OFF

VX.XX**250 CH01A

CARTRIDGE HANDLING Display:

Load:

Unload:

SLIDE INVENTORY

MANUAL LOT # ENTRY

BY TEST / LOT

SLIDE SUPPLY CONTENTS

BY POSITION

BY POSITION

NEW GEN

ALL EMPTY CARTRIDGES ALL CARTRIDGES BY SUPPLY

> Touch a target to select a function. RETURN

HELP

— Touch BY POSITION in the Unload column.

LAB COMP: TESTING COMPLETE

READY

Dec 01 92

SAMPLING

14:13:12 ON

OFF

VX.XX**250 CH01G Page 1 of 3 Elapsed Days: 15.6 19.9 19.9 SCROLL 14.8 UP 18.8 19.8

CARTRIDGE HANDLING - Unload Cartidge by Position - SUPPLY 1 Nest : 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Test: BuBc BUN Ca BuBc ClCHOL

Slides: 50 31 50 18 43 11

BuBc

05

Lot Number: . 0216-4444 0103-1111 0314-1111 0216-7777 4001-3456 0808-4097

Cal'd Fluids: S S S S S S

Current: S S S S S S

0216-7777

S

S

14.7

SCROLL DOWN

9 10 11 12 13 > Empty the Cartridge Disposal Box. Use the SCROLL targets to select a position for unload; then touch UNLOAD SELECTED POSITIONS. RETURN

PREVIOUS PAGE

UNLOAD SELECTED POSITION

NEXT PAGE

CHANGE SUPPLY

HELP

— Empty the cartridge disposal box. — Use SCROLL UP and SCROLL DOWN to select a position to unload. To ensure that the correct cartridge is unloaded, check that the correct test and lot number are highlighted. — Touch UNLOAD SELECTED POSITION.

5–32

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

Version 2.0

Troubleshooting Clearing Slide Cartridge and Slide Jams at the Slide Dispense Station, the Dispense Blade Path, and the Platen Area — Repeat the procedure to unload more cartridges if desired. — Touch RETURN to exit. — Retrieve the cartridge from the cartridge disposal box. 13. Inspect the slide path, platen cover, and dispense blade for dirt. Clean parts as necessary using a cotton-tipped swab moistened with distilled or ionized water. 14. If the cartridge is jammed in slide supply 2, you may need to remove the tip-locator assembly. Open the incubator cover.

Incubator Cover

Version 2.0

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

5–33

Troubleshooting Clearing Slide Cartridge and Slide Jams at the Slide Dispense Station, the Dispense Blade Path, and the Platen Area 15. Loosen the one thumbscrew that secures the tip-locator cover to the tip-locator assembly. Remove the tip-locator cover, and set it aside.

Tip-Locator Assembly Cover

16. Loosen the three thumbscrews on the tip-locator assembly. 17. Lift the tip-locator assembly and the transverse shuttle out of the way.

Tip-Locator Assembly

5–34

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

Version 2.0

Troubleshooting Clearing Slide Cartridge and Slide Jams at the Slide Dispense Station, the Dispense Blade Path, and the Platen Area 18. Remove the platen cover to gain access to the cartridge and remove any slides that are hanging out of the cartridge by pulling them out of the cartridge. Note the cartridge by placing an “X” on the top label with a pencil. (Do not use a pen or marker.) This allows you to track the cartridge to determine if it jams repeatedly. If a cartridge was jammed in this location, the cartridge should drop back into the slide supply. 19. Place the transverse shuttle into the tip-locator assembly, place the assembly into position, and hand tighten the three thumbscrews. 20. Replace the tip-locator cover, and hand tighten the one thumbscrew. 21. Close the incubator cover. 22. Replace the platen cover. 23. Close the slide supply view port cover. 24. Close the top right cover of the analyzer. 25. Touch the status console to access the error log screen showing the INITIALIZE target. 26. Touch INITIALIZE to return the analyzer to normal operation. 27. If the condition recurs, unload the cartridges marked with an “X”. Use the Unload features in Cartridge Handling. 28. Reload any cartridges that were not marked with an “X”. 29. Initialize the analyzer again. 30. If the condition recurs, ask your key operator for assistance.

Version 2.0

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

5–35

Troubleshooting Clearing Slide Jams in the Transverse Shuttle and at the CM/RT Eject Blade Position

Clearing Slide Jams in the Transverse Shuttle and at the CM/RT Eject Blade Position

IMPORTANT: Incubator nest position 24 contains the reference slide. Do not remove this slide during the jam-clearing process. (If hardware Mod No. 9 is installed, this position contains the Spectralon block.) 1. Lift the top right cover of the analyzer.

2. Open the incubator cover.

Incubator Cover

5–36

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

Version 2.0

Troubleshooting Clearing Slide Jams in the Transverse Shuttle and at the CM/RT Eject Blade Position

3. Loosen the one thumbscrew that secures the tip-locator cover to the tip-locator assembly. Remove the tip-locator cover, and set it aside.

Tip-Locator Assembly Cover

4. Loosen the three thumbscrews on the tip-locator assembly. 5. Lift the tip-locator assembly and transverse shuttle out of the way.

Tip-Locator Assembly

Version 2.0

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

5–37

Troubleshooting Clearing Slide Jams in the Transverse Shuttle and at the CM/RT Eject Blade Position

6. Locate the plastic gear that moves the CM/RT slide eject blade. — Turn the gear clockwise to bring the blade as far as possible to the center of the incubator disk. If the gear is obstructed by one of the four incubator disk spokes, try to turn the gear by pushing on the gear’s teeth with an applicator stick. 7. Check to see if any slides are present in the area under the tiplocator assembly. If so, discard them. 8. Check for sticky spots in the tip-locator area and the bottom of the tip-locator assembly. — Use the edge of a spare slide to remove any glue deposits from the slide reference edge on the underside of the tip-locator assembly. Discard the slide when you are finished.

Tip-Locator Assembly

— Wipe the rest of the tip-locator assembly with a lint-free cloth moistened with distilled or deionized water. Avoid touching electrical parts. Use light pressure only. — Moisten a cotton swab with distilled or deionized water. Use the swab to clean the area under the tip-locator assembly.

5–38

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

Version 2.0

Troubleshooting Clearing Slide Jams in the Transverse Shuttle and at the CM/RT Eject Blade Position

9. Remove the transverse shuttle and dislodge any slides that are stuck in the CM/RT discard chute or transverse shuttle. Use an applicator stick, and push the applicator stick straight down the discard chute.

Discard Chute Transverse Shuttle

If the discard chute is plugged with slides, open the front right door of the analyzer. — Remove the slide disposal box. — Discard the liner and its contents following your established laboratory procedures for the disposal of biohazardous materials. — Place a new liner in the slide disposal box. — Be sure slides have not dropped down behind the slide disposal box. — Reinsert the slide disposal box into the analyzer. 10. Moisten some cotton-tip swabs with distilled or deionized water. Use these swabs to clean the interior walls of the discard chute. Allow the discard chute to air dry.

Version 2.0

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

5–39

Troubleshooting Clearing Slide Jams in the Transverse Shuttle and at the CM/RT Eject Blade Position

11. Verify that you can rotate the incubator disk by hand. 12. Line up one of the incubator nest positions with the labeled slot marked by two raised bars or rails.

Incubator

13. Place the transverse shuttle into the tip-locator assembly, place the assembly into position, and hand tighten the three thumbscrews. 14. Replace the tip-locator cover, and hand tighten the one thumbscrew. 15. If you were not successful in finding the jam, check each of the incubator evaporation cap springs. Make sure each spring is locked in place. 16. Close the incubator cover. 17. Close the top right cover of the analyzer. 18. Touch the status console to access the error log screen showing the INITIALIZE target. 19. Touch INITIALIZE to return the analyzer to normal operation.

5–40

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

Version 2.0

Troubleshooting Clearing Slide Jams at the Electrometer Discard Station and at the PM Slide-Eject Position

Clearing Slide Jams at the Electrometer Discard Station and at the PM Slide-Eject Position

IMPORTANT: Incubator nest position 24 contains the reference slide. Do not remove this slide during the jam-clearing process. 1. Lift the top right cover of the analyzer.

2. Open the incubator cover.

Incubator Cover

Version 2.0

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

5–41

Troubleshooting Clearing Slide Jams at the Electrometer Discard Station and at the PM Slide-Eject Position

3. Loosen the two quarter-turn fasteners on the electrometer.

Electrometer

4. Lift the electrometer into the maintenance position. Swing down the kickstand for support.

Kickstand

5–42

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

Version 2.0

Troubleshooting Clearing Slide Jams at the Electrometer Discard Station and at the PM Slide-Eject Position

5. Remove any slides present under the electrometer. 6. Dislodge any slides that are stuck in the discard chute. Use an applicator stick, and push the applicator stick straight down the discard chute.

Discard Chute

If the discard chute is plugged with slides, open the front right door of the analyzer. — Remove the slide disposal box. — Discard the liner and its contents following your established laboratory procedures for the disposal of biohazardous materials. — Place a new liner in the slide disposal box. — Be sure slides have not dropped down behind the slide disposal box. — Reinsert the slide disposal box into the analyzer. 7. Moisten some cotton-tip swabs with distilled or deionized water. Use these swabs to clean the interior walls of the discard chute. Allow the discard chute to air dry. 8. If the metal surface under the electrometer is sticky, use a cotton-tip swab moistened with distilled or deionized water to clean it. Dry the area with a lint-free cloth. 9. If the underside of the electrometer is sticky, wipe it with a lint-free cloth moistened with distilled or deionized water.

Version 2.0

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

5–43

Troubleshooting Clearing Slide Jams at the Electrometer Discard Station and at the PM Slide-Eject Position

10. Locate the plastic gear that moves the PM slide eject blade. — Turn the gear clockwise to bring the blade as far as possible to the center of the incubator disk. If the gear is obstructed by one of the four incubator disk spokes, try to turn the gear by pushing on the gear’s teeth with an applicator stick. 11. Verify that you can rotate the incubator disk by hand. 12. Line up one of the incubator nest positions with the labeled slot marked by two raised bars or rails.

Incubator

13. Return the electrometer to its normal operation position, and hand tighten the two quarter-turn fasteners. 14. If you were not successful in finding the jam, check each of the incubator evaporation cap springs. Make sure each spring is locked in place. 15. Close the incubator cover. 16. Close the top right cover of the analyzer. 17. Touch the status console to access the error log screen showing the INITIALIZE target. 18. Touch INITIALIZE to return the analyzer to normal operation.

5–44

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

Version 2.0

Troubleshooting Clearing Slide Jams in the Tip-Locator/Metering Area

Clearing Slide Jams in the Tip-Locator/Metering Area

To clear a slide jam in the tip-locator/metering area: 1. Allow all slide processing to complete if possible. 2. Lift the top right cover of the analyzer.

3. Open the incubator cover.

Incubator Cover

Version 2.0

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

5–45

Troubleshooting Clearing Slide Jams in the Tip-Locator/Metering Area

4. Loosen the one thumbscrew that secures the tip-locator assembly cover to the tip-locator assembly.

Tip-Locator Assembly Cover

5. Remove the tip-locator cover and set it aside. 6. Loosen the three thumbscrews on the tip-locator assembly. 7. Lift the tip-locator assembly and transverse shuttle out of the way.

Tip-Locator Assembly

8. Turn the knob located on the left side of the slide dispense blade motor to retract the dispense blade from the slide dispense area. 9. Remove any slide found in the tip-locator area.

5–46

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

Version 2.0

Troubleshooting Clearing Slide Jams in the Tip-Locator/Metering Area

10. If there is a slide partially in the incubator disk, remove and discard it. 11. Push down on the slide elevator to see if it binds and to see if it springs back into position. Elevator

12. Check for sticky spots in the tip-locator area and the bottom of the tip-locator assembly. If any, — Use the edge of a spare slide to remove any glue deposits from the slide block area on the underside of the tip-locator assembly. Discard the slide when you are finished.

Tip-Locator Assembly

Slide Reference Edge

Version 2.0

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

5–47

Troubleshooting Clearing Slide Jams in the Tip-Locator/Metering Area

— Wipe the rest of the tip-locator assembly with a lint-free cloth moistened with distilled or deionized water. Avoid touching electrical parts. Use light pressure only. — Moisten a cotton swab with distilled or deionized water. Use the swab to clean the area under the tip-locator assembly. — Allow the tip-locator assembly to air dry. 13. Replace the tip-locator assembly, and hand-tighten the three thumbscrews. 14. Place the transverse shuttle into the tip-locator assembly, place the assembly into position, and hand tighten the one thumbscrew. 15. Close the incubator cover 16. Close the top right analyzer cover. 17. Touch the status console to access the error log screen showing the INITIALIZE target. 18. Touch INITIALIZE to return the analyzer to normal operation. 19. If the condition recurs, ask your key operator for assistance.

5–48

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

Version 2.0

Troubleshooting General Troubleshooting Procedures

General Troubleshooting Procedures Blank Control Unit Monitor

CRT Monitor

The control unit monitor has a screen-saver feature. If you do not touch the screen for ten minutes or longer, the screen goes blank automatically. To troubleshoot a blank screen: 1. Touch the screen or press any key on the keyboard. 2. If the screen remains blank, — Verify that the touch screen frame is securely fastened to both sides of the monitor. (The touch screen is a separate component that snaps over the screen of the monitor. It snaps into place by fitting the two holes in the touch screen frame over two raised discs on the sides of the monitor.) — Check the power on LED at the right bottom corner of the monitor. If it is not on, turn on the power switch to the monitor. — Turn the brightness and contrast knobs all the way in both directions. Turning the knobs clockwise will increase the intensity; counter clockwise will decrease the intensity. These knobs are on the lower right portion of the monitor. The contrast knob ( ) is on the left. The brightness knob ( ) is on the right. 3. If the screen is still blank, ask your key operator for assistance.

LCD Monitor

1. Touch the screen or press any key on the keyboard. 2. If the screen remains blank, — Check the power on LED. If it is not on, turn on the power switch to the monitor. — Adjust the brightness and contrast settings by touching the Menu button on the right side of the monitor and following the on-screen instructions. 3. If the screen is still blank, ask your key operator for assistance.

Touch Screen is not Functioning Properly CRT Monitor

1. Make sure all four sides of the touch screen frame are free of dust. 2. If the condition persists, ask your key operator for assistance.

LCD Monitor

1. Make sure all cables are secured to the back of the monitor. 2. If the condition persists, ask your key operator for assistance.

Version 2.0

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

5–49

Troubleshooting Touch Screen is Visible But Targets Do Not Respond

Touch Screen is Visible But Targets Do Not Respond CRT and LCD Monitors

1. Try touching the HELP target dead center, at its perimeter, and the screen near the HELP target. 2. If there is no response: — Look in the upper right corner of the screen to see if the clock is running. — Make a note of screen activities that you performed prior to noticing that the screen would not respond. — Open the front right analyzer door. — Press the Program Load/Reset Button until the screen goes blank. — The analyzer will reload the software. 3. If the analyzer fails computer system checks during the software reload, make note of the information detailed on the screen or on the printer. 4. Ask your key operator for assistance.

The Analyzer Cannot be Powered Up

If you cannot power up the analyzer: 1. Verify that the main power cord for the analyzer is attached securely to the wall receptacle and to the back of the analyzer. 2. Verify that the circuit breaker controlling the wall receptacle is on. 3. Verify that the circuit breaker inside the Sample Handler portion of the analyzer is on. — Open the front left door of the analyzer (Sample Handler front door). — The breaker is located in the lower left at the back of the Sample Handler. — There is a group of five breakers. Each breaker has a different color, and its nominal voltage is printed beneath it. — There is a slotted metal piece above these breakers. — Only one of the breakers lines up with a slot in the metal piece (red breaker; 115v). — This one breaker should be up and the others down. — Close the front left analyzer door. 4. If the condition persists, ask your key operator for assistance.

5–50

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

Version 2.0

Troubleshooting No Results are Printing

No Results are Printing

To troubleshoot printing problems: 1. Verify that the printer’s power switch is on. The power indicator on the printer control panel will be lit. 2. Verify that the printer power cord is attached securely at both ends. 3. Verify that the printer interface cable is attached securely at both ends. 4. Verify that the printer has paper, and the paper is loaded properly. 5. Verify that the Select Indicator Light is lit on the printer control panel. 6. Press the PrtScr key to test the printer. If results still will not print, check the status of the reporting devices. 1. Touch RETURN until you reach the Main Menu. 2. Touch OPTIONS on the Main Menu. 3. Type the operator access code, and press the Enter key on the keyboard.

LAB COMP : TESTING COMPLETE

READY

OPTIONS Disk Srvcs

SAMPLING

Jul 15 92 14:13:12

ON

OFF

VX.XX**250 OP00B

Test Data

Cal Data

TEST/ FLUID CONFIG

CAL PARAMS

LOAD CAL DISKETTE

REPORT CONTROL

SUBSYSTEM CONTROL

COEF & LIMITS

CALIBRATOR LOT # SELECTION

BACKUP/ RESTORE DISKETTE

WORKLOAD & USAGE REPORTS

ANALYZER CONFIG

ADDITIONAL TESTS CONFIG

CALIBRATOR SAVs

DISK FILE SERVICES

System Services

SPECIAL SERVICES

DILUENT DATA > Touch a target to select an option. RETURN

Version 2.0

PRINT CONFIG REPORT

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

HELP

5–51

Troubleshooting No Results are Printing

4. Touch REPORT CONTROL in the System Services column.

LAB COMP : TESTING COMPLETE

READY

SAMPLING

Dec 01 92 14:13:12

ON

OFF

VX.XX**250 OP04A

OPTIONS – Report/Communications Control Categories DEVICE/ REPORT CONTROL REPORT REQUEST DEFAULTS REPORT PRINT MODE > Touch a target to select a category.

RETURN

HELP

5. Touch DEVICE/REPORT CONTROL.

LAB COMP : TESTING COMPLETE

READY

SAMPLING ON

OFF

Dec 01 92 14:13:12 VS.XX**250 OP04C

Categories

OPTIONS – Report/Communications Control Lab Computer Device Control Reports

DEVICE/ REPORT CONTROL

TRANSMIT RESULTS ON OFF

PRINTER A

REPORT REQUEST DEFAULTS

RECEIVE TESTS ON OFF

PRINTER B

REPORT PRINT MODE

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

Printer Paths

PATIENT REPORT ON OFF

PATIENT REPORT A B

LAB REPORT ON OFF

LAB REPORT A B

CAL REPORT ON OFF

CAL REPORT A B MISC REPORT A B

> Touch targets to change communications, devices, reports, or printer paths. RETURN

HELP

6. ON should be highlighted on the PRINTER A target. If the target is OFF: — Turn the printer main power switch off, then back to on again. — Touch the PRINTER A target to highlight ON.

5–52

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

Version 2.0

Troubleshooting No Results are Printing

7. Check the targets in the Reports column. Verify that the necessary report targets have ON highlighted. 8. Check the targets in the Printer Paths column. Verify that the reports are being directed to the correct printer. (The printer used for the report should be highlighted.) 9. Check the targets in the Lab Computer column. ON should be highlighted if a lab computer is in use; OFF should be highlighted is no lab computer is in use. 10. Touch RETURN until you reach the Main Menu. 11. Press the PrtScr key to test the printer. If the printer still does not print, reset the analyzer. 1. Touch SHUTDOWN ANALYZER. 2. Type “Y” and press the Enter key on the keyboard when prompted. Wait until you see the message, “The analyzer has been shutdown. Reset or power down is required.” 3. Turn the printer main power switch off, then on again. 4. Open the right front door of the analyzer.

Program Load/Reset Button

5. Press the Program Load/Reset Button.

Version 2.0

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

5–53

Troubleshooting No Results are Printing

6. Close the right front door of the analyzer. The Main Menu will display when reset is complete. NOTE: Program Load/Reset takes approximately ten minutes. 7. Verify that the correct date and time are displayed in the upper right corner of the screen. To correct the date and time, see the “Special Services” section of Chapter 10, “Options,” in the Operator’s Manual, or see the Operator’s Quick Guide. 8. Press the PrtScr key to test the printer. 9. If the printer still will not print, ask your key operator for assistance.

5–54

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

Version 2.0

Troubleshooting Will Not Upload Data to or Download Data from the Lab Computer

Will Not Upload Data to or Download Data from the Lab Computer

To troubleshoot lab computer communication problems: 1. Verify that the computer interface cable is attached securely to the bottom serial port on the back right area of the analyzer. 2. Verify that the lab computer is ready to accept data from the analyzer. 3. Touch RETURN until you reach the Main Menu. 4. Touch OPTIONS on the Main Menu. 5. Type the operator access code, and press the Enter key on the keyboard.

LAB COMP : TESTING COMPLETE

READY

OPTIONS Disk Srvcs

SAMPLING

Jul 15 92 14:13:12

ON

OFF

VX.XX**250 OP00B

Test Data

Cal Data

TEST/ FLUID CONFIG

CAL PARAMS

LOAD CAL DISKETTE

REPORT CONTROL

SUBSYSTEM CONTROL

COEF & LIMITS

CALIBRATOR LOT # SELECTION

BACKUP/ RESTORE DISKETTE

WORKLOAD & USAGE REPORTS

ANALYZER CONFIG

ADDITIONAL TESTS CONFIG

CALIBRATOR SAVs

DISK FILE SERVICES

System Services

SPECIAL SERVICES

DILUENT DATA > Touch a target to select an option. RETURN

Version 2.0

PRINT CONFIG REPORT

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

HELP

5–55

Troubleshooting Will Not Upload Data to or Download Data from the Lab Computer

6. Touch REPORT CONTROL in the System Services column.

LAB COMP : TESTING COMPLETE

READY

SAMPLING

Dec 01 92 14:13:12

ON

OFF

VX.XX**250 OP04A

OPTIONS – Report/Communications Control Categories DEVICE/ REPORT CONTROL REPORT REQUEST DEFAULTS REPORT PRINT MODE > Touch a target to select a category.

RETURN

HELP

7. Touch DEVICE/REPORT CONTROL.

LAB COMP : TESTING COMPLETE

READY

SAMPLING ON

OFF

Dec 01 92 14:13:12 VS.XX**250 OP04C

Categories

OPTIONS – Report/Communications Control Lab Computer Device Control Reports

DEVICE/ REPORT CONTROL

TRANSMIT RESULTS ON OFF

PRINTER A

REPORT REQUEST DEFAULTS

RECEIVE TESTS ON OFF

PRINTER B

REPORT PRINT MODE

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

Printer Paths

PATIENT REPORT ON OFF

PATIENT REPORT A B

LAB REPORT ON OFF

LAB REPORT A B

CAL REPORT ON OFF

CAL REPORT A B MISC REPORT A B

> Touch targets to change communications, devices, reports, or printer paths. RETURN

HELP

8. Check the targets in the Lab Computer column. — ON should be highlighted on the TRANSMIT RESULTS target to transmit results to the laboratory computer. — ON should be highlighted on the RECEIVE TESTS target to receive test results from the laboratory computer. 9. Touch RETURN twice to return to the main Options screen.

5–56

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

Version 2.0

Troubleshooting Will Not Upload Data to or Download Data from the Lab Computer

10. Touch ANALYZER CONFIG in the System Services column.

Jul 15 92

SAMPLING LAB COMP : TESTING COMPLETE

READY

14:13:12 ON

OFF

VX.XX**250 OP00E

Functions

Tests

OPTIONS – Analyzer Configuration Reports

STATUS CONSOLE

DILUENT TRAY CONFIG

LAB COMPUTER CONFIG

SAMPLE PROGRAM RETENTION

LANGUAGE CONFIG

TEST REPORTING CONFIG

LAB REPORT CONFIG

RESULT RECORD RETENTION

AUTOMATION CONFIG

PRINTER REPORT CONFIG

ANALYZER NAME CONFIG

PATIENT REPORT CONFIG

ENHANCED RANGE REPORTING

Memory

> Touch a target to select a category.

RETURN

HELP

11. Touch LAB COMPUTER CONFIG in the Reports column.

LAB COMP : TESTING COMPLETE

READY Selection BIDIRECT

SAMPLING ON

OFF

OPTIONS – Laboratory Computer Communications Configuration Parameters Modes NAK ZERO YES NO

Jul 15 92 14:13:12 VX.XX**250 OP22G

PORT FORMAT

UPLOAD ONLY

PROTOCOL DEFINITION

NO COMMUN

PACKET FORMAT

> Touch a target to change an option or mode and to select a parameter. RETURN

HELP

This screen highlights the current lab computer communication configuration. — BIDIRECT enables the analyzer to receive sample programming information from (download) and send results to (upload) the lab computer.

Version 2.0

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

5–57

Troubleshooting Will Not Upload Data to or Download Data from the Lab Computer

— UPLOAD ONLY enables the analyzer to send results (upload) to the lab computer. — NO COMM disables the communication link between the analyzer and the lab computer. 12. Contact the lab computer personnel to acquire the information necessary to verify the laboratory computer communications configuration screens. — Each screen highlights the current configuration settings. — To view or edit a current configuration, touch the desired mode or parameter target. — Any changes you make become effective when you touch RETURN. See “Laboratory Computer” in Chapter 10, “Options,” in the Operator’s Manual for additional information. 13. Touch RETURN until you reach the Main Menu. 14. Send a report to the lab computer to verify that communication is established. Touch REVIEW RESULTS on the Main Menu.

LAB COMP : TESTING COMPLETE

READY

REVIEW RESULTS Functions

Options

MONITOR RESULTS

REVIEW FILE CONTENTS

SAMPLING

Dec 01 92 14:13:12

ON

OFF

VX.XX**250 RV01B

EDIT OR VERIFY RESULTS RETRIEVE ARCHIVED RESULTS CUMULATIVE RESULTS > Touch a target to select a function. RETURN

5–58

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

HELP

Version 2.0

Troubleshooting Will Not Upload Data to or Download Data from the Lab Computer

15. Touch EDIT OR VERIFY RESULTS.

SAMPLING

LAB COMP: TESTING COMPLETE

READY

REVIEW RESULTS – PATIENT NAME: LAST

FIRST

MI

DOCTOR NAME : LAST FIRST

MI

START DATE: END DATE:

11/30/92 12/01/92

PATIENT ID

OFF

END TIME:

14:13

VX.XX**250 RV03A

SAMPLE ID

DOCTOR ID

17:39

TODAY'S DATE

14:13:12 ON

Verification and Edit

START TIME:

Dec 01 92

ATTRIBUTES: STAT ROUTINE CONTROL

ALL DATES

> Enter search criteria, select attributes, reports, or function. ASSIGN REPORTS

RETURN

ABORT REPORT STATUS

START

HELP

16. Touch START twice.

SAMPLING LAB COMP : TESTING COMPLETE

READY

14:13:12 ON

OFF

GLU BUN CREA NH3 Na+

Pos 6 ED

Track 2 168.

K+ ClECO2 THEO Fe

Tray

Run Date 11/30/92

Run Time 17:39:43

VX.XX**250 RV06A

REVIEW RESULTS - Verification and Edit Sample ID 1115

Dec 01 92

Priority ROUTINE

AMYL LIPA Ca Mg PHOS

AST ALT LDH CK CKMB

CHOL TRIG HDLC URIC TP

ALKP GGT TBIL Bu Bc

Fluid SERUM

Man Dil 1.000

> Touch associated target area to edit tests.

RETURN

Version 2.0

EDIT PATIENT DATA

DELETE RESULT RECORD

REVIEW NEXT SAMPLE

REVIEW NEXT GROUP

REVIEW PREVIOUS GROUP

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

HELP

5–59

Troubleshooting Will Not Upload Data to or Download Data from the Lab Computer

17. Touch EDIT PATIENT DATA.

Dec 01 92

SAMPLING LAB COMP : TESTING COMPLETE

READY

Sample ID 1115

Pos 6

PATIENT ID: LAST: FIRST: BIRTH DATE: SEX: AGE:

14:13:12 ON

REVIEW RESULTS - Verification and Edit Track Tray Run Date Run Time Priority 2 11/30/92 17:39:43 ROUTINE

OFF

VX.XX**250

Fluid SERUM

RV08A Man Dil 1.000

REPORTING MODES

REPORTS

IMMEDIATE

PATIENT

ARCHIVE

DEFERRED

LABORATORY

COMPUTER

MI:

ROOM:

DOCTOR LAST: FIRST:

MI: OTHER:

DOCTOR ID:

> Touch associated target area to edit text fields; then touch reports desired. RETURN

REVIEW TEST RESULTS

DELETE RESULT RECORD

REVIEW NEXT SAMPLE

HELP

18. Touch LABORATORY in the Reports column. 19. Touch COMPUTER in the Reports column. 20. Touch RETURN three times to return to the main Review Results screen. 21. Look at line two of the status console next to “Lab Comp” for a flashing symbol. — A flashing white box displays for UPLOAD only. — A flashing “U” displays for BIDIRECTIONAL. 22. Verify that the lab computer received the report.

5–60

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

Version 2.0

6 Replacing Parts Installing a New Slide Supply Rotor Sensor* Removing the Slide Supply Rotor Sensor

Before you begin this procedure, make sure that testing is complete and Sampling is off. This removal procedure is the same whether working with the slide supply 1 or the slide supply 2 rotor sensor. To remove the slide supply rotor sensor: 1. Touch SHUTDOWN ANALYZER on the Main Menu. 2. Type “Y” and press the Enter key on the keyboard when prompted. 3. Toggle the analyzer’s main power switch to the O, or OFF, position when the screen indicates that the analyzer has been shut down. 4. Lift the top right analyzer cover. The slide transport area is indicated by the letter “D” on the label under the analyzer cover.

* Key operator training required.

Version 2.0

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

6–1

Replacing Parts Removing the Slide Supply Rotor Sensor

5. Loosen the two quarter-turn fasteners, and remove the platen cover.

Platen Cover

6. Locate the desired slide supply rotor sensor. These sensors are found near the slide-dispense path. The slide supply 1 sensor is the one located furthest from the incubator center.

Slide Supply 1 Sensor Slide Supply 2 Sensor

7. Lift the sensor straight up out of its mounting holes in the slide supply.

6–2

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

Version 2.0

Replacing Parts Removing the Slide Supply Rotor Sensor

8. Detach the sensor from its wiring harness. — Turn the sensor upside down and locate the safety catch that keeps the wiring securely attached to the sensor. — Press and hold this catch while pulling the sensor away from its wiring. The wiring should disconnect from the sensor very easily. If not, the safety catch did not release. Do not use force to break this connection. — Check for a gasket on the bottom of the sensor. If one is present, remove it from the old sensor and install it on the new sensor.

Safety Catch

Version 2.0

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

6–3

Replacing Parts Replacing the Slide Supply Rotor Sensor

Replacing the Slide Supply Rotor Sensor

This procedure is the same for both the slide supply 1 or the slide supply 2 rotor sensor. To replace the slide supply rotor sensor: 1. Locate the wiring harness for the new slide supply rotor sensor. The wiring for the slide supply 1 rotor sensor has an orange tag labeled 4A1S1J1. The wiring for the slide supply 2 rotor sensor is labeled 4A2S1J1.

4A1S1J1 for Sensor 1 4A2S1J1 for Sensor 2

2. Plug the slide supply rotor sensor into its wiring harness. The wiring harness is shaped so that it will only plug into the sensor one way. The safety catch will lock the two pieces together. 3. Gently pull the sensor and wiring in opposite directions to verify that the connection is secure.

6–4

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

Version 2.0

Replacing Parts Replacing the Slide Supply Rotor Sensor

4. Align the sensor with its openings in the slide supply. 4A1S1J1 for Sensor 1

5. Place the sensor in its mounting holes in the slide supply. 6. Replace the platen cover. — Line up the two platen cover quarter-turn fasteners with the holes in the brass stop plate. — Lock the quarter-turn fasteners in place by turning clockwise.

Platen Cover

Version 2.0

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

6–5

Replacing Parts Replacing the Slide Supply Rotor Sensor

7. Close the top right cover of the analyzer. 8. Toggle the analyzer main power switch to the I, or ON, position. The analyzer will reload software from the fixed disk and initialize for normal operation.

6–6

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

Version 2.0

Replacing Parts Replacing a Slide Supply Dispense Blade

Replacing a Slide Supply Dispense Blade

Before you begin this procedure, make sure that testing is complete and Sampling is OFF. To replace a slide supply dispense blade: 1. Touch SHUTDOWN ANALYZER on the Main Menu. 2. Type “Y” and press the Enter key on the keyboard when prompted. 3. Toggle the analyzer’s main power switch to the O or OFF position. 4. Open the top right analyzer cover.

Version 2.0

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

6–7

Replacing Parts Replacing a Slide Supply Dispense Blade

5. Remove the platen cover by loosening its two quarter-turn fasteners, and set it aside.

Platen Cover

6. Turn the knob located on the left side of the slide dispense blade motor clockwise to retract the dispense blade until the tip is between the two platens.

Knob

Retract blade to this area.

Slide-Dispense Blade

6–8

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

Version 2.0

Replacing Parts Replacing a Slide Supply Dispense Blade

7. Grasp the tip of the dispense blade with one hand. With the other hand, move the motor knob counter clockwise to help push the blade out. The dispense blade may be difficult to move at first.

Motor Knob

Pull out blade until it is free.

8. Orient the replacement blade with the gear teeth pointing up and the hole facing the incubator. 9. Insert the end of the blade with gear teeth on it into the opening between the two platens. Make sure the blade enters the slot in the rear platen.

Version 2.0

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

6–9

Replacing Parts Replacing a Slide Supply Dispense Blade

Knob Insert new blade into opening in rear platen.

10. Push the blade in as far as it will go. 11. Hold the blade in place with one hand, and turn the knob of the dispense blade motor clockwise with the other hand. 12. Continue to turn the knob until the dispense blade is fully retracted. 13. Replace the platen cover. — Align the two platen cover quarter-turn fasteners with the holes in the brass platen stop plate. — Lock the quarter-turn fasteners in place by turning clockwise. 14. Close the right top cover of the analyzer. 15. Toggle the analyzer’s main power switch to the |, or ON, position. The analyzer will reload software from the fixed disk and initialize for normal operation.

6–10

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

Version 2.0

Replacing Parts Replacing the Printhead on the Okidata Printer

Replacing the Printhead on the Okidata Printer

Note: The VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System is supplied with an Okidata Printer or an Epson LX-300+ Printer. Additional information on the Epson LX-300+ Printer can be accessed via the Epson Web page or the Epson Users Guide. To replace the printhead on the Okidata printer: 1. Turn off the power switch to the printer. 2. Move the bail lever toward the back of the printer. 3. Remove the access cover.

BAIL LEVER

ACCESS COVER

Version 2.0

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

6–11

Replacing Parts Replacing the Printhead on the Okidata Printer

4. Remove the ribbon cartridge by firmly holding the sides of the cartridge and pulling straight up. WARNING:

The printhead may be hot. Use care when touching it to prevent accidental injury.

5. Remove the printhead by grasping the right side of the printhead clamp and lifting the clamp. NOTE: Do not remove the printhead clamp.

PRINTHEAD RIBBON CARTRIDGE

CONNECTOR

PRINTHEAD CLAMP

CARRIAGE FRAME

PRINTHEAD

6–12

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

Version 2.0

Replacing Parts Replacing the Printhead on the Okidata Printer

6. To install the new printhead, press it against the carriage frame and seat the printhead in the connector. CAUTION:

In the following step, the printhead clamp must be positioned between the printhead and the carriage frame.

7. Press the printhead against the carriage frame. Press down on the printhead clamp.

Version 2.0

PRINTHEAD

PRINTHEAD CLAMP

TOP VIEW

CARRIAGE FRAME

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

6–13

Replacing Parts Replacing the Printhead on the Okidata Printer

8. Reinstall the ribbon cartridge: — Align the tabs with the inserts on the printhead plate. — Move the ribbon cartridge toward the front of the printer. — Move the ribbon shield over the printhead. — Press down on the ribbon cartridge until you hear a click.

RIBBON SHIELD

RIBBON CARTRIDGE

PRINTHEAD GAP LEVER

TAB INSERT

PRINTHEAD PLATE

9. Replace the access cover and turn on the power switch to the printer.

6–14

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

Version 2.0

Index

Numerics 120-volt monitor label xviii 120-volt printer label xviii

A A/D converter. See Signal processing test A/D reference voltage check, sample metering 3– 39, 3–44 Action severity level 5–2 Air filter inspecting and cleaning 2–37 Analyzer front view showing subsystems 5–9 labels xii–xix options on slide supply label xiii shutting down 5–12 see also Operator’s Manual, Chapter 4 top view showing subsystems 5–8 As-required maintenance 2–38–2–73 screen display 2–38 adjusting reflectometer iris 2–43–2–48 changing reflectometer lamp 2–42–2–43 cleaning cabinets 2–54 discard chutes 2–51–2–54 dispense blade/slide path 2–55–2–56 incubator evaporation caps and slots 2–57–2– 61 proboscis 2–67–2–72 PSID scanner window 2–72–2–73 replacing humidity control packs and desiccant packs 2– 39–2–41 incubator evaporation caps 2–62–2–66 sample metering tubing 2–49–2–50 Assay values, Rate/CM correction factor test 3–20, 3–21, 3–23, 3–27 Asterisks, flashing correction factor summary screen 3–26, 3–27 environmental monitoring 4–1, 4–15 Attention severity level 5–2 Auto checks, electrometer 3–91, 3–96–3–99 contacts down 3–97–3–98 contacts up 3–97 cycle contacts 3–98 extended 3–91, 3–100–3–101

B Backing up QC, Config, and Calibration data Bar code reads, PSID scanner 3–53–3–57

Version 2.0

2–35

scanner test, cartridge handling 3–102–3–104 Basic modes, electrometer 3–91 Biohazard label mixing-cup array and tip-disposal box xiv slide disposal box xiv Biohazardous contamination, cleaning from discard chutes 2–51 Biohazardous waste, disposal of 2–5, 2–36 Black correction factor slides. See Black reference slides Black correction factors 3–23, 3–25, 3–49 Black reference slides 3–19, 3–23 positioning 3–23 Blank screen, troubleshooting 5–49

C Cabinets, cleaning 2–54 Calibration data, backing up 2–35 diskette, new 2–10 Cartridge disposal box 2–6 Cartridge handling performance tests 3–102–3–107 bar code scanner 3–102–3–104 plunger count 3–102 rotor movement 3–102, 3–105–3–107 Cartridge-disposal box 2–5 label xv Checksums, verifying. See File verify Chemistry, datalogger search criteria 3–109, 3– 119–3–120 Cleaning air filter 2–37 analyzer to decontaminate 2–74 cabinets 2–54 cup retainer 2–34 cup, height, and microcollection tube adapters 2– 8 discard chutes 2–51–2–54 dispense blade/slide path 2–55–2–56 incubator evaporation caps and slots 2–57–2–61 keypad cover 2–35 proboscis 2–67–2–72 PSID scanner window 2–72–2–73 sample trays 2–7 sample-metering path 2–36 tip-locator assembly 2–29–2–33 touch screen 2–34 tray hook 2–28 tray platform and transport arm 2–28 Cleaning solutions, which to use xx Clearing jams. See Jams, clearing Closing current datalogger file 3–115–3–116

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

Index–i

Index

CM/RT eject blade position, clearing jams 5–36–5–40 MEDS movement sequence 3–16 Complex tests 3–2, 3–38 Computer protocol analyzer 3–18 Condition codes 3–108, 3–113 datalogger analysis search criteria 3–109 error log screen 5–4–5–5 recent history log 3–110–3–112 subsystem identification 5–4, 5–8, 5–9 troubleshooting help screen 5–8–5–9 Configuration data, backing up 2–35 Configuring diluent tray 2–21–2–22 Contact drive timing test, electrometer 3–94–3–95 Contamination discard chutes 2–51 gloves 2–20 tip-locator assembly 2–29 Correction factors black 3–23 displaying and printing 3–25 updating 3–28 when to update 3–27 see also Rate/CM correction factor test Cup adapter cleaning 2–8 Cup retainer, cleaning 2–34 Current setup values, displaying 3–32

D Daily maintenance 2–3–2–26 screen display 2–3 diluents 2–18–2–22 disposals and supplies 2–3–2–11 Immuno-Wash Fluid 2–23–2–26 reference fluid 2–12–2–17 when to change micro tip 2–14, 2–24 when to perform 2–3 Datalogger analysis 3–109, 3–114–3–124 accessing and searching files 3–117–3–124 closing current file 3–115–3–116 search criteria chemistry 3–109, 3–119–3–120 condition codes 3–109 environmental data 3–109, 3–122–3–123 error codes 3–124 incubator position 3–109, 3–121 Date/time of logged error 5–4 verifying after rebooting 5–12 Decontaminating the analyzer 2–74 Desiccant packs (humidity control)

Index–ii

loading for slide supply 2 2–40 Desiccant packs (humidity-control) expiration indicator 2–41 loading for slide supply 2 2–41 replacing 2–39–2–41 Diagnostics 3–1–3–126 screen display 3–1 complex tests 3–2, 3–38 hardware and chemistry information 3–2, 3–108– 3–126 lab computer protocol analyzer 3–1, 3–18 MEDS 3–1, 3–3–3–17 performance tests 3–2, 3–38–3–107 setup/adjust 3–2, 3–18–3–32 stand-alone tests 3–2, 3–33–3–37 subsystem tests 3–1, 3–18 Diluent supply, testing movement 3–6 Diluents, daily maintenance 2–18–2–22 changing diluents and checking stoppers 2–18–2– 20 configuring the diluent tray 2–21–2–22 Dilution, enabling and disabling 3–4, 3–14 Discard chutes, cleaning 2–51–2–54 Dispense blade/slide path, cleaning 2–55–2–56 Disposals and supplies, daily maintenance 2–3–2– 11 screen display 2–3 cleaning cup, height, and microcollection tip adapters 2–8 cleaning sample trays 2–7 emptying disposal boxes 2–4–2–6 loading mixing cup arrays and tips 2–9 verifying QC fluids run on slide lots 2–11 verifying slide inventory 2–10–2–11 Distilled water, bottles for 2–19 Drop detection test, sample metering 3–39, 3–44– 3–48 Dynamic test, reflectometer 3–59, 3–66–3–71 run time 3–66

E EEPROM versions, verifying 3–109 Electrical hazards xi Electrolyte reference fluid (ERF) label xix Electrometer A/D converter recalibration 3–91 MEDS 3–15 movement sequence 3–16 performance tests 3–91–3–101 auto checks 3–91, 3–96–3–99 basic modes 3–91 contact drive timing 3–91, 3–94–3–95

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

Version 2.0

Index

extended auto checks 3–91, 3–100–3–101 normal cycle 3–91, 3–92–3–93 Emptying disposal boxes. See Disposals and supplies Environmental data, datalogger analysis search criteria 3–109 Environmental monitoring 4–1–4–15 screen display 4–1 error conditions 4–2–4–15 incubator temperature control 4–2–4–5 slide supply humidity control 4–10–4–15 slide supply temperature control 4–6–4–9 voltage readings 4–15 Error codes. See Condition codes Error conditions environmental 4–2–4–15 troubleshooting 5–1–5–11 downloaded samples 5–11 error description on help screen 5–9 error log screen 5–3–5–6 help screens 5–7–5–10 possible causes 5–10 severity levels 5–1–5–3 suggestions for correction 5–10 Error log screen 5–3–5–6 accessing 5–3 condition code 5–4–5–5 displaying for different severity levels 5–6 initializing analyzer from 5–6 moving highlight bar 5–6 returning to previous screen 5–6 viewing new errors 5–3 Error messages downloaded samples 5–11 error log screen 5–5 troubleshooting help screen 5–8–5–9 Evaporation caps cleaning 2–57–2–61 new, part number 2–64 replacing 2–62–2–66 Exiting stand-alone diagnostics 3–37 Extended auto checks, electrometer 3–91, 3–100– 3–101 External reference slides. See White reference slides

F File verify 3–109, 3–125 Flags and codes on forms printer reports Fluid drop count updates 2–17, 2–26

G General precautions

Version 2.0

5–11

cleaning solutions moving parts xx

xx

H Hardware and chemistry information 3–2, 3–108– 3–126 condition code 3–108, 3–113 datalogger analysis 3–109, 3–114–3–124 recent history log 3–108, 3–110–3–112 software identification 3–109, 3–125–3–126 Hardware modifications sample handler label xiv slide supply label xiii Hardware troubleshooting 5–11–5–48 dispense-blade path jams 5–27–5–35 initializing analyzer 5–11 loading/resetting the analyzer 5–12 platen area jams 5–27–5–35 sample metering jams 5–15 sample tray jams 5–12–5–14 slide cartridge jams load door 5–16–5–19 slide supply access door 5–24–5–26 unload door 5–20–5–23 slide jams electrometer discard station/PM slide-eject position 5–41–5–44 tip-locator/metering area 5–45–5–48 transverse shuttle and CM/RT eject blade position 5–36–5–40 slide-dispense station jams 5–27–5–35 Height adapter cleaning 2–8 Help screens for troubleshooting 5–7–5–10 condition code and error message 5–8–5–9 error correction 5–10 error description 5–9 HELP target on error log screen 5–7 possible error causes 5–10 returning to error log screen 5–10 sample/test identification for rerunning 5–9 viewing additional text 5–10 High transmission slide (albumin) 3–47 History log, recent 3–110–3–112 Humidity control packs (magnesium chloride) loading for slide supply 1 2–40 Humidity control packs (magnesium-chloride) replacing 2–39–2–41 Humidity control, slide supply 4–10–4–15 Humidity errors 2–39 Humidity-control packs. See Desiccant packs Hysteresis test

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

Index–iii

Index

immuno-rate (IR) metering 3–81, 3–89–3–90 reference metering 3–72, 3–79 sample metering 3–39, 3–42

If 2–6 Immuno-rate (IR) metering performance tests 3–81–3–90 system 3–81, 3–84–3–90 timing 3–81, 3–82–3–83 Immuno-Wash Fluid changing micro tip and reservoir 2–24–2–26 daily maintenance 2–23–2–26 yellow label xix Immuno-Wash Fluid Reservoir when to change 2–24 Incubator cover, opening (illus) 2–29 evaporation caps cleaning 2–57–2–59 replacing 2–62–2–66 MEDS 3–15 movement sequence 3–16 performance tests 3–49–3–52 pad reflectance 3–49, 3–49–3–50 position timing 3–49, 3–51–3–52 slots, cleaning 2–59 temperature control 4–2–4–5 Incubator position, datalogger analysis search criteria 3–109 Initialization of analyzer (INITIALIZE target) 5–6, 5– 11 Inventory, slide 2–10–2–11 Iris adjustment. See Reflectometer iris

J Jams, clearing dispense blade path 5–27 dispense-blade path 5–35 platen area 5–27–5–35 sample tray 5–12–5–14 slide electrometer discard station/PM slide-eject position 5–41–5–44 tip-locator/metering area 5–45–5–48 transverse shuttle and CM/RT eject blade position 5–36–5–40 slide cartridge load door 5–16–5–19 slide supply access door 5–24–5–26 unload door 5–20–5–23

5–27–5–35

K Keypad cover, cleaning

I

Index–iv

slide-dispense station

2–35

L Lab computer communication problems 5–55–5–60 protocol analyzer 3–1, 3–18 Labels analyzer xii–xix lamp replacement instructions 2–42, 2–46 subsystem identification 5–8 Lamp changing. See Reflectometer lamp extract tool 2–42 hot surface label xv replacement instruction label 2–46 Leak test immuno-rate (IR) metering 3–81, 3–88–3–89 reference metering 3–72, 3–78–3–79 sample metering 3–39, 3–40–3–43 Liners mixing cup array and tip disposal box 2–5 mixing-cup array and tip disposal box 2–6 slide disposal box 2–5, 2–6 slide-disposal box 2–6 Loading mixing cup arrays and sample tips 2–9 Loading/resetting the analyzer program 5–12 Log screen, error 5–3–5–6 Loopback connector installing 3–37 TL-3225, in spare parts kit 3–34 tests 3–34–3–37 Low transmission slide (magnesium) 3–47

M Maintenance log 2–1 see samples at end of Chapter 2 Maintenance. See Periodic maintenance Malfunction severity level 5–2 Mechanical parts of analyzer, exercising 3–1 MEDS 3–1, 3–3–3–17 screen display 3–3 CM/RT eject movement sequence 3–16 electrometer movement sequence 3–15, 3–16 immuno-rate (IR) metering 3–14 incubator movement sequence 3–15, 3–16 PM eject movement sequence 3–16 proboscis movement sequence 3–11

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

Version 2.0

Index

pump movement sequence 3–13 reference metering 3–14 reflectometer 3–17 RESET target 3–3 sample fluid drop sequence 3–13 sample handler movement sequences 3–4–3–6 sample metering movement sequences 3–9–3–13 slide supplies 1 and 2 movement sequences 3–7– 3–8 transverse shuttle movement sequence 3–15, 3– 16 truck movement sequence 3–11 Metering jams, sample. See Jams, clearing Micro tip and reservoir changing Immuno-Wash Fluid 2–24–2–26 changing reference fluid 2–14–2–17 Microcollection tube adapter cleaning 2–8 Mixing cup array loading 2–9 Mixing-cup array testing movement 3–5 Module/error number error log screen 5–5 Movement sequences, MEDS CM/RT eject 3–16 electrometer 3–16 incubator 3–16 PM eject 3–16 proboscis 3–11 pump 3–13 sample fluid drop 3–13 sample handler 3–5–3–6 sample metering 3–10–3–13 slide supplies 1 and 2 3–8 transverse shuttle 3–16 truck 3–11 Moving parts, caution with xx

N NEXT/PREVIOUS SCREEN targets on troubleshooting help screen

Q 5–10

O Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) standards 2–1, 2–74

P Parts replacing 6–1–6–14 Performance tests 3–2, 3–38–3–107

Version 2.0

cartridge handling 3–102–3–107 electrometer 3–91–3–101 immuno-rate (IR) metering 3–81–3–90 incubator 3–49–3–52 PSID scanner 3–53–3–58 reference metering 3–72–3–80 reflectometer 3–59–3–71 sample metering 3–39–3–48 Periodic maintenance 2–1–2–74 screen display 2–2 as-required procedures 2–38–2–73 daily procedures 2–3–2–26 decontaminating the analyzer 2–74 preparing for 2–1–2–2 safety precautions 2–1 waste materials 2–1 weekly procedures 2–27–2–37 what to wear while performing 2–1 who should perform xx Plunger count test, cartridge handling 3–102 PM eject, MEDS movement sequence 3–16 PM slide-eject position clearing jams 5–41–5–44 Power does not go on 5–50 Precautions. See Safeguards and precautions Printer, Okidata reinstalling ribbon cartridge 6–14 replacing printhead 6–11–6–14 Printing problems 5–51–5–54 Proboscis movement sequence 3–11 Proboscis, cleaning 2–67–2–72 PSID scanner cleaning window 2–72–2–73 performance tests 3–53–3–58 tool slide test 3–53–3–56 user samples test 3–57–3–58 PSID Alignment Tool, TL-4531 3–53, 3–54 Pump movement sequence 3–13

Quality control (QC) fluids backing up data 2–35 running daily 2–11 situations requiring 2–33, 2–48, 3–31

R Rate/CM correction factor test 3–19–3–28 after performing test 3–28 assay values 3–20, 3–21, 3–23 before performing test 3–19

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

Index–v

Index

correction factors displaying and printing 3–25 how to update 3–28 summary screen 3–24 when to update 3–27 disposing of/reusing slides 3–24 positioning reference slides 3–23 standard deviations 3–26 summary screen 3–26 time to complete test 3–24 when to perform 3–19, 3–28 Rebooting the analyzer program 5–12 Recent history log 3–108, 3–110–3–112 Reference fluid changing micro tip and reservoir 2–14–2–17 daily maintenance 2–12–2–17 Reference Fluid Reservoir when to change 2–14 Reference metering enabling and disabling 3–15 performance tests 3–72–3–80 system 3–72, 3–74–3–80 timing 3–72, 3–73 Reference Set 1–1 Reference slides. See Slides, reference Reflectometer MEDS 3–17 performance tests 3–59–3–71 dynamic 3–59, 3–66–3–71 shutter 3–59, 3–59–3–60 static 3–59, 3–61–3–65 Reflectometer iris, adjusting 2–43–2–48 filter (voltage) adjustment guidelines 2–46, 3–30 filter (voltage) verification guidelines 2–47, 3–31 noting voltage reading 2–45 setting voltage 2–46 see also Chapter 3, Diagnostics Reflectometer lamp changing 2–42–2–43 instructions on label 2–42 safety door 2–42, 2–43 stabilizing new lamp 2–43, 3–30 Reflectometer Lamp-Extracting Tool, TL-3372 2–42 Replacing parts 6–1–6–14 installing slide supply rotor sensor 6–1–6–6 replacing printhead on Okidata printer 6–11–6– 14 replacing slide supply dispense blade 6–7–6–10 Reports, forms printer flags and codes 5–11 Reservoirs (Immuno-Wash Fluid and reference fluid) cleaning covers and seals 2–16–2–17, 2–25–2– 26

Index–vi

RESET target, MEDS 3–3 RETURN target on error log screen 5–6 on troubleshooting help screen 5–10 Ribbon cartridge, reinstalling 6–14 ROM versions, verifying 3–109 Rotor movement test, cartridge handling 3–105–3– 107 Rotor sensors, replacing 6–1–6–6 Rubber stoppers replacing 2–19–2–20

S Safeguards and precautions viii–xx analyzer labels xii–xix electrical hazards xi general xx laser light warning x Saline, bottles for 2–19 Sample fluid drop sequence 3–13 Sample handler MEDS movement sequences 3–4–3–6 diluent supply 3–6 mixing-cup array 3–5 tip supply 3–5 tray transport 3–5 Sample metering clearing jams 5–15 MEDS movement sequences 3–9–3–13 pump/sample fluid drop 3–12–3–13 truck/proboscis 3–10–3–11 path, cleaning 2–36 performance tests 3–39–3–48 drop detection 3–39, 3–44–3–48 leak/hysteresis 3–39, 3–40–3–43 tubing pt no 994659, in spare parts kit 2–50 replacing 2–49–2–50 Sample tips loading 2–9 Sample trays, cleaning and inspecting 2–7 Sample/test identification troubleshooting help screen 5–9 Samples, downloaded error messages 5–11 Screen, touch not functioning properly 5–49 targets not responding 5–50 Screen-saver feature 5–49 Search criteria, datalogger files 3–117–3–124 chemistry 3–119–3–120 environmental data 3–122–3–123

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

Version 2.0

Index

error codes 3–124 incubator position 3–121 Self-diagnostic features 5–1–5–11 error conditions 5–1–5–6 error messages for downloaded samples 5–11 help screens 5–7–5–10 Serial numbers name plate on sample handler xiii name plate on slide processor xiii Setup/adjust 3–2, 3–18–3–32 current setup values 3–32 Rate/CM correction factor test 3–19–3–28 reflectometer iris adjustment 3–29–3–31 Severity levels 5–1–5–3 action 5–2 attention 5–2 malfunction 5–2 on error log screen 5–5, 5–6 shutdown 5–3 transient 5–2 Shutter test, reflectometer 3–59, 3–59–3–60 Shutting down the analyzer 5–12 see also Operator’s Manual, Chapter 4 Signal processing test immuno-rate (IR) metering 3–81, 3–87 reference metering 3–72, 3–77 Slide Box Liner 2–6 Slide cartridges, clearing jams load door 5–16–5–19 slide supply access door 5–24–5–26 unload door 5–20–5–23 Slide disposal box 2–5 capacity 2–4 liner 2–6 Slide inventory, verifying 2–10–2–11 Slide supplies humidity control 4–10–4–15 MEDS 3–7–3–8 movement sequences 3–8 temperature control 4–6–4–9 Slide supply dispense blade replacing 6–7–6–10 Slide-disposal box liner 2–6 Slides, reference 3–27 black reference 3–19, 3–23 disposal of used 3–24 external (correction factor) 3–19, 3–20, 3–21, 3–67, 3–68 internal (permanent) reference 2–57, 2–62, 3– 61, 3–67 Software

Version 2.0

control, returning to 3–37 identification 3–109, 3–125–3–126 Stand-alone diagnostics 3–2, 3–33–3–37 loopback tests 3–34–3–37 Static test, reflectometer 3–59, 3–61–3–65 Stoppers, rubber replacing 2–19–2–20 Subsystem tests 3–1, 3–18 Subsystems, analyzer front view 5–9 labels indicating letter designation and location 5– 8, 5–9 top view 5–8 Supplies and disposals, daily maintenance. See Disposals and supplies, daily maintenance System tests immuno-rate (IR) metering 3–81, 3–84–3–90 hysteresis test 3–81, 3–89–3–90 installing tool reservoir and tip 3–85–3–87 leak test 3–81, 3–88–3–89 signal processing 3–81, 3–87 transducer check 3–81, 3–88 reference metering 3–74–3–80 hysteresis test 3–72, 3–79 installing tool reservoir and tip 3–75–3–77, 3– 80 leak test 3–72, 3–78–3–79 signal processing test 3–72, 3–77 transducer check 3–72, 3–78

T Temperature control incubator 4–2–4–5 slide supplies 4–6–4–9 Tip Rack 2–9 Tip rack transport belt (illus) 2–9 Tip supply, testing movement 3–5 Tip/Cup Array Liner 2–6 Tip-locator assembly, weekly cleaning 2–29–2–33 Tip-locator/metering area clearing jams 5–45–5–48 Tool reservoir and tip, installing immuno-rate (IR) metering 3–85–3–87 reference metering 3–75–3–77, 3–80 Touch screen cleaning 2–34 screen saver 5–49 Transducer check immuno-rate (IR) metering 3–81, 3–88 reference metering 3–72, 3–78 sample metering 3–39, 3–41 Transient severity level 5–2

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

Index–vii

Index

Transport arm, cleaning 2–28 Transverse shuttle clearing jams 5–36–5–40 MEDS movement sequence 3–15, 3–16 Tray jams, clearing 5–12–5–14 Tray platform and hook, cleaning 2–28 Tray transport, movement sequence 3–5 Trays, sample. See Sample trays Troubleshooting 5–1–5–60 general procedures 5–49–5–60 hardware 5–11–5–48 self-diagnostic features 5–1–5–11 Truck movement sequence 3–11 Tube adapter, cleaning 2–8

U Universal precautions, OSHA 2–1, 2–74 UP/DOWN targets, error log screen 5–6

screen display 2–27 backing up QC, Config, and Calibration data 2–35 cleaning cup retainer 2–34 keypad cover 2–35 sample metering path 2–36 sample-metering path 2–36 tip-locator assembly 2–29–2–33 touch screen 2–34– tray platform and transport arm 2–28 inspecting air filter 2–37 White correction factor slides. See White reference slides White correction factors 3–21, 3–49 White reference slides external (correction factor) 3–19, 3–20, 3–21, 3–67, 3–68 positioning in incubator 3–23, 3–68–3–70 internal (permanent) reference 2–57, 2–62

V Verifying quality-control fluids run on slide lots 2–11 slide inventory 2–10–2–11 VITROS (7% BSA)/Bovine Serum Albumin 2–19 VITROS Black Reference Slides 3–19 VITROS Micro Tip when to change 2–14, 2–24 VITROS Urine Electrolyte Diluent 2–19 VITROS VersaTips 2–9 VITROS White Reference Slides 3–19 Voltage readings, power monitoring 4–15 Voltages A/D reference check 3–44 moving iris control switch to adjust 2–46, 3–30 reference and resolution 3–40 target, when adjusting reflectometer iris 2–46, 3– 30 target, when verifying reflectometer iris 2–47, 3– 31

W Warnings adjustments to Rate/CM correction factors 3–19, 3–28 cleaning materials used for biohazard procedures xx Immuno-Wash Fluid reservoir 2–25 laser light x, 2–72 when removing printhead on Okidata printer 6–12 when replacing sample metering tube 2–49 Weekly maintenance 2–27–2–37

Index–viii

VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide

Version 2.0

Ortho-Clinical Diagnostics, Inc. 100 Indigo Creek Drive Rochester, New York 14626-5101

EC

REP

Ortho-Clinical Diagnostics Johnson & Johnson 50 - 100 Holmers Farm Way High Wycombe Buckinghamshire HP12 4DP United Kingdom

Part No. J23232

Maintenance & Diagnostics Guide Supplement for 250AT Systems

Export authorized under general license GTDA (General Technical Data Available) IMPORTANT The information contained herein is based on the experience and knowledge relating to the subject matter gained by Ortho-Clinical Diagnostics, Inc. prior to publication. No patent license is granted by the information. Ortho-Clinical Diagnostics, Inc. reserves the right to change this information without notice, and makes no warranty, express or implied, with respect to the information. The company shall not be liable for any loss or damage including consequential or special damages, resulting from the use of this information, even if loss or damage is caused by its negligence or other fault. Vitros is a trademark of Ortho-Clinical Diagnostics, Inc.

© Ortho-Clinical Diagnostics, Inc., 2001. All rights reserved.

Printed in USA.

10/01.

Important Safeguards and Precautions

Vitros 250 Chemistry System Maintenance & Diagnostics Guide Supplement for 250AT Systems Revision History

Revision Date 10/01

Description Reflects revised information: • Daily Maintenance Log

2/00

First release of manual. Reflects version 7.0 of the software.

Rev. 10/01 Vitros 250 Chemistry System Maintenance & Diagnostics Guide Supplement for 250AT Systems

i

Important Safeguards and Precautions

Vitros 250 System Maintenance & Diagnostics Guide Supplement for 250AT Systems List of Effective Pages Each page in your manual should be at the publication date listed below.

Publication Date

ii

Section

Page

10/01

Chapter 2 - Periodic Maintenance

Daily Maintenance Log

2/00

All sections

All pages

Vitros 250 Chemistry System Maintenance & Diagnostics Guide Supplement for 250AT Systems Rev. 10/01

Important Safeguards and Precautions Safeguards and Precautions for Vitros 250AT Chemistry Systems

Analyzer Labels

Follow the “Important Safeguards and Precautions” documented in the Vitros 250 Chemistry System Maintenance & Diagnostics Guide when operating the 250AT System. In addition, follow safety precautions and procedures provided by your automation vendor when working with the automation track. The Vitros 250AT Chemistry System uses the same agency-approved, warning, safety, and miscellaneous labels as found on the 250 System. Refer to the “Important Safeguards and Precautions” in the Vitros 250 Chemistry System Maintenance & Diagnostics Guide for illustrations of these labels. There are two additional labels found on the 250AT System: • Ports • Mechanical Pinch-Point (Sample Metering) Illustrations showing their locations follow.

2/00

Vitros 250 Chemistry System Maintenance & Diagnostics Guide Supplement for 250AT Systems

iii

Important Safeguards and Precautions

Ports

Mechanical Pinch Point (Sample Metering)

iv

Vitros 250 Chemistry System Maintenance & Diagnostics Guide Supplement for 250AT Systems

2/00

1 Welcome About this Supplement

This Supplement contains specific information for users of Automation Systems. It is designed for use in conjunction with the Vitros 250 Chemistry System Maintenance & Diagnostics Guide. The Supplement consists of two sections. The Operator’s Manual Supplement for 250AT Systems contains supplemental information for your Vitros 250 Chemistry System Operator’s Manual. The Maintenance & Diagnostics Guide Supplement for 250AT Systems contains AT-specific information that supplements the Vitros 250 Chemistry System Maintenance & Diagnostics Guide. The Vitros 250AT Chemistry System will provide optimum performance when you use it according to recommended operating and periodic maintenance instructions. (See the Operator’s Manual for the operating instructions, and Chapter 2, “Periodic Maintenance” in the Maintenance & Diagnostics volume and in this Supplement.) Be sure to perform all daily, weekly, and asrequired maintenance procedures to keep your equipment running efficiently and to ensure reliable results. Sample maintenance logs are provided at the end of Chapter 2 for your convenience. Complete a maintenance log each time you perform maintenance procedures. Should you encounter any difficulties in daily operation of the equipment, consult Chapter 3, “Diagnostics,” or Chapter 5, “Troubleshooting,” in the Maintenance & Diagnostics volume and in this Supplement. Should you encounter further difficulties, contact your Customer Support Representative for assistance.

2/00

Vitros 250AT Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide Supplement for 250AT Systems

1–1

Welcome

1–2

Vitros 250AT Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide Supplement for 250AT Systems

2/00

2 Periodic Maintenance Preparing for Periodic Maintenance

This chapter provides you with information for maintaining the Vitros 250AT Chemistry System. This information is designed to supplement the procedures found in the “Periodic Maintenance” chapter of the Vitros 250 Chemistry System Maintenance & Diagnostics Guide. You should become familiar with both of these chapters before performing maintenance procedures. NOTE: You may leave the analyzer on, unless specified otherwise; but do not process samples while you perform maintenance procedures. After performing each maintenance procedure, make a record of it on a maintenance log. There are sample logs designed for use with the 250AT System at the end of this chapter. You may copy them for your use, or you may want to establish a customized maintenance log for your own laboratory. If questions arise on maintenance and diagnostics during daily operation of the analyzer, read the Vitros 250 Chemistry System Maintenance & Diagnostics Guide carefully. Refer to this Supplement for procedures that are specific to the 250AT System. If you still need assistance, contact your Customer Support Representative. WARNING:

Assume that all used equipment is contaminated with potentially infectious biological material. Use the “Universal Precautions” recommended by OSHA (Occupational Safety and Health Administration) Bloodborne Pathogen Standard 29CFR1910.1030 when handling or cleaning equipment. In particular:

•Wear gloves, closed shoes, buttoned lab coats, and safety glasses throughout the cleaning and maintenance process. •Treat all waste materials used in the cleaning process as contaminated. Follow the site procedures for your laboratory to dispose of these materials. •Handle all equipment with care. Mechanical parts may have edges, pinch points, and corners that could potentially cause injury. Refer to the “Important Safeguards and Precautions” at the beginning of the Maintenance & Diagnostics Guide for more information. In addition, refer to the NCCLS guidelines for

2/00

Vitros 250 Chemistry System Maintenance & Diagnostics Guide Supplement for 250AT Systems

2–1

Periodic Maintenance Preparing for Periodic Maintenance

“Protection of Laboratory Workers from Instrument Biohazards” (NCCLS Document M29-A). To access the Periodic Maintenance screen and begin using the periodic maintenance features, touch PERIODIC MAINTENANCE on the Main Menu.

SAMPLING

REMOTE ENABLED READY

LAB COMP : TESTING COMPLETE

PERIODIC MAINTENANCE

Apr 24 XX 14:13:12

ON

OFF

VX.XX**250 PM00A

Categories:

DAILY MAINTENANCE

WEEKLY MAINTENANCE

AS REQUIRED MAINTENANCE

> Touch a target to select a category. RETURN

HELP

Instructions on using the daily, weekly, and periodic maintenance features are found in the “Periodic Maintenance” chapter of the Vitros 250 Chemistry System Maintenance & Diagnostics Guide. The procedures documented in that volume also apply to 250AT Systems.

2–2

Vitros 250 Chemistry System Maintenance & Diagnostics Guide Supplement for 250AT Systems

2/00

Daily Maintenance Log Month/Year Daily* - Check (✓) Boxes

Verify slide inventory/load cartridges

*Maintenance every 24 hours unless otherwise specified.

Empty mixing cup array / tip disposal box Empty slide disposal box Empty cartridge disposal box Inspect sample trays; tube, cup, and height adaptors Load mixing cup arrays Load sample tips Change Reference Fluid micro tip and clean Reference Fluid proboscis (every 8 hours) Install new Reference Fluid disposable reservoir (white label) Clean Reference Fluid cover/seal Change Immuno-Wash Fluid micro tip and clean Immuno-Wash Fluid proboscis (every 8 hours) Install new Immuno-Wash Fluid disposable reservoir (yellow label) (every 72 hours) Clean Immuno-Wash Fluid cover/seal Inspect diluent tray and bottles Check diluent levels and replace if required Clean diluent caps Load diluent tray on analyzer Verify correct date/time on screen Verify that daily QC has been run Operator’s Initials

2

3

4

5

Analyzer J Number

1

6

7

8

Reviewed by __________________________________________

9

Vitros 250AT Chemistry System Analyzer Serial Number Day

Part Number J11698 Rev. 10/01

10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31

Date _____________________

Analyzer J Number

Weekly and As-Required Maintenance Log Month/Year

Analyzer Serial Number

Replace humidity control packs in Slide Supply 1

Date

Date

Initial

Initial

Vitros 250AT Chemistry System

Clean tray platform and transport arm

Replace desiccant packs in Slide Supply 2

As Required

Clean cup retainer

Replace tubing on sample metering proboscis

Week 5

Clean diluent bottles

Replace or clean incubator evaporation caps

Week 4

Clean tip locator assembly

Replace reference fluid seal

Week 3

Clean control unit screen

Replace Immuno-Wash Fluid seal

Week 2

Clean keypad cover

Replace diluent caps

Week 1

Inspect, clean, and/or replace air filter

Clean slide discard chutes

Weekly—Date/Initial Boxes

Back up QC/Config/Calibration Data

Clean analyzer cabinetry

Clean ATL linear rail (see ATL Guide)

Date _____________________

Printed in U.S.A.

Part Number J11698 Rev. 10/01.

Vitros is a trademark of Ortho-Clinical Diagnostics, Inc.

Ortho-Clinical Diagnostics, Inc. 100 Indigo Creek Drive Rochester, New York 14626-5101

Replace ATL air filter (see Vitros ATL Guide)

Every 6 Months - Date/Initial Boxes

Archive patient results

Perform Rate/CM Correction Factors test

Adjust reflectometer iris

Replace reflectometer lamp

Clean dispense blade/slide path

Clean sample metering proboscis

Clean incubator evaporation caps and slots

Clean ATL bowl (see Vitros ATL Guide)

Operator’s Initials

Reviewed by __________________________________________

 Ortho- Clinical Diagnostics, Inc., 2001.

3 Diagnostics Using the Diagnostics Function

Using the Diagnostics menu, you can access several of the diagnostics features provided with the Vitros 250AT Chemistry System. These features may be helpful should you encounter any difficulties in daily operation of the equipment. This chapter describes Diagnostics functions that specifically apply to the Vitros 250AT Chemistry System. Refer to the “Diagnostics” chapter of the Vitros 250 Chemistry System Maintenance & Diagnostics Guide for a description of Diagnostics procedures used for both 250 Chemistry Systems and 250AT Chemistry Systems. To access the diagnostics screen, touch DIAGNOSTICS on the Main Menu.

SAMPLING

REMOTE ENABLED READY

LAB COMP : TESTING COMPLETE

14:13:12 ON

OFF

VX.XX**250 MD00A

DIAGNOSTICS SETUP/ ADJUST

PERFORMANCE TESTS

SUBSYSTEM TESTS

STANDALONE DIAGNOSTIC TESTS

HARDWARE AND CHEM INFO

LAB COMP PROTOCOL ANALYZER

COMPLEX TESTS

MEDS

May 19 XX

> Touch a target to select a function.

RETURN

HELP

The features available on this screen are: • MEDS. Lets you exercise the mechanical parts of the analyzer. You can also use MEDS for multiple moves within or across subsystems. • SUBSYSTEM TESTS. Lets the Ortho-Clinical Diagnostics Field Engineer run electromechanical diagnostics. • LAB COMP PROTOCOL ANALYZER. Displays all characters transmitted to and from the laboratory computer. This feature is useful in troubleshooting the laboratory computer interface.

2/00

Vitros 250 Chemistry System Maintenance & Diagnostics Guide Supplement for 250AT Systems

3–1

Diagnostics Mechanism Exercise Diagnostics (MEDS)

• SETUP/ADJUST. Lets you perform the Rate/CM correction factor test (white/black correction factors), adjust the reflectometer iris, and display current setup values. This feature also lets the Field Engineer set up and adjust sample metering, read sync, and slide transport. • STANDALONE DIAGNOSTICS TESTS. Lets you perform the loopback test that verifies the operation of any of the three output device ports for either printer or for the lab computer interface. All other stand-alone diagnostics are for Field Engineer use only. They allow the Field Engineer to determine the status of various subsystems outside the control software. • COMPLEX TESTS. Lets the Field Engineer perform electromechanical simulations. • PERFORMANCE TESTS. Lets you perform tests and generate statistics on selected analyzer subsystems. • HARDWARE AND CHEM INFO. Provides error history, datalogger analysis, and software identification.

Mechanism Exercise Diagnostics (MEDS)

Using Mechanism Exercise Diagnostics (MEDS), you can perform basic movements of the analyzer one at a time. This can help you diagnose any problems that may exist in the analyzer. To access the MEDS screen: 1. Touch DIAGNOSTICS on the Main Menu. 2. Touch MEDS on the main Diagnostics screen.

3–2

Vitros 250 Chemistry System Maintenance & Diagnostics Guide Supplement for 250AT Systems

2/00

Diagnostics Mechanism Exercise Diagnostics (MEDS)

SAMPLING REMOTE ENABLED

READY

LAB COMP : TESTING COMPLETE

MEDS – Main Menu SAMPLE HANDLER

SAMPLE METERING

REFLECTOMETER

SLIDE SUPPLY 1

RM/IR METERING

EXTERNAL TIP SUPPLY

SLIDE SUPPLY 2

INCUBATOR

Apr 24 XX 14:13:12

ON

OFF

VX.XX**250 ME00A

> Touch a target to select a function. RETURN

HELP

3. Touch the target for the mechanism you want to exercise. Additional targets will appear for each selection. The EXTERNAL TIP SUPPLY target appears only if automation is enabled. 4. Touch RETURN to exit MEDS. The following pages show the MEDS submenus that are specific to 250AT Systems and suggested movement sequences. Submenus used to exercise 250AT System mechanisms include: • MEDS Sample Metering — Truck/Proboscis — Pump/Sample Fluid Drop • MEDS External Tip Supply Refer to the “Diagnostics” chapter of the Vitros 250 Chemistry System Maintenance & Diagnostics Guide for a complete description of all other submenus.

2/00

Vitros 250 Chemistry System Maintenance & Diagnostics Guide Supplement for 250AT Systems

3–3

Diagnostics MEDS Sample Metering

IMPORTANT:Each screen that appears has a RESET target at the bottom. Touch the RESET target before returning to the MEDS Main Menu after you have finished exercising a mechanism. For example, after exercising sample metering, touch the RESET SAMPLE METERING target before you return to the MEDS Main Menu.

MEDS Sample Metering

Touch SAMPLE METERING on the MEDS Main Menu to display the Sample Metering menu.

SAMPLING

REMOTE ENABLED READY

LAB COMP : TESTING COMPLETE

MEDS – Main Menu – Sample Metering

Feb 22 XX 14:13:12

ON

OFF

VX.XX**250 ME04A

TRUCK / PROBOSCIS PUMP / SAMPLE FLUID DROP

> Touch a target to select a function. RETURN

RETURN TO MAIN DIAG MENU

HELP

• Touch TRUCK/PROBOSCIS to display the Truck/Proboscis screen. • Touch PUMP/SAMPLE FLUID DROP to display the Pump/ Sample Fluid Drop screen. • Touch RETURN to return to the Main MEDS screen, or touch RETURN TO MAIN DIAG MENU to return to the main Diagnostics screen.

3–4

Vitros 250 Chemistry System Maintenance & Diagnostics Guide Supplement for 250AT Systems

2/00

Diagnostics MEDS Sample Metering Movement Sequences— Truck/Proboscis

MEDS Sample Metering Movement Sequences— Truck/Proboscis SAMPLING REMOTE ENABLED

READY

LAB COMP : TESTING COMPLETE

Apr 24 XX 14:13:12

ON

OFF

VX.XX**250 ME04B MEDS – Main Menu – Sample Metering – Truck/Proboscis | - - - - - - - - - - -- - - Truck - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - | | - - - - - - - - - - - Proboscis - - - - - - -- - - - - - -| SAMPLE

MIX CUP RIGHT

CM / RT METERING

HOME

METERING PAUSE

TIP SEAL

SAHA REFERENCE POSITION

DILUENT TRAY / TIP EJECT

CYCLE TRUCK

DILUENT

METERING

CYCLE PROBOSCIS

TIP PICK-UP

TIP SEAL

RESET TRUCK

SAMPLE CUP BOTTOM

TIP PICK-UP

RESET PROBOSCIS

MIX CUP LEFT

PM METERING

MIXING CUP BOTTOM

TIP EJECT

> Touch a target to select a function. RETURN

RETURN TO MAIN DIAG MENU

INTERNAL

RESET SAMPLE METERING

HELP

• Touch RESET SAMPLE METERING before and after exercising any of the sample metering mechanisms. • To exercise the sample metering mechanisms, follow the sequences listed below. The truck, proboscis, and pump must be moved in a specific sequence, or you will receive an error message and the movement will not occur. Touch the RESET target under each mechanism if the mechanism is lost. • Touch RETURN to return to the main Sample Metering screen, or touch RETURN TO MAIN DIAG MENU to return to the main Diagnostics screen. Truck Movement Sequence • If you are at the MEDS Sample Metering screen, touch TRUCK/ PROBOSCIS to get to the Truck/Proboscis screen. • The INTERNAL/EXTERNAL target acts as a toggle switch. It displays the metering mechanism currently available for selection. If INTERNAL is displayed, it means that the external metering mechanism (used when sampling from the automation track) is already selected and will be used in the truck movement sequence. If you touch the target, it will toggle to the internal metering mechanism and EXTERNAL will display. Touch the target if you want to test the metering mechanism shown; that is, if the target displays INTERNAL you can touch it to toggle to internal. If the target displays

2/00

Vitros 250 Chemistry System Maintenance & Diagnostics Guide Supplement for 250AT Systems

3–5

Diagnostics MEDS Sample Metering Movement Sequences— Truck/Proboscis

EXTERNAL, you can touch it to toggle to the external mechanism. Touch the targets in the following order. 1. RESET SAMPLE METERING 2. SAHA REFERENCE 3. DILUENT TRAY/TIP EJECT 4. TIP PICKUP 5. SAMPLE 6. MIX CUP LEFT 7. MIX CUP RIGHT 8. PM METERING 9. CM/RT METERING 10. TIP SEAL 11. RESET TRUCK 12. CYCLE TRUCK 13. RESET SAMPLE METERING Proboscis Movement Sequence • If you are at the MEDS Sample Metering screen, touch TRUCK/ PROBOSCIS to get to the Truck/Proboscis screen. Pull the tip tray out of the sample metering path, then touch the targets in the following order. 1. RESET SAMPLE METERING 2. HOME 3. DILUENT TRAY/TIP EJECT 4. DILUENT 5. RESET SAMPLE METERING 6. SAMPLE 7. SAMPLE CUP BOTTOM 8. RESET SAMPLE METERING 9. PM METERING 10. METERING PAUSE 11. METERING 12. RESET SAMPLE METERING

3–6

Vitros 250 Chemistry System Maintenance & Diagnostics Guide Supplement for 250AT Systems

2/00

Diagnostics MEDS Sample Metering Movement Sequences—Pump/Sample Fluid Drop

MEDS Sample Metering Movement Sequences—Pump/Sample Fluid Drop SAMPLING LAB COMP : TESTING COMPLETE

READY

Feb 22 XX 14:13:12

ON

OFF

VX.XX**250 ME04C MEDS – Main Menu – Sample Metering – Pump / Sample Fluid Drop | - - - Sample Fluid Drop - - -| | - - - - - - - - - - - - - Pump - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - | WETNESS SENSING ON | OFF

PICKUP TIP

METER

PRESSURE SENSING ON | OFF

ASPIRATE DROP

CYCLE PUMP HALF STEP

WETNESS EMITTER ON | OFF

METER SAMPLE DROP

ASPIRATE

RESET PUMP

CYCLE PUMP FULL STEP

CYCLE SAMPLE METERING

EJECT TIP

> Touch a target to select a function. RETURN

RETURN TO MAIN DIAG MENU

INTERNAL

RESET SAMPLE METERING

HELP

• Touch RESET SAMPLE METERING before and after exercising any of the sample metering mechanisms. • To exercise the sample metering mechanisms, follow the sequences listed below. The truck, proboscis, and pump must be moved in a specific sequence, or you will receive an error message and the movement will not occur. Touch the RESET target under each mechanism if the mechanism is lost. • Touch RETURN to return to the main Sample Metering screen, or touch RETURN TO MAIN DIAG MENU to return to the main Diagnostics screen.

Pump Movement Sequence • If you are at the MEDS Sample Metering screen, touch PUMP/ SAMPLE FLUID DROP to get to the Pump/Sample Fluid Drop screen. Touch the targets in the following order. 1. RESET SAMPLE METERING 2. ASPIRATE 3. METER 4. CYCLE PUMP HALF STEP 5. CYCLE PUMP FULL STEP 6. RESET SAMPLE METERING

2/00

Vitros 250 Chemistry System Maintenance & Diagnostics Guide Supplement for 250AT Systems

3–7

Diagnostics MEDS Sample Metering Movement Sequences—Pump/Sample Fluid Drop

Sample Fluid Drop Sequence • If you are at the MEDS Sample Metering screen, touch PUMP/ SAMPLE FLUID DROP to get to the Pump/Sample Fluid Drop screen. IMPORTANT: 1. Make sure the tip tray is in the metering path with tips in the tray. 2. Make sure a sample container is in place with fluid in it (use the target MOVE TRAY N TO METERING on the Sample Handler screen). 3. Make sure that a slide is in place before you meter (use steps 1-8 of the exercise procedure under Slide Supplies 1 & 2 to move a slide to the metering position). • The INTERNAL/EXTERNAL target acts as a toggle switch. It displays the metering mechanism currently available for selection. If INTERNAL is displayed, it means that the external metering mechanism is already selected and will be used in the sample fluid drop sequence. If you touch the target, it will toggle to the internal metering mechanism and EXTERNAL will display. Touch the target if you want to test the metering mechanism shown; that is, if the target displays INTERNAL you can touch it to toggle to internal. If the target displays EXTERNAL, touch it to toggle to the external mechanism. Touch the targets in the following order. 1. RESET SAMPLE METERING 2. PICKUP TIP 3. ASPIRATE DROP 4. METER SAMPLE DROP 5. EJECT TIP 6. CYCLE SAMPLE METERING 7. RESET SAMPLE METERING

3–8

Vitros 250 Chemistry System Maintenance & Diagnostics Guide Supplement for 250AT Systems

2/00

Diagnostics MEDS External Tip Supply

MEDS External Tip Supply

This sequence tests the Automatic Tip Loader and its delivery of tips to the tip shuttle.

SAMPLING REMOTE ENABLED

READY

LAB COMP : TESTING COMPLETE

MEDS – External Tip Supply

PRESENT TIP

RESET SHUTTLE

HOME SHUTTLE

CYCLE SHUTTLE

Feb 22 XX 14:13:12

ON

OFF

VX.XX**250 ME08A

DELIVER TIP

> Touch a target to select a function. RETURN

RETURN TO MAIN DIAG MENU

RESET TIP LOADER

HELP

• Touch RESET TIP LOADER before selecting the first External Tip Supply target. • Touch any other target to exercise the selected mechanism. • Touch RETURN to return to the main MEDS screen, or touch RETURN TO MAIN DIAG MENU to return to the main Diagnostics screen.

2/00

Vitros 250 Chemistry System Maintenance & Diagnostics Guide Supplement for 250AT Systems

3–9

Diagnostics MEDS External Tip Supply

3–10

Vitros 250 Chemistry System Maintenance & Diagnostics Guide Supplement for 250AT Systems

2/00

4 Environmental Monitoring Environmental Monitoring

You can use this diagnostic feature to review the status of the environmentally controlled stations and the power supplies. After you touch the ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING target on the Main Menu, the following screen is displayed.

Apr 24 XX

SAMPLING

REMOTE ENABLED READY

LAB COMP : TESTING COMPLETE

14:13:12 ON

OFF

VX.XX**250 ME15A

ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING Temperature 1 Incubator 35.86* Slide Supply 1 25.51* Slide Supply 2 22.19 Reflectometer 69.00 Ambient 22.85 POWER SUPPLY 5V Slide Supply/Cart.Load 5.15 Incubator/Immuno-Rate 5.15 Ref. Mtrng/Slide Transport 5.15 Sample Handler 0.00* Sample Metering 5.00 Electrometer 4.96 Reflectometer 5.03

Temperature 2 36.37*

Relative Humidity 33.40 29.00*

12V 11.77 11.68 11.77

–12V –12.20 –12.10 –12.05

15V 14.30 13.20* 13.20*

14.97

–15V –16.62* –14.91 –14.86

24VM 23.86 24.05 23.86 0.00* 23.86

24VF 23.50 23.86 23.50 0.00* 23.86 23.83

> Station and voltage readings are updated on a ten-second interval. NOTE: Flashing * indicates station or voltage readings not within spec. RETURN

HELP

Environmental Monitoring functions for the Vitros 250AT Chemistry System are identical to those for the 250 System. Refer to the “Environmental Monitoring” chapter of the Vitros 250 Chemistry System Maintenance & Diagnostics Guide for a complete description of these functions.

2/00

Vitros 250 Chemistry System Maintenance & Diagnostics Guide Supplement for 250AT Systems

4–1

Environmental Monitoring Environmental Monitoring

4–2

Vitros 250 Chemistry System Maintenance & Diagnostics Guide Supplement for 250AT Systems

2/00

5 Troubleshooting This chapter provides information that you need to know when resolving conditions concerning the Vitros 250AT Chemistry System. Refer to the “Troubleshooting” chapter of the Vitros 250AT Chemistry System Maintenance & Diagnostics Guide for complete troubleshooting instructions. Contact your lab automation vendor for help in resolving conditions involving the automation system.

Loading/Resetting (Rebooting) the To load or reset the 250AT System analyzer program: Analyzer Program 1. Shut down the analyzer by touching the SHUTDOWN ANALYZER target on the Main Menu. — If the touchscreen is not working, continue with Step 4 of this procedure. 2. Type “Y” and press the Enter key on the keyboard when prompted. 3. Wait until you see the message, “The analyzer has been shut down. Reset or power down is required.” 4. Turn off the analyzer’s main power switch (O or OFF). Leave the analyzer turned off for at least two minutes before turning the analyzer back on. 5. If you are using an optional Automatic Tip Loader (ATL), turn off the ATL. 6. Turn the ATL back on, if applicable. Wait until the message “WAITING FOR ANALYZER” is displayed. 7. Turn on the analyzer’s main power switch (I or ON). Wait for the Main Menu to appear (approximately ten minutes). 8. Verify that the correct date and time are displayed in the upper right corner of the screen. To correct the date and time, see the “Special Services” section of Chapter 10, “Options,” in the Vitros 250AT Chemistry System Operator’s Manual, or see the Operator’s Quick Guide. NOTE: Make sure the date and time are correct to prevent discrepancies in storage and retrieval of calibration, quality-control, and patient data. 9. The analyzer is now ready for normal operation.

2/00

Vitros 250 Chemistry System Maintenance & Diagnostics Guide Supplement for 250AT Systems

5–1

Troubleshooting Clearing Analyzer Tip Jams on the Vitros 250AT System

Clearing Analyzer Tip Jams on the Vitros 250AT System

Follow these steps to clear a jam in the Vitros 250AT System tip shuttle: 1. Raise the top left cover of the 250AT Chemistry System.

Tip Shuttle Area

The service interlock system will remove power from the analyzer motors. 2. Using the wooden end of a cotton swab, gently push the jammed tip(s) upward until the tip shuttle is freed.

Swab

3. Rotate the tip shuttle toward the front of the analyzer. 4. Pull the jammed tips downward to remove them, and discard them. 5. Close the analyzer cover. 6. Touch the REINITIALIZE target to continue operation.

5–2

Vitros 250 Chemistry System Maintenance & Diagnostics Guide Supplement for 250AT Systems

2/00

6 Replacing Parts Follow the procedures outlines in the “Replacing Parts” chapter of the Vitros 250 Chemistry System Maintenance & Diagnostics Guide if you need to replace any of the following parts: • Slide supply rotor sensor • Slide supply dispense blade • Okidata printer printhead Contact your Customer Support Representative if you require replacement of any other parts of the Vitros 250AT Chemistry System. Contact your lab automation vendor for help in replacing any parts of the automation track or automation system.

2/00

Vitros 250 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide Supplement for 250AT Systems

6–1

Replacing Parts

6–2

Vitros 250 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide Supplement for 250AT Systems

2/00

Ortho-Clinical Diagnostics, Inc. 100 Indigo Creek Drive Rochester, New York 14626-5101

EC

REP

Ortho-Clinical Diagnostics Johnson & Johnson 50 - 100 Holmers Farm Way High Wycombe Buckinghamshire HP12 4DP United Kingdom